NZ622702B2 - Anticancer pyridopyrazines via the inhibition of fgfr kinases - Google Patents

Anticancer pyridopyrazines via the inhibition of fgfr kinases Download PDF

Info

Publication number
NZ622702B2
NZ622702B2 NZ622702A NZ62270212A NZ622702B2 NZ 622702 B2 NZ622702 B2 NZ 622702B2 NZ 622702 A NZ622702 A NZ 622702A NZ 62270212 A NZ62270212 A NZ 62270212A NZ 622702 B2 NZ622702 B2 NZ 622702B2
Authority
NZ
New Zealand
Prior art keywords
substituted
6alkyl
formula
4alkyl
optionally
Prior art date
Application number
NZ622702A
Other versions
NZ622702A (en
Inventor
Patrick Rene Angibaud
Valerio Berdini
Lieven Meerpoel
Virginie Sophie Poncelet
Olivier Alexis Georges Querolle
Bruno Roux
Gordon Saxty
Original Assignee
Astex Therapeutics Limited
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from GBGB1118656.6A external-priority patent/GB201118656D0/en
Application filed by Astex Therapeutics Limited filed Critical Astex Therapeutics Limited
Publication of NZ622702A publication Critical patent/NZ622702A/en
Publication of NZ622702B2 publication Critical patent/NZ622702B2/en

Links

Classifications

    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/495—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with two or more nitrogen atoms as the only ring heteroatoms, e.g. piperazine or tetrazines
    • A61K31/4985—Pyrazines or piperazines ortho- or peri-condensed with heterocyclic ring systems
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/495—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with two or more nitrogen atoms as the only ring heteroatoms, e.g. piperazine or tetrazines
    • A61K31/505—Pyrimidines; Hydrogenated pyrimidines, e.g. trimethoprim
    • A61K31/506—Pyrimidines; Hydrogenated pyrimidines, e.g. trimethoprim not condensed and containing further heterocyclic rings
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/535—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with at least one nitrogen and one oxygen as the ring hetero atoms, e.g. 1,2-oxazines
    • A61K31/5375—1,4-Oxazines, e.g. morpholine
    • A61K31/5377—1,4-Oxazines, e.g. morpholine not condensed and containing further heterocyclic rings, e.g. timolol
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/04—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for ulcers, gastritis or reflux esophagitis, e.g. antacids, inhibitors of acid secretion, mucosal protectants
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/16—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for liver or gallbladder disorders, e.g. hepatoprotective agents, cholagogues, litholytics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P13/00—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system
    • A61P13/08—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system of the prostate
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P13/00—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system
    • A61P13/10—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system of the bladder
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P15/00—Drugs for genital or sexual disorders; Contraceptives
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • A61P35/04—Antineoplastic agents specific for metastasis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D471/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00
    • C07D471/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D471/04—Ortho-condensed systems
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D519/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing more than one system of two or more relevant hetero rings condensed among themselves or condensed with a common carbocyclic ring system not provided for in groups C07D453/00 or C07D455/00

Abstract

Disclosed are Pyrido[2,3-b]pyrazine compounds of formula (IA) or (IB), pharmaceutical compositions comprising said compounds, processes for the preparation of said compounds and the use of said compounds in the treatment of diseases, e.g. cancer.

Description

ANTICANCER PYRIDOPYRAZINES VIA THE INHIBITION OF FGFR KINASES FIELD OF THE INVENTION The invention relates to new pyridopyrazine derivative compounds, to pharmaceutical compositions comprising said compounds, to processes for the preparation of said compounds and to the use of said compounds in the treatment of diseases, e.g. cancer.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION ing to a first aspect of the invention there is provided compounds of formula (l): N N N Y UT/ / (R2) N " (l-A) N N N Y \ / (R2) N ” (l-B) including any tautomeric or stereochemically isomeric form thereof, wherein each R2 is ndently selected from hydroxyl, halogen, cyano, C1-4alkyl, Cg_4alkenyl, C2_4alkynyl, C1-4alkoxy, hydroxyC1-4alkyl, hydroxyC1-4alkoxy, _4alkyl, haloC1_ 4alkoxy, hydroxyhaloC1_4alkyl, hydroxyhaloC1_4alkoxy, C1_4alkoxyC1-4alkyl, haloC1. 4alkoxyC1-4alkyl, C1_4alkoxyC1-4alkyl wherein each C1_4alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two yl groups, hydroxyhaloCi_4alkoxyC1-4alkyl, R13, C1_4alkyl substituted with R13, C1_4alkyl substituted with -C(=O)—R13, C1_4alkoxy substituted with R13, C1-4alkoxy substituted with -C(=O)-R13, -R13, kyl substituted with , C1.4alkyl substituted with —C(=O)—NR7R8, C1_4alkoxy substituted with -NR7R8, C1. 4alkoxy substituted with —C(=O)—NR7R8, -NR7R8 and ~C(=O)—NR7R8; or when two R2 groups are ed to adjacent carbon atoms they may be taken together to form a radical of formula: -O-<C<R">2)p-O-; -X-CH=CH-; or -X-CH=N-; wherein R17 represents hydrogen or fluorine, p represents 1 or 2 and X represents 0 or S; Y ents -CR"3=N-OR19 or -E-D; D represents a 3 to 12 ring ed monocyclic or bicyclic carbocyclyl or a 3 to 12 ring membered clic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or 8, wherein said carbocyclyl and heterocyclyl may each be optionally tuted by one or more (eg. 1, 2 or 3) R1 groups; E represents a bond, —(CR22R23)n—, Cg_4alkenediyl optionally substituted with R22, CZ- ediyl optionally substituted with R22, -CO-(CR22R23)s-, —(CR22R23)S-CO—, —NR22- (CR22R23)s-, —(CR22R23)S-NR22-, -O-(CR22R23)s-, -(CR22R23)S-O—, -S(O)m—(CR22R23)s—, _ (CR22R23)s-S(O)m-, —(CR22R23)s-c0-NRZZ-(CR22R23)S- or —(CR22R23)S-NR22-CO- (CR22R23)s-; R1 represents hydrogen, halo, cyano, C1_6alkyl, Ci_6alkoxy, -C(=O)-O- C1-6alkyl, CZ- 4alkenyl, hydroxyCi_5alkyl, haloC1-6alkyl, hydroxyhaloCi_6alkyl, cyanoC1_4alkyl, C1- salkoxyC1_6alkyl wherein each C1_5alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, -NR4R5, C1_6alkyl substituted with -O-C(=O)— C1-5alkyl, C1_6alkyl substituted with -NR4R5, —-C(=O)-NR4R5, —C(=O)-C1-5alkyl-NR4R5, C1.5alkyl substituted with —C(=O)-NR4R5, 2—C1_5alkyl, —S(=O)2-haloC1.6alkyl, -—S(=O)2—NR14R15, C1_6alkyl substituted with -S(=O)2-C1_6alkyl, C1_6alkyl substituted with -S(=O)2-haloC1_salkyl, Ci- galkyl substituted with —S(=O)2-NR14R15, C1-6alkyl substituted with —NH-S(=O)2-Ci_6alkyl, C1_ealkyl substituted with =O)2-haloCi.6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with ~NR12- -NR14R15, R6, C1_6alkyl substituted with R6, ~—C(=O)—R6, c,-5alkyl substituted with — R6, hydroxyC1_6alkyl substituted with R6, C1_6alkyl substituted with —Si(CH3)3, Ci- salkyl substituted with -P(=O)(OH)2 or C1-6alkyl substituted with -P(=O)(OC1_6alkyl)2; R3 ents hydroxyl, C1-6alkoxy, hydroxyCi_6alkoxy, C1-6alkoxy tuted with -NR1°R“, C1.5alkyl, Cg-6alkenyl, kynyl, haloC1_6alkyl optionally substituted with —o- C(=O)-C1-6alkyl, yC1.6alkyl optionally substituted with —O-C(=O)-Ci.ealkyl, hydroxyC2-6alkenyl, hydroxyCz_6alkynyl, yhaloC1_6alkyl, 1_6alkyl, C1_5alkyl substituted with carboxyl, kyl substituted with —C1_6alkyl. C1-6a|kyl substituted with —C(=O)—O-Ct.6alkyl, C1_6alkyl substituted with C1-ealkoxyC1_6alkyl-O-C(=O)—-, Chsalkyl substituted with C1.6alkoxyC1-6a|kyl—C(=O)—, C1.6alkyl substituted with —O-C(=O)—C1_ aalkyl, C1_6alkoxyC1-6alkyl n each C1_6a|kyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or with —O-C(=O)—C1_6alkyl, Cgsealkenyl substituted with C1- ealkoxy, 02-6alkynyl substituted with C1-6alkoxy, C1_6alkyl substituted with R9 and optionally substituted with —O-C(=O)—C1_6alkyl, C1_6alkyl substituted with ~C(=O)—R9, C1- 6alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and R9, 02-6alkenyl tuted with R9, C2.6alkyny| substituted with R9, C1_6alkyl substituted with -NR‘°R“, C2_6alkenyl substituted with -NR1°R“, kynyl substituted with -NR1°R“, C1_6alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and ”. Chealkyl tuted with one or two halogens and -NR1°R“, -C1_5alkyl- C(R12)=N-o-R12, cmaikyi substituted with —C(=O)—NR1°R“, C1-6alky| substituted with — o-C(=0)-NR‘0R“, —S(=O)2-C1_6alkyl, —S(=O)2-hal001_6alkyl, —S(=0)2-NR14R15, C1_6a|kyl substituted with —S(=O)2-C1_6a|kyl, C1_6a|kyl substituted with —S(=O)2-haloC1_6alkyl, C1- salkyl substituted with —S(=O)2-NR14R15, C1_6alkyl substituted with ~NR‘2-S(=O)2-C1_ 6alkyl, kyl substituted with —NH-S(=O)2-haloC1-6alkyl, C1-5a|kyl substituted with — NR‘Z-S(=0)2-NR‘4R15, R13, C1.6alky| substituted with -P(=O)(OH)2 or C1_6alkyl substituted with ~P(=O)(OC1_6alkyl)2; R4 and R5 each ndently represent en, C1-6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with - NR14R15, hydroxyC1_6a|kyl, haloC1_6alkyl, hydroxyhaloC1_6alkyl, C1_6alkoxyC1_6alkyl wherein each C1_6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl , — S(=O)2-C1_6alkyl, —S(=O)2-ha|001_6alkyl, —S(=O)2-NR14R15, —C(=O)—NR14R15, —C(=O)—O- C1_6a|kyl, -C(=O)-R13, kyl substituted with ~S(=O)2-C1_5alkyl, C1_6alkyl substituted with -S(=O)2-haloC1_6alkyl, C1_6a|kyl substituted with —S(=0)2-NR14R15, C1.6alky| substituted with —NH-S(=O)2-C1_6alkyl, kyl substituted with —NH-S(=O)2-hal001- 6eikyi, C1_6alkyl substituted with —NH- S(=0)2-NR14R15, R13 or C1.6alkyl substituted with R13; R6 represents Cg_gcycloalkyl, C3_gcycloalkenyl, phenyl, 4 to 7-membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or 8; said C3- acycloalkyl, C3-8cycloalkenyl, phenyl, 4 to 7-membered monocyclic heterocyclyl, optionally and each independently being substituted by 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents, each substituent independently being selected from cyano, C1_6alkyl, cyanoC1_6alkyl, hydroxyl, carboxyl, hydroxyC1-6alkyl, halogen, haloC1_6alkyl, hydroxyhaloC1_6alkyl, C1_6alkoxy, C1- ealkoxyC1.5alkyl, C1_6alkyl-O-C(=O)—,-NR14R15, —C(=O)-NR14R15, C1_5alkyl substituted with -NR14R15, C1_ealkyl tuted with -C(=O)—NR14R15, -S(=O)2—C1.5alkyl, 2-haloC1_ salkyl, 2-NR14R15, C1.6alkyl substituted with —S(=O)2-Ci.6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with —S(=O)2-haloCi-6alkyl, C1_6alkyl tuted with —S(=O)2-NR14R15, C1_6alkyl substituted with —NH-S(=O)2-Ci_ealkyl, C1_6alkyl substituted with =O)2-haloC1_ Balkyl or C1_6alkyl substituted with —NH-S(=O)2-NR14R15; R7 and R8 each independently represent hydrogen, C1_6alkyl, hydroxyC1-6alkyl, haloC1_ salkyl, hydroxyhaloC1_6alkyl or koxyC1_6alkyl; Rg ents C3-gcycloalkyl, 03.8cycloalkenyl, phenyl, yl, or 3 to 12 membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one atom selected from N, O or 8, said 03-3cycloalkyl, C3_gcycloalkenyl, phenyl, naphthyl, or 3 to 12 ed monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl each optionally and each independently being substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents, each substituent independently being selected from :0, C1_4alkyl, hydroxyl, carboxyl, yCMalkyl, cyano, cyanoCMalkyl, C1_4alkyl-O-C(=O)-, Ci_4alkyl substituted with C1_4alkyl-O-C(=O)-, C1-4alkyl-C(=O)-, C1- 4alkoxyC1_4alkyl wherein each C1_4alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, halogen, haloC1_4alkyl, hydroxyhaloC1-4alkyl, -NR14R15, —C(=O)—NR14R15, CMalkyl substituted with -NR14R‘5, Cl-4alkyl substituted with -C(=O)—NR14R15, C1_4alkoxy, -S(=O)2-C1.4alkyl, —S(=O)2-haloC1.4alkyl, —S(=O)2—NRMR15, C1-4alkyl substituted with — S(=O)2-NR14R15, C1_4alkyl substituted with -NH-S(=O)2-C1_4alkyl, C1-4alkyl substituted with —-NH-S(=O)2-haloC1-4alkyl, Ci_4alkyl substituted with —NH-S(=O)2-NR14R15, R13, - C(=O)-R13, C1.4alkyl substituted with R13, phenyl optionally substituted with R16, phenle1-6alkyl wherein the phenyl is optionally tuted with R16, a 5 or 6-membered aromatic monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or 8 wherein said heterocyclyl is optionally substituted with R16; or when two of the substituents of R9 are attached to the same atom, they may be taken together to form a 4 to 7-membered saturated clic heterocyclyl containing at least one atom selected from N, O or S; R1‘) and R11 each independently represent hydrogen, carboxyl, C1_6all<y|, 1.6alkyl, C1.6alkyl substituted with —NR14R15, C1.5alkyl substituted with —C(=O)—NR14R15, haloC1_ salkyl, hydroxyC1_6alkyl, hydroxyhaloC1_6alkyl, C1_5alkoxy, C1_6alkoxy01-6alkyl wherein each Cmalkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, R6, C1- ealkyl substituted with R6, -C(=O)—R6, —C1_ealkyl,—C(=O)—hydroxyC1_6alkyl, — haloC1-6alkyl,-C(=O)—hydroxyhaloC1_6alkyl, C1_6alkyl substituted with —Si(CH3)3, —S(=O)2- C1_6alkyl, ——S(=O)2-haloC1_6alkyl, -S(=O)2-NR14R15, C1_6alkyl tuted with -S(=O)2—C1_ aalkyl, Cmalkyl substituted with 2-haloC1-6alkyl, Ct.6alkyl substituted with —S(=O)2- NR14R15, Cmalkyl substituted with =O)2-Ci_6alkyl, kyl substituted with —NH- S(=O)2-haloC1_6alkyl, C1_5alkyl substituted with carboxyl, or C1_6alkyl substituted with — O)2—NR14R15; R12 represents hydrogen or C1-4alkyl optionally substituted with C1_4alkoxy; R13 represents C3_8cycloalkyl or a saturated 4 to 6-membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said C3-gcycloalkyl or clic heterocyclyl is optionally substituted with 1, 2 or 3 substituents each independently selected from halogen, hydroxyl, C1_6alkyl, haloC1_5alkyl, =0, cyano, - C(=O)—Ct.6alkyl, Cmalkoxy, or -NR14R15; R14 and R15 each independently represent hydrogen, or haloCMalkyl, or C1-4alkyl optionally substituted with a tuent selected from hydroxyl, CMalkoxy, amino or mono-or di(Ct-4alkyl)amino; R16 represents hydroxyl, halogen, cyano, C1-4alkyl, C1.4alkoxy, —NR14R15 or — C(=O)NR‘4R‘5; R18 represents hydrogen, CH; alkyl, 03-8 cycloalkyl, C1_4alkyl substituted with C3_8 cycloalkyl; R19 represents hydrogen; C16 alkyl; 03-8 cycloalkyl; C1_6alkyl substituted with -O-R2°; - (CH2),-CN; —(CH2)r—CONR2°R21; ,1-NR20R21; -(CH2),1-NRZ"COR21 ; -(CH2),1-NR2°- (CH2)S-soz-R2‘; —(CH2)r1—NH-SOg-NR2°R21 ; -(CH2),1—NR2°C02R21 ; -(CH2),-sozNR2°R2‘; phenyl ally substituted with 1, 2 , 3, 4 or 5 substituents each independently selected from halogen, kyl, C1-4alkyloxy, cyano or amino; a 5- or 6-membered aromatic monocyclic heterocycle containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or 8, said heterocycle being optionally substituted with 1, 2 3 or 4 substituents each independently selected from halogen, C1.4alkyl, kyloxy, cyano or amino; wherein said 01-6 alkyl and C3_8 lkyl, may be optionally substituted by one or more R20 groups R20 and R21 independently represent hydrogen, C14; alkyl, CH; alkanol -(CH2),,-O-C1_ Salkyl, or when attached to a nitrogen atom R20 and R21 can be taken together to form with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached a monocyclic saturated 4, 5 or 6- membered ring which optionally contains a further heteroatom selected from O, S or N; R22 and R23 independently represent hydrogen, CH, alkyl, or hydroxyC1_6alkyl; m independently represents an integer equal to O, 1 or 2; n independently represents an integer equal to O, 1, 2, 3 or 4; s ndently represents an integer equal to O, 1, 2, 3 or 4; r independently represent an integer equal to 1, 2, 3, or 4; r1 independently represent an integer equal to 2, 3 or 4; the es thereof, the pharmaceutically able salts thereof or the solvates thereof.
WO1999/17759, /092430, W02008/003702, W001/68047, W02005/007099, W02004/098494, W02009/141386, , , WO 2011/026579, , WO 26, W02008/138878, W02004/104003, W02004/104002, W02007/079999, W02007/054556, W02010/084152, /0272736, U82005/0272728, /0123494, WO2011/135376 which each disclose a series of heterocyclyl derivatives.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE lNVENTlON Unless the context indicates otherwise, references to formula (l) in all sections of this document (including the uses, methods and other s of the invention) include references to all other sub-formula (e.g. l-A, l-B, l-C, l-D), sub-groups, preferences, ments and examples as defined .
The prefix “CM,” (where x and y are integers) as used herein refers to the number of carbon atoms in a given group. Thus, a C1_6alkyl group ns from 1 to 6 carbon atoms, a C3_6cycloalkyl group ns from 3 to 6 carbon atoms, a C1_4alkoxy group contains from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and so on.
The term ‘halo’ or ‘halogen’ as used herein refers to a fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine atom.
The term lkyl’, or ‘C1_6alkyl’ as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to a linear or branched ted hydrocarbon group containing from 1 to 4 or 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Examples of such groups include methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl or hexyl and the like.
The term ‘Cz.4alkenyl’ or ‘C2_6alkenyl’ as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to a linear or branched hydrocarbon group ning from 2 to 4 or 2 to 6 carbon atoms and containing a carbon carbon double bond.
The term ‘Cz_4alkynyl’ or ‘Czealkynyl’ as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to a linear or branched hydrocarbon group having from 2 to 4 or 2 to 6 carbon atoms and containing a carbon carbon triple bond.
The term ‘C1-4alkoxy’ or ‘C1_6alkoxy’ as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to an —O-C1_4alkyl group or an —O-C1_6alkyl group n C1_4alkyl and C1_6alkyl are as defined herein. Examples of such groups include methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy, and the like.
The term ‘C1_4alkoxyC1_4alkyl’ or ‘C1_6alkoxyC1_6alkyl’ as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to a C1_4alkyl—O-C1-4alkyl group or a C1_6alkyl—O-C1_6alkyl group wherein C1_4alkyland C1-6alkyl are as defined herein. Examples of such groups include methoxyethyl, ethoxyethyl, propoxymethyl, butoxypropyl, and the like.
The term ‘Cg-gcycloalkyl’ as used herein refers to a saturated clic hydrocarbon ring of 3 to 8 carbon atoms. es of such groups include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl or cyclooctyl and the like.
The term ‘C3-gcycloalkenyl’ as used herein refers to a monocyclic hydrocarbon ring of 3 to 8 carbon atoms having a carbon carbon double bond.
The term xyC1_4alkyl’ or ‘hydroxyC1_5alkyl’ as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to a C1-4alkyl or C1_6alkyl group as defined herein wherein one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a hydroxyl group. The terms ‘hydroxyC1_4alkyl’ or ‘hydroxyC1_6alkyl’ therefore include monohydroxyC1-4alkyl, monohydroxyC1.6alkyl and also polyhydroxyC1_4alkyl and polyhydroxyC1_6alkyl. There may be one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms replaced with a hydroxyl group, so the hydroxyC1.4alkyl or hydroxyC1_6a|kyl may have one, two, three or more hydroxyl groups. Examples of such groups include hydroxymethyl, hydroxyethyl, hydroxypropyl and the like.
The term ‘haloC1-4alkyl’ or ‘haloC1_6alkyl’ as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to a C1_4alkyl or Cmalkyl group as defined herein wherein one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a halogen. The term ‘haloC1-4alkyl’ or 1_5alkyl' therefore include monohaloC1-4alkyl, loC1_6alkyl and also polyhaloCMalkyl and polyhaloC1.6alkyl. There may be one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms ed with a halogen, so the haloCMalkyl or haloC1_6alkyl may have one, two, three or more halogens. Examples of such groups include fluoroethyl, fluoromethyl, trifluoromethyl or trifluoroethyl and the like.
The term ‘hydroxyhaloC1_4alkyl’ or ‘hydroxyhaloC1_5alkyl’ as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to a C1_4alkyl or C1-5alkyl group as d herein n one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a hydroxyl group and one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a halogen. The term ‘hydroxyhaloC1_4alkyl’ or ‘hydroxyhaloC1-6alkyl’ therefore refers to a C1_4alkyl or C1_6alkyl group wherein one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms are ed with a hydroxyl group and one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms are replaced with a halogen.
The term ‘hydroxyC1_4a|koxy’ or ‘hydroxyC1_5alkoxy’ as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to an ——O-C1_4a|kyl group or an —O-C1_6alkyl group wherein the C1_4alkyl and C1_5alkyl group is as defined above and one or more than one hydrogen atom of the C1_4a|kyl or C1_6alky| group is replaced with a hydroxyl group. The term ‘hydroxyC1_ 4alkoxy’ or ‘hydroxyC1_5a|koxy’ therefore include monohydroxyC1-4alkoxy, monohydroxyC1_6alkoxy and also polyhydroxyC1-4alkoxy and polyhydroxyC1_6alkoxy.
There may be one, two, three or more en atoms replaced with a hydroxyl group so the hydroxyC1-4alkoxy or hydroxyCHsalkoxy may have one, two, three or more hydroxyl . Examples of such groups include hydroxymethoxy, hydroxyethoxy, hydroxypropoxy and the like.
The term ‘haloC1_4alkoxy’ or ‘haloC1-6alkoxy’ as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to a —O-C1-4alkyl group or a —O-C1_6 alkyl group as d herein wherein one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a halogen. The terms ‘haloC1_4alkoxy’ or ‘haloC1_6a|koxy’ therefore include monohaloC1_4alkoxy, monohaloC1_6alkoxy and also polyhaloC1_4alkoxy and polyhaloC1_6alkoxy. There may be one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms replaced with a halogen, so the haloC1_4alkoxy or haloC1_6alkoxy may have one, two, three or more halogens. Examples of such groups include fluoroethyloxy, difluoromethoxy or trifluoromethoxy and the like.
The term ‘hydroxyhaloC1-4alkoxy’ as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to an —O-C1.4alky| group wherein the kyl group is as defined herein and wherein one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a hydroxyl group and one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a halogen. The term ‘hydroxyhaloC1_4alkoxy’ therefore refers to a —O—C1_4alkyl group n one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms are replaced with a hydroxyl group and one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms are ed with a n.
The term ‘haloC1_4a|koxyC1-4alkyl’ as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to a C1-4alkyl—O-C1_4alkyl group n C1-4alkyl is as defined herein and wherein in one or both of the C1_4alky| groups one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a halogen. The term ‘haloCM CMalkyl’ therefore refers to a C1.4a|ky|—O-C1_4alkyl group wherein in one or both of the kyl groups one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms are replaced with a halogen and wherein 01-4 alkyl is as defined herein. ably, in one of the C1-4alkyl groups one or more than one hydrogen atom is ed with a halogen. Preferably, haloC1_4alkoxyC1-4alkyl means C1_4alkyl substituted with haloC1-4alkoxy.
The term ‘hydroxyhaloC1_4alkoxyC1-4alkyl’ as used herein refers to a kyl—O-C1-4alkyl group wherein C1.4alkyl is as defined herein and wherein in one or both of the C1_4alkyl groups one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a hydroxyl group and one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a halogen. The terms ‘hydroxyhaloC1_ yC1_4alkyl’ therefore refers to a C1.4alkyl—O-C1_4alkyl group wherein in one or both of the C1-4alkyl groups one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms are replaced with a hydroxyl group and one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms are replaced with a halogen and wherein C1-4alkyl is as defined herein.
The term ‘hydroxyCZ-6alkenyl’ as used herein refers to a C2-6alkenyl group wherein one or more than one hydrogen atom is ed with a hydroxyl group and wherein C2- salkenyl is as defined herein.
The term ‘hydroxy02_6alkynyl' as used herein refers to a Czfialkynyl group wherein one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a hydroxyl group and wherein CZ- ealkynyl is as defined herein.
The term phenle1-5alkyl as used herein refers to a C1-6alkyl group as defined herein which is substituted with one phenyl group.
The term cyanoC1-4alkyl or cyanoC1.ealkyl as used herein refers to a C1_4alkyl or C1_6alkyl group as defined herein which is substituted with one cyano group.
The term “heterocyclyl” as used herein shall, unless the context indicates othenNise, include both aromatic and non-aromatic ring systems. Thus, for example, the term “heterocyclyl group” includes within its scope aromatic, omatic, rated, partially saturated and fully saturated cyclyl ring systems. In general, unless the context indicates otherwise, such groups may be clic or bicyclic and may n, for example, 3 to 12 ring members, more usually 5 to 10 ring members.
Reference to 4 to 7 ring members include 4, 5, 6 or 7 atoms in the ring and reference to 4 to 6 ring members e 4, 5, or 6 atoms in the ring. es of monocyclic groups are groups containing 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 ring members, more usually 3 to 7, and ably 5, 6 or 7 ring members, more preferably 5 or 6 ring members. Examples of bicyclic groups are those containing 8, 9, 10, 11 and 12 ring members, and more usually 9 or 10 ring members. Where reference is made herein to heterocyclyl groups, the heterocyclyl ring can, unless the context indicates othen/vise, be optionally substituted (i.e. unsubstituted or substituted) by one or more substituents as discussed herein.
The heterocyclyl groups can be heteroaryl groups having from 5 to 12 ring members, more usually from 5 to 10 ring members. The term “heteroaryl” is used herein to denote a heterocyclyl group having aromatic character. The term “heteroaryl” embraces polycyclic (e.g. bicyclic) ring systems n one or more rings are non-aromatic, provided that at least one ring is aromatic. in such polycyclic s, the group may be attached by the ic ring, or by a non-aromatic ring.
Examples of heteroaryl groups are monocyclic and bicyclic groups containing from five to twelve ring members, and more usually from five to ten ring members. The aryl group can be, for example, a five membered or six membered monocyclic ring or a bicyclic structure formed from fused five and six membered rings or two fused six membered rings, or two fused five membered rings. Each ring may contain up to about five heteroatoms typically ed from nitrogen, sulphur and oxygen. Typically the heteroaryl ring will contain up to 4 heteroatoms, more typically up to 3 heteroatoms, more y up to 2, for example a single heteroatom. in one embodiment, the heteroaryl ring contains at least one ring nitrogen atom. The nitrogen atoms in the heteroaryl rings can be basic, as in the case of an imidazole or pyridine, or essentially non—basic as in the case of an indole or pyrrole nitrogen. In general the number of basic nitrogen atoms present in the heteroaryl group, including any amino group substituents of the ring, will be less than five.
Examples of five membered heteroaryl groups e but are not limited to pyrrole, furan, thiophene, imidazole, furazan, oxazole, oxadiazole, azole, isoxazole, le, thiadiazole, isothiazole, pyrazole, triazole and tetrazole groups.
Examples of six membered aryl groups include but are not limited to pyridine, pyrazine, pyridazine, pyrimidine and ne.
A bicyclic heteroaryl group may be, for e, a group selected from: a) a benzene ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing 1, 2 or 3 ring heteroatoms; b) a pyridine ring fused to a 5- or 6—membered ring containing 0, 1, 2 or 3 ring heteroatoms; C) a pyrimidine ring fused to a 5— or 6—membered ring containing 0, 1 or 2 ring heteroatoms; d) a pyrrole ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing 0, 1, 2 or 3 ring atoms; e) a pyrazole ring fused to a 5- or 6—membered ring containing 0, 1 or 2 ring heteroatoms; f) an imidazole ring fused to a 5- or ered ring containing 0, 1 or 2 ring heteroatoms; 9) an oxazoie ring fused to a 5- or 6—membered ring containing 0, 1 or 2 ring heteroatoms; h) an isoxazoie ring fused to a 5- or 6—membered ring ning 0, 1 or 2 ring heteroatoms; i) a thiazole ring fused to a 5- or 6—membered ring containing 0, 1 or 2 ring heteroatoms; l) an isothiazole ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing 0, 1 or 2 ring heteroatoms; k) a thiophene ring fused to a 5- or 6—membered ring ning 0, 1, 2 or 3 ring heteroatoms; l) a furan ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing 0, 1, 2 or 3 ring heteroatoms; m) a cyclohexyl ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing 1, 2 or 3 ring heteroatoms; and a cyciopentyl ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing 1, 2 or 3 ring heteroatoms.
Particular examples of bicyclic heteroaryl groups containing a five membered ring fused to another five membered ring include but are not limited to imidazothiazole (e.g. imidazo[2,1—b]thiazole) and oimidazole (e.g. imidazo[1,2—a]imidazole). ular examples of bicyclic heteroaryl groups ning a six membered ring fused to a five membered ring e but are not limited to benzofuran, hiophene, benzimidazole, benzoxazole, isobenzoxazole, benzisoxazole, iazole, benzisothiazole, isobenzofuran, indole, isoindole, indolizine, indoline, isoindoline, purine (e.g., e, guanine), le, pyrazolopyrimidine (e.g. pyrazolo[1,5-a]pyrimidine), triazolopyrimidine (e.g. [1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrimidine), benzodioxole, imidazopyridine and pyrazolopyridine (e.g. pyrazolo[1,5-a]pyridine) groups.
Particular examples of bicyclic heteroaryl groups containing two fused six membered rings include but are not limited to quinoline, isoquinoline, chroman, roman, chromene, isochromene, chroman, isochroman, benzodioxan, quinolizine, benzoxazine, benzodiazine, pyridopyridine, quinoxaline, quinazoline, cinnoline, phthalazine, naphthyridine and pteridine groups.
Examples of polycyclic heteroaryl groups containing an aromatic ring and a non- aromatic ring include, tetrahydroisoquinoline, ydroquinoline, dihydrobenzthiene, dihydrobenzfuran, 2,3-dihydro-benzo[1,4]dioxine, benzo[1,3]dioxole, - tetrahydrobenzofuran, tetrahydrotriazolopyrazine (e.g. 5,6,7,8—tetrahydro— [1 ,2,4]triazolo[4,3-a]pyrazine), indoline and indane groups.
A nitrogen-containing heteroaryl ring must contain at least one ring nitrogen atom. Each ring may, in addition, contain up to about four other atoms lly selected from nitrogen, sulphur and oxygen. Typically the heteroaryl ring will contain up to 3 heteroatoms, for example 1, 2 or 3, more usually up to 2 nitrogens, for example a single nitrogen. The nitrogen atoms in the heteroaryl rings can be basic, as in the case of an imidazole or pyridine, or essentially non-basic as in the case of an indole or pyrrole nitrogen. in general the number of basic nitrogen atoms present in the heteroaryl group, including any amino group substituents of the ring, will be less than five.
WO 61080 Examples of nitrogen-containing heteroaryl groups include, but are not limited to, pyridyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, yl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, oxatriazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, furazanyl, pyrazolyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, triazinyl, triazolyl (e.g., 1,2,3-triazolyl, 1,2,4-triazolyl), tetrazolyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, benzimidazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzisoxazole, benzthiazolyl and benzisothiazole, indolyl, 3H-indolyl, isoindolyl, indolizinyl, isoindolinyl, l (e.g., adenine [6-aminopurine], guanine [2- amino-6—hydroxypurinel), indazolyl, quinolizinyl, benzoxazinyl, benzodiazinyl, pyridopyridinyl, quinoxalinyl, quinazolinyl, cinnollnyl, phthalazinyl, naphthyridinyl and pteridinyl.
Examples of nitrogen-containing polycyclic heteroaryl groups containing an aromatic ring and a non-aromatic ring include tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, and indolinyl.
The term “non-aromatic group” embraces, unless the context indicates othen/vise, unsaturated ring systems without aromatic character, partially saturated and fully saturated heterocyclyl ring systems. The terms “unsaturated” and “partially saturated” refer to rings wherein the ring structure(s) contains atoms sharing more than one valence bond i.e. the ring ns at least one multiple bond e.g. a C=C, CsC or N=C bond. The term “fully saturated” refers to rings where there are no multiple bonds between ring atoms. ted heterocyclyl groups include piperidine, morpholine, thiomorpholine, piperazine. Partially saturated heterocyclyl groups include pyrazolines, for example 2—pyrazoline and 3-pyrazoline.
Examples of non-aromatic heterocyclyl groups are groups having from 3 to 12 ring members, more usually 5 to 10 ring members. Such groups can be clic or ic, for example, and typically have from 1 to 5 heteroatom ring s (more usually 1, 2, 3 or 4 heteroatom ring members), usually selected from nitrogen, oxygen and r. The heterocyclyl groups can contain, for example, cyclic ether moieties (e.g. as in ydrofuran and dloxane), cyclic thioether moieties (e.g. as in tetrahydrothiophene and dithiane), cyclic amine moieties (e.g. as in pyrrolidlne), cyclic amide moieties (e.g. as in pyrrolidone), cyclic thioamides, cyclic thioesters, cyclic ureas (e.g. as in olidin-Z-one) cyclic ester moieties (e.g. as in butyrolactone), cyclic sulphones (e.g. as in sulpholane and sulpholene), cyclic sulphoxides, cyclic sulphonamides and combinations thereof (e.g. thiomorpholine).
Particular examples e morpholine, dine (e.g. 1-piperidinyl, 2-piperidinyl, 3— piperidinyl and 4-piperidinyl), done, pyrrolidine (e.g. 1—pyrrolidinyl, 2—pyrrolidinyl and 3—pyrrolidinyl), pyrrolidone, azetidine, pyran (2H-pyran or 4H-pyran), dihydrothiophene, dihydropyran, dihydrofuran, dihydrothiazole, tetrahydrofuran, tetrahydrothiophene, dioxane, tetrahydropyran (e.g. 4-tetrahydro pyranyl), imidazoline, imidazolidinone, oxazoline, thiazoline, 2—pyrazoline, pyrazolidine, piperazone, piperazine, and N-alkyl piperazines such as N-methyl piperazine. In general, preferred non-aromatic heterocyclyl groups include saturated groups such as piperidine, pyrrolidine, azetidine, morpholine, piperazine and N-alkyl piperazines.
In a nitrogen—containing non-aromatic cyclyl ring the ring must contain at least one ring nitrogen atom. The heterocylic groups can contain, for example cyclic amine moieties (e.g. as in idine), cyclic amides (such as a pyrrolidinone, piperidone or caprolactam), cyclic sulphonamides (such as an isothiazolidine 1,1-dioxide, [1 ,2]thiazinane 1,1—dioxide or [1,2]thiazepane oxide) and ations thereof.
Particular examples of nitrogen-containing non-aromatic heterocyclyl groups include aziridine, morpholine, thiomorpholine, dine (e.g. 1-piperidinyl, 2—piperidinyl, 3- piperidinyl and 4-piperidinyl), pyrrolidine (e.g. 1-pyrrolidinyl, 2-pyrrolidinyl and 3- pyrrolidinyl), pyrrolidone, dihydrothiazole, imidazoline, imidazolidinone, ine, thiazoline, 6H—1,2,5-thiadiazine, 2-pyrazoline, 3-pyrazoline, pyrazolidine, piperazine, and N-alkyl piperazines such as N-methyl piperazine.
The cyclyl groups can be clic fused ring systems or bridged ring systems such as the oxa- and aza analogues of bicycloalkanes, tricycloalkanes (e.g. adamantane and oxa-adamantane). For an explanation of the distinction between fused and bridged ring systems, see Advanced Organic Chemistry, by Jerry March, 4th Edition, Wiley cience, pages 3, 1992.
The heterocyclyl groups can each be unsubstituted or substituted by one or more substituent groups. For example, heterocyclyl groups can be unsubstituted or substituted by 1, 2, 3 or 4 substituents. Where the heterocyclyl group is monocyclic or bicyclic, typically it is tituted or has 1, 2 or 3 substituents.
The term “carbocyclyl” as used herein shall, unless the context indicates othen/vise, include both ic and non-aromatic ring systems. Thus, for example, the term cyclyl group” includes within its scope aromatic, non-aromatic, unsaturated, partially saturated and fully saturated yclyl ring systems. in general, unless the context indicates othenNise, such groups may be clic or bicyclic and may contain, for example, 3 to 12 ring members, more usually 5 to 10 ring members.
Reference to 4 to 7 ring members include 4, 5, 6 or 7 atoms in the ring and reference to 4 to 6 ring s include 4, 5, or 6 atoms in the ring. Examples of monocyclic groups are groups containing 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 ring members, more usually 3 to 7, preferably 5, 6 or 7 ring members, more preferably 5 or 6 ring members. Examples of bicyclic groups are those containing 8, 9, 10, 11 and 12 ring s, and more usually 9 or 10 ring s. Where reference is made herein to carbocyclyl groups, the carbocyclyl ring can, unless the context indicates othenNise, be optionally substituted (i.e. unsubstituted or substituted) by one or more substituents as discussed herein.
The term carbocyclyl comprises aryl, C3_gcycloalkyl, C3_gcycloalkenyl.
The term aryl as used herein refers to carbocyclyl aromatic groups including phenyl, naphthyl, l, and tetrahydronaphthyl groups.
Whenever used hereinbefore or hereinafter that substituents can be selected each independently out of a list of us definitions, all possible combinations are intended which are chemically possible. er used hereinbefore or hereinafter that a particular substituent is r substituted with two or more groups, such as for example hydroxyhaloC1-4alkyl, hydroxyhaloC1_4alkoxy, all possible combinations are intended which are chemically possible.
In one embodiment, the invention relates to a compound of formula (l-A).
In one embodiment, the invention relates to a compound of formula (l—B).
WO 61080 in one embodiment, Y represents -CR18=N-OR19. In particular wherein R18 and R19 ent kyl.
In one embodiment, Y represents —E—D wherein E represents a bond.
In one embodiment, Y ents a 3 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic carbocyciyl or a 3 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or 8, wherein said carbocyciyl and heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R1 groups. in one embodiment, Y represents a 5 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic yciyl or a 5 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or 8, wherein said carbocyciyl and cyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R1 groups. in one embodiment, Y represents an ic 3 to 12, in particular an ic 5 to 12, ring membered monocyclic or ic carbocyciyl or an aromatic 3 to 12, in particular an aromatic 5 to 12, ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic cyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or 8, n said carbocyciyl and heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R1 groups.
In one embodiment, Y represents an aromatic 3 to 12 (e.g. 5 to 10) ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic carbocyciyl, wherein said carbocyciyl may be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R1 groups.
In one embodiment, Yrepresents phenyl or naphthyl, wherein said phenyl or naphthyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R1 groups. in one embodiment, Y represents a 5 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or 8, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R1 groups.
WO 61080 In one embodiment, Yrepresents an aromatic 5 to 12 ring membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or 8, wherein said heterocyclyl group may each be ally tuted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R1 groups.
In one embodiment, Y represents a 5 or 6 ring membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or 8, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally tuted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R1 groups. in one embodiment, Y represents an aromatic 5 or 6 ring membered monocyclic heterocyclyl ning at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or 8, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R1 groups. in one embodiment, Yrepresents a 5 ring membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R1 .
In one ment, Y represents a 5 ring membered monocyclic aromatic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or 8, n said heterocyclyl may each be ally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R1 groups. in one embodiment, Y represents pyrazolyl (e.g. pyrazol-4yl), wherein said pyrazolyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R1 groups.
In one embodiment, Y represents a 6 ring membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or 8, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R1 groups.
In one embodiment, Y represents a 6 ring membered monocyclic aromatic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or 8, wherein said cyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R1 groups.
In one embodiment, Yrepresents a 12 ring membered bicyclic heterocyclyi containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or 8, wherein said heterocyclyi may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R1 groups.
In one embodiment, Yrepresents a 12 ring membered bicyclic ic cyclyi containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or 8, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R1 groups.
Rla / l \N in one embodiment Y represents R121 wherein R1 represents hydrogen, C1- salkyl, Cz_4alkenyl, hydroxyC1_6alkyl, haloC1_6alkyl, hydroxyhaloC1_6alkyl, cyanoC1_4alkyl, C1_6alkoxyC1_6alkyl wherein each 01-6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR4R5, kyl substituted with —C(=O)— NR4R5, 2-C1_6alkyl, —S(=O)2—haloC1_5alkyl, —S(=O)2—NR14R15, 01-6alkyl substituted with -S(=O)2-C1_6alkyl, Ctaalkyl substituted with -S(=O)2-haloC1_6alkyl, C1_6alkyl substituted with 2-NR‘4R15, kyl substituted with —NH—S(=O)2-C1_6alkyl, c1.
Balkyl substituted with -NH-S(=O)2—haloC1_6alkyl, C1_6alkyl substituted with —NR12-S(=O)2- NR14R‘5, R6, 01.6alkyl substituted with R6, c,_6aikyi tuted with —C(=O)—R6, hydroxyC1_5alkyl substituted with R6, C1_6alkyl substituted with —Si(CH3)3, C1_6alkyl substituted with (OH)2 or C1_galkyl substituted with -P(=O)(OC1_6alkyl)2; and each R1&1 is independently selected from hydrogen, C1-4alkyl, yC1-4alkyl, C1_4alkyl tuted with amino or mono- or di(C1.4alkyl)amino or -NH(Cg-8cycloalkyl), cyanoC1_ 4alkyl, C1-4alkoxyC1_4alkyl, and C1_4alkyl substituted with one or more fluoro atoms. In one ment, R” is independently selected from hydrogen and C1_4alkyl. In one embodiment, R”1 is hydrogen.
In one ment, Y represents /\/ wherein R1 represents hydrogen, C1- 6aIkyI, C2_4aIkenyl, hydroxyC1_6aIkyI, _6alkyI, hydroxyhanC1_6alkyI, C1_6alkoxyCi_ 5aIkyI wherein each Ci_6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, yi substituted with , C1_6alky| substituted with —C(=O)—NR4R5, — S(=O)2-C1_6alkyl, —S(=O)2-haloC1_6alkyI, —S(=O)2-NR14R15, kyI substituted with - S(=O)2-Ci_6alkyi, C1-6alkyl substituted with -S(=O)2-haloC1-5alkyI, C1-5aIkyI substituted with —S(=O)2-NR14R15, kyi substituted with —NH-S(=O)2-Ci_salkyl, c,_6aikyi substituted with —NH-S(=O)2-hanC1.6alkyl, c,_6aikyi substituted with —NR12-S(=O)2- NR14R15, R6, C1_6aIkyI substituted with R6, Ci.6a|kyI substituted with -R6, yCHgalkyI substituted with R6, Cideaikyl substituted with -Si(CH3)3, Cmalkyl substituted with -P(=O)(OH)2 or C1_6alkyI substituted with -P(=O)(OCi-6alkyI)2.
In one embodiment, E represents a bond, Cz_4alkenediyl optionaIIy substituted with R22, - CO-(CR22R23)s-, —(CR22R23)s-CO-, -NR22-(CR22R23 -(CR22R23)s-NR22-, -O—(CR22R23)s-, — (CR22R23)3-CO-NRZZ-(CR22R23)S- or —(CR22R23)s-NRZZ-CO-(CR22R23)S-.
In one embodiment, E represents a bond, 02,4alkenediyl, -CO-(CR22R23)s-, -(CR22R23)S- 00-, -NR22-(CR22R23)S-, -(CR22R23)S-NR22-, —(CR22R23)s—CO—NR22-(CR22R23)S— or — (CR22R23)s-NRZZ-CO-(CR22R23)S-.
In one embodiment, E represents 02-4aIkenedin, -CO-(CR22R23)S-, -(CR22R23)s—CO-, - NR22'(CR22R23)5', R23)S'NR22', —(CR22R23)3‘CO'NR22'(CR22R23)S' or _(CR22R23)S_ NR22-CO-(CR22R23)S-.
In one embodiment, E represents a bond.
In one embodiment, Y ents —E—D, wherein E is other than a bond.
In one embodiment, Y represents —E-D, wherein E is other than a bond and D represents any one of the following : - a 3 to 12 ring membered monocycIic or bicycIic carbocyclyi or a 3 to 12 ring ed monocycIic or bicyclic heterocycIyI containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or 8, wherein said carbocyclyl and heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R1 groups; - a 5 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or ic carbocyclyl or a 5 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom ed from N, O or 8, wherein said carbocyclyl and heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R1 groups; - phenyl or naphthyl, wherein said phenyl or naphthyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R1 groups; - a 5 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic cyclyl containing at least one atom selected from N, O or 8, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R1 groups; - a 5 or 6 ring membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or 8, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be ally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R1 groups; - a 5 ring membered monocyclic heterocyclyl ning at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or 8, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R1 ; - a 5 ring membered monocyclic aromatic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or 8, wherein said heterocyclyl group may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R1 groups; - a 6 ring membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or 8, wherein said cyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R1 groups; - a 6 ring membered monocyclic aromatic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or 8, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R1 groups; - a 12 ring membered bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or 8, wherein said cyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R1 groups; - a 12 ring membered bicyclic aromatic heterocyclyl ning at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or 8, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally tuted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R1 groups; - Rla wherein R1 ents hydrogen, Ct-6alkyl, C2_4alkenyl, hydroxyC1_6alkyl, haloCt_6alkyl, hydroxyhaloC1_6alkyl, cyanoCMalkyl, C1_6alkoxth_5alkyl wherein each C1. 6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, C1_6alkyl substituted with -NR4R5, Ctsalkyl substituted with —C(=O)-NR4R5, 2-C1.6alkyl, — S(=O)2-haloC1_6alkyl,—S(=O)2-NR14R15, C1_6alkyl substituted with -S(=O)2-Ct_5alkyl, o1.
Galkyl tuted with -S(=O)2-haloC1-5alkyl, l substituted with 2-NR14R15, C1_6alkyl substituted with —NH-S(=O)2—C1_6alkyl, Cmalkyl tuted with —NH-S(=O)2- haloC1_6alkyl, C1.6alkyl substituted with —NR12—S(=O)2—NR14R15, R6, C1.6alkyl substituted with R6, Ctsalkyl substituted with —C(=O)—R6, hydroxyC1_6alkyl substituted with R6, C1- Galkyl substituted with —Si(CH3)3, C1_5alkyl substituted with -P(=O)(OH)2 or C1_6alkyl substituted with -P(=O)(OC1-6alkyl)2; and each R1&1 is independently selected from hydrogen, C1.4alkyl, hydroxyC1_4alkyl, Ct_4alkyl substituted with amino or mono- or di(C1_ 4alkyl)amino or -NH(Cg-8cycloalkyl), 1_4alkyl, C1_4alkoxth-4alkyl, and C1_4alkyl substituted with one or more fluoro atoms; - L/Nwherein R1 represents hydrogen, C1_6alkyl, C2-4alkenyl, hydroxyC1-6alkyl, haloC1-5alkyl, hydroxyhaloC1-6alkyl, Ct_6alkoxyC1_5alkyl wherein each C1_6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two yl groups, Ctealkyl substituted with -NR4R5, kyl tuted with —C(=O)-NR4R5, -S(=O)2-C1.6alkyl, —S(=O)2-haloC1_ ealkyl, —S(=0)2-NR‘4R‘5, C1-6alkyl substituted with -S(=O)2-Ct.6alkyl, 01.6alkyl substituted with -S(=O)2-haloC1_6alkyl, 01.6alkyl substituted with —S(=O)2—NR14R15, C1_5alkyl tuted with —NH-S(=O)2-C1_5alkyl, C1_5alkyl substituted with —NH-S(=O)2—haloct_ , C1_6alkyl substituted with —NR12-S(=O)2—NR14R15, R6, C1-6alkyl substituted with R6, C1_6alkyl substituted with —C(=O)—R6, hydroxth_6alkyl substituted with R6, C1-5alkyl substituted with —Si(CH3)3, C1-6alkyl tuted with -P(=O)(OH)2 or Ctsalkyl substituted with -P(=O)(OCt.6alkyl)2. 2012/052672 In one embodiment, D is other than pyrazolyl, in particular D is piperidinyl, nyl, phenyl, pyrolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, pyrolopyridinyl, 1,3—benzodioxolyl, l, thiazolyl, cyclopentyl, azetidinyl, morpholinyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, piperazinyl, 1,2,3,6- tetrahydropyridinyl, 2,5-dihydropyrolyl, pyrimidinyl, dinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, said rings being optionally substituted. Said optional tuents may represent halo, cyano, Ctealkyl, C1_6alkoxy, -C(=O)—O-Ci_6alkyl, hydroxyC1.5alkyl, -NR4R5, C1_5alkyl substituted with —O—C(=O)— Cmalkyl, C1_6alkyl substituted with -NR4R5,—C(=O)-NR4R5, — C(=O)—C1.6a|kyI-NR4R5, R6, C1_6alkyl substituted with R6.
In one embodiment, E is other than a bond and D is other than lyl, in particular D is piperidinyl, pyridinyl, , pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, pyrrolopyridinyl, 1,3— benzodioxolyl, indolyl, thiazolyl, cyclopentyl, azetidinyl, morpholinyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, zinyl, 1,2,3,6-tetrahydropyridinyl, 2,5-dihydropyrolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, said rings being optionally substituted.
In one embodiment, E is a bond and D is optionally substituted zolyl. In one embodiment, E is a bond and D is 4-pyrazolyl substituted at the 1 position with C1_6alkyl for example methyl.
In one embodiment, E is a bond and D is 1—pyrazolyl or 2-pyrazolyl, both may optionally be substituted.
In one embodiment, E is other than a bond and D is 1-pyrazolyl or 2—pyrazolyl, both may optionally be substituted.
In one embodiment, E is other than a bond and D is optionally substituted pyrazolyl.
In one embodiment, E is a bond and D is an optionally tuted 6 membered carbocyclyl or an optionally substituted 5 or 6 membered saturated or aromatic heterocyclyl, such as for example an ally substituted phenyl, pyrazolyl, pyrrolyl, nyl, morpholino, piperazinyl or piperidinyl; more in particular D is an optionally substituted pyrazolyl; even more in particular D is pyrazolyl substituted with kyl.
In one embodiment R1 represents hydrogen, Ci_6alkyl, C2.4alkenyl, hydroxyC1_6alkyl, haloCmalkyl, hydroxyhaloC1_6alkyl, cyanoC1-4alkyl, C1_6alkoxyC1_6alkyl wherein each Ci- WO 61080 5alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, kyl substituted with -NR4R5, Cmalkyl substituted with —C(=O)—NR4R5, —S(=O)2-C1_6alkyl, — S(=O)2-haloC1-6alkyl, 2-NR14R15, C1_6alkyl tuted with -S(=O)2-C1.6alkyl, c1- 6alkyl substituted with -S(=O)2-hal001_6alkyl, C1_6alkyl substituted with —S(=0)2-NR‘4R15, C1_6alkyl substituted with —NH—S(=O)2-C1.6alkyl, C1_6alkyl substituted with —NH-S(=O)2— haloC1-6alkyl, C1_6alkyl substituted with —NR12-st=0)2-NR‘4R15, R6, C1,6alkyl substituted with R6, Chgalkyl substituted with —C(=O)—R6, hydroxyC1_5alkyl tuted with Re, C1. 6alkyl substituted with —Si(CH3)3, C1_6alkyl substituted with -P(=O)(OH)2 or C1-6alkyl substituted with -P(=O)(OC1-6alkyl)2.
In one embodiment R1 represents hydrogen, C1_5alkyl, Cg_4alkenyl, hydroxth-5alkyl, haloCmalkyl, C1_5alkoxyC1_6alkyl wherein each C1_6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR4R5, C1_5alkyl substituted with -—C(=O)-NR4R5, —S(=O)2-C1.6alkyl, —S(=0)2-NR14R‘5, Ct.6alkyl substituted with - —Ct.6alkyl, C1_6alkyl tuted with —NH-S(=O)2-Ct-6alkyl, R6, C1-6alkyl substituted with R6, C1_5alkyl substituted with —C(=O)—R6, hydroxyC1_5alkyl substituted with R6, or c1- 6alkyl substituted with 3)3. in one embodiment R1 represents hydrogen. in one embodiment R1 represents C1-6alkyl, hydroxyC1-5alkyl, hydroxyhaloC1-6alkyl, C1- yC1.5alkyl wherein each kyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, C1_ealkyl substituted with , Chealkyl substituted with -S(=O)2-C1_ salkyl, R6, C1-5alkyl substituted with R6, more in particular R1 ents C1_6alkyl. in one embodiment R1 represents methyl.
In one embodiment each R2 is independently selected from hydroxyl, halogen, cyano, kyl, Cg_4alkenyl, C1_4alkoxy, hydroxyC1_4alkyl, hydroxyC1-4alkoxy. haloC1_4alkyl, haloCMalkoxy, C1_4alkoxyC1-4alkyl, R13, C1-4alkoxy substituted with R13, -C(=O)-R13, C1- 4aikyi substituted with NR7R8, C1_4alkoxy substituted with NR7R8, -NR7R8 and -C(=O)- NR7R8; or when two R2 groups are attached to adjacent carbon atoms they may be taken together to form a radical of formula -O-(C(R17)2)p-O- wherein R17 represents hydrogen or fluorine and p represents 1 or 2.
In one embodiment each R2 is independently seIected from hydroxyl, halogen, cyano, kyI, C2_4aIkenyl, C1_4aIkoxy, hydroxyCi_4alkyl, hydroxyC1_4aIkoxy, haloC1_4aIkoxy, Ci- 4alkoxyC1.4aIkyI, R13, C1.4aIkoxy substituted with R13, -C(=O)—R13, Ci_4a|ky| substituted with NR7R8, Ci_4aIkoxy substituted with NR7R8, —NR7R8 or -C(=O)-NR7R8.
In one embodiment one or more R2 represents Ci_4alkoxy, for exampIe CH30-, halogen, for example fluoro or chloro, hydroxyI, C1_4alkyl, for example methyl, or —C(=O)—NR7R8, in particular one or more R2 represents C1_4alkoxy, for example CH30-, or halogen, for example fluoro.
In one embodiment one or more R2 represents C1_4alkoxy, for example CH30-.
In one embodiment n is equal to O. In one embodiment n is equal to 1. In one ment n is equal to 2. In one embodiment n is equal to 3. In one embodiment n is equal to 4.
In one embodiment, n is equal to 2, 3 or 4, in ular n is equal to 3 or 4.
In one embodiment n is equal to 2 and one Rzis present at the tion and the other is present at the 5-position.
In one ment n is equal to 2 and one R2 is t at the 3-position and the other is present at the 5-position and each R2 represents C1_4aIkoxy, for example each R2 ents CH30—.
In one embodiment n is equal to 3 and one R2 is present at the 2—position, one R2 is present at the 3-position and one R2 is present at the 5-position.
In one embodiment n is equal to 3 and one R2 is present at the 3-position and represents C1_4a|koxy, for example CH30-; one R2 is t at the 5—position and represents C1- 4alkoxy, for example CH30-; one R2 is present at the 2-position and represents hangen, for e fluoro.
In one embodiment n is equal to 4 and one R2 is t at the 2-position, one R2 is present at the 3-position, one R2 is present at the 5-position and one R2 is present at the 6—position. in one embodiment n is equal to 4 and one R2 is present at the 3-position and represents C1_4alkoxy, for example CH30-; one Rzis present at the 5-position and represents Ci- 4alkoxy, for example CH30-; one R2 is present at the 2-position and represents halogen, for example fluoro, and one R2 is t at the 6-position and represents halogen, for example fluoro.
In one embodiment, R3 represents C1-6alkyl, hydroxyC1_6alkyl, hydroxyhaloC1-6alkyl, hydroxyC2_6alkynyl, haloC1_6alkyl, haloCt_6alkyl optionally substituted (e.g. substituted) with —O-C(=O)—C1.6alkyl, Ci_5alkyl substituted with )—C1_6alkyl, C1_6alkoxyC1-5alkyl wherein each Cmalkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, C1_5alkoxyC1V6alkyl wherein each Cmalkyl may optionally be tuted with one or two hydroxyl groups or with —O-C(=O)—C1_5alkyl, C1_6alkyl substituted with R9, C1-6alkyl tuted with -NR‘°R“, C1.6alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and -NR1°R“, ci_5aikyi substituted with one or two halogens and “, Ct-6alkyl substituted with —C(=O)-O— C1_salkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with —C(=O)-NR1°R“, C1_6alkyl substituted with carboxyl, C1_6alkyl tuted with —O-C(=O)-NR1°R“, C1_5alkyl substituted with —NR12-S(=O)2-C1- salkyl, Cmalkyl substituted with S(=0)2-NR14R15, C1.6alkyl substituted with R9 and ally substituted with —O-C(=O)—C1_5alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and R9, -C1_5alkyl-C(R12)=N-O-R12, —S(=O)2-NR14R15, 01.5alkyl tuted with —S(=O)2—C1.6alkyl, Cisalkyl substituted with —C(=O)-NR1°R“, C1.6alkyl substituted with —C(=O)—R9, cg. salkenyl substituted with -5alkynyl substituted with R9, hydroxyC1_5alkoxy, CZBalkenyl , kynyl, R13, C1_6alkyl substituted with C1.5alkoxyC1-6alkyl-C(=O)— or c1. salkyl substituted with -P(=O)(OC1_6alkyl)2.
In one embodiment R3 represents Ct.6alkyl, hydroxyC1.6alkyl, hydroxyhaloC1_5alkyl, haloC1_6alkyl, C1-6alkyl tuted with —C(=O)—C1_6alkyl, C1-6alkoxyC1-5alkyl wherein each C1.6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two yl groups, C1_5alkyl substituted with R9, C1.6alkyl substituted with -NR‘°R“, C1_6alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and -NR1°R“, 01.6alkyl substituted with one or two halogens and -NR1°R“' C1- salkyl tuted with —C(=O)-O-C1_ealkyl, kyl substituted with —C(=O)-NR1°R“, oi- 2012/052672 salkyl substituted with carboxyl, C1.6alkyl substituted with —O-C(=O)-NR1°R“, c,_6aikyi tuted with —NR12-S(=O)2-C1_6alkyl, C1.6alkyl substituted with —NR12-S(=O)2-NR14R15, Cmalkyl substituted with hydroxyl and R9, —01.ealkyl-C(R12)=N-O—R12, c,_6aikyi substituted with —C(=O)—NR1°R“, Chealkyl substituted with —C(=O)-R9, C2_6alkynyl substituted with R9, hydroxyC1_6alkoxy, C2_6alkenyl, C2-6alkynyl, R13 or Chsalkyl substituted with C1-6alkoxy01.6alkyl—C(=O)—. in one embodiment R3 represents 01.6alkyl, hydroxyC1_6alkyl, haloC1_6alkyl, haloCt-6alkyl optionally tuted with —-O-C(=O)—C1_6alkyl, hydroxyhaloC1-5alkyl, hydroxyCz_6alkynyl, C1.6alkyl substituted with —C(=O)-Ct_6alkyl, C1_6alkoxyC1-6alkyl wherein each Cmalkyl may optionally be tuted with one or two hydroxyl groups or with —O-C(=O)—C1_ 6eikyi, C1-6alkyl substituted with R9, cyanoC1.6alkyl, kyl substituted with -NR1°R“, C1_6alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and -NR1°R“, C1-6alkyl substituted with one or two halo atoms and -NR1°R“. C1_5alkyl substituted with -—C(=O)—O-C1-6alkyl, Cmalkyl substituted with C1_6alkoxyC1.6alkyl-C(=O)—, C1_6alkyl substituted with -NR1°R“, C1_6alkyl substituted with -C(=O)—NR14R15, C1_6alkyl substituted with carboxyl, kyl substituted with O)~NR1°R“, C1_6alkyl substituted with —NR12—S(=O)2-C1_6alkyl, c1.
Galkyl substituted with —NR12-S(=O)2-NR14R15, C1_6alkyl substituted with R9and substituted with —O—C(=O)-C1_6alkyl, C1_6alkyl substituted with yl and R9, -C1.6alkyl- C(R12)=N-o-R12,—S(=0)2-NR14R‘5, c,_6aikyi substituted with -S(=O)2-C1.6alkyl, Cmalkyl substituted with —C(=O)—R9, Cz_6alkenyl substituted with R9, C2-6alkynyl substituted with R9, C1_6a|kyloxyC1_6alkyl wherein each C1_6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, C2_6alkenyl, C2_6alkynyl, R”, or C1-5alkyl substituted with - OC1_6alkyl)2. in one embodiment, R3 ents C1_6alkyl, hydroxyC1_6alkyl, hydroxyhaloC1_6alkyl, haloC1_6alkyl, C1.6alkyl substituted with —C(=O)-C1_6alkyl, C1_5alkoxyC1_6alkyl wherein each C1_6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, C1_6alkyl substituted with R9, C1_6alkyl substituted with -NR‘°R“, C1.6alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and -NR1°R“, C1_6alkyl substituted with one or two halogens and -NR1°R“, c1. ealkyl substituted with —C(=O)—O-C1_6alkyl, Cmalkyl substituted with —-O—C(=O)—NR1°R“, C1_5alkyl substituted with carboxyl, C1_5alkyl substituted with -NR12-S(=O)2—C1-5alkyl, c1. ealkyl substituted with —NR‘2-S(=0)2-NR‘4R15, kyl substituted with hydroxyl and R9, —C1.6alkyl-C(R12)=N-O-R12, C1_6alkyl tuted with —NR1°R“, C1.ealkyl substituted with —C(=O)—R9, kynyl substituted with R9, hydroxyC1-5alkoxy, Cg- salkenyl, C2_6alkynyl or R”.
In one embodiment R3 represents Cg_6alkynyl, haloC1-5alkyl optionally substituted with — O-C(=O)-Ci_6alkyl, hydroxyC1_6alkyl optionally substituted with —O-C(=O)-C1_6alkyl, hydroxyhaloCt-5alkyl, C1-6alkoxyC1_5alkyl wherein each C1-6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or with —O-C(=O)—C1_ealkyl, C1_6alkyl substituted with R9, C2_5alkynyl substituted with R9,C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR1°R“, or C1-ealkyl tuted with —o-C(=O)-NR‘°R“.
In one embodiment R3 represents hydroxyCi_6alkyl, hydroxyhaloC1_6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with R9, C1_6alkyl substituted with -NR1°R“, Cz_6alkynyl substituted with R9, or kynyl.
In one embodiment R3 represents Ci_6alkyl, hydroxyC1-6alkyl, hydroxyhaloC1_6alkyl, cyanoCi_6alkyl, 01-6alkyl substituted with carboxyl, C1_6alkyl tuted with —C(=O)-O- C1-6alkyl, Ctsalkyl substituted with R9, C1_6alkyl substituted with —C(=O)—R9, C1-6alkyl substituted with yl and R9, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR‘°R“, C1.5alkyl substituted with —C(=0)-NR‘°R“, kyl substituted with —S(=O)2-C1_5alkyl, C1_6alkoxyC1-6alkyl wherein each C1_6alkyl may optionally be tuted with one or two hydroxyl groups or with —O—C(=O)-C1.6alkyl, kynyl substituted with R9, or C2_ealkynyl. In one embodiment, R3 represents hydroxth_6alkyl, haloC1-5alkyl, Ct.6alkyl tuted with R9, C1.5alkyl substituted with -NR‘°R“, koxyC1_6alkyl, or C2-6alkynyl. in one embodiment R3 represents hydroxyC1_6alkyl, hydroxyhaloC1_6alkyl, Ci_6alkyl substituted with R9, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR1°R“, 01.6alkoxyC1_6alkyl wherein each C1_6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or with —O- C(=O)-C1_6alkyl, 02.6alkynyl substituted with R9, or C2-6alkynyl. in one embodiment R3 represents hydroxyC1_6alkyl, hydroxyC1-6alkoxy|, hydroxyhaloC1_ , Crealkyl substituted with R9, Ct_6alkyl substituted with -NR1°R“, C2_5alkynyl or C2. 6alkynyl tuted with R9.
In one embodiment R3 represents kynyl. R3 may represent ‘CHZ'CEC_H.
In one embodiment when R3 represents kyl (e.g. C1_4alkyl) tuted with R9. R9 represents an optionally substituted aromatic 5 or 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl, for example optionally substituted imidazolyl, pyrimidinyl, or pyrazinyl.
In one embodiment when R3 ents C1_6alkyl (e.g. C1_4alkyl) substituted with R9, n R9 ents an optionally substituted aromatic 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one or two nitrogen atom, for example pyrimidinyl or pyrazinyl.
In one embodiment when R3 represents C1_4alkyl (e.g. methyl) substituted with R9, wherein R9 represents tituted imidazolyl (e.g. imidazol-Z-yl), unsubstituted pyrimidinyl (e.g. pyrimidin-Z-yl), unsubstituted pyrazinyl, or imidazolyl substituted with — S(O)2-N(CH3)2. in one embodiment R3 represents C2_6alkynyl (e.g. -—CH2 “CEC" ) substituted with R9.
R9 may represent an optionally substituted aromatic 6-membered monocyclic heterocycle containing one or two nitrogen heteroatoms, for example pyridinyl. The heterocyclyl may be substituted, for example substituted with one C1_4alkoxyl substituent, for example —OCH3. R3 may represent —CH2 —CEC— (3-methoxy-pyridin- 2-yl).' ln one ment R3 represents C1_6alkyl substituted with hydroxyl, halo and/or - NRTOR“. In one embodiment R3 represents Cmalkyl substituted with hydroxyl, halo or NR1°R11, wherein the C1_6alkyl group is a straight chain alkyl group e.g. 2-ethyl, n—propyl, n—butyl. In a further ment R3 represents C1-6alkyl substituted with hydroxyl or -NR1OR11.
In one ment R3 represents hydroxyC1-6alkyl. R3 may represent —CH2CH20H or - CHZCHZCHZOH.
In one embodiment R8 ents hydroxyhaloC1_6alkyl, for example R3 may represent —— CHZCHOHCF3. in one embodiment R3 represents C1_6alkoxyC1_6alkyl wherein each C1_6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, for example R3 may represent —CHZCHOHCHZOCH3.
In one embodiment R3 represents C1_6alkyl (e.g. C1_4alkyl) substituted with R9 or C1_5alkyl substituted with -NR1°R11. In particular, R3 represents C1_6alkyl (e.g. C1_4alkyl) substituted with R9 wherein R9 represents an optionally substituted 5 membered saturated heterocycle, such as for example pyrrolidinonyl or oxazolidinonyl, or an optionally substituted 5 membered ic heterocycle, such as for example imidazolyl or triazolyl, or R3 represents C1_5alkyl substituted with -NR1°R11 wherein R10 and R11 each independently ent hydrogen, -C(=O)—C1_6alkyl or R6. in a yet further embodiment R3 represents Cmalkyl tuted with -NR1°R“. in one embodiment R3 represents C1_4alkyl substituted with -NR1°R“. In one embodiment R3 represents C1-4alkyl substituted -NR1°R“, wherein the kyl group is a straight chain alkyl group e.g. 2-ethyl, n-propyl. in one ment R3 ents C1- 4alkyl tuted with -NR1°R11, n the CMalkyl group is an ethylene group (- CH2CH2-).
In one embodiment when R3 represents C1_6alkyl (e.g. 2-ethyl, n-propyl) tuted with “, wherein R10 and R11 are independently selected from hydrogen, C1-6alkyl and haloC1_6alkyl (e.g. hydrogen, iso-propyl or -CHZCF3). in one embodiment when R3 represents C1_6alkyl substituted with -NR1°R“, and one of R10 and R11 represents hydrogen and the other represents C1-6alkyl, for example —CH3 or —CH(CH3)2. R3 may represent —CHZCH2NHCH3 or—CHgCHzNHCH(CH3)2; In one embodiment R3 represents —CHZCH2NHCH(CH3)2.
In one embodiment, R9 is selected from : an optionally substituted Cg.gcycloalkyl, an optionally substituted aromatic 5 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted ted 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl. a saturated or an aromatic 3, 4, 5 or 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl ning one or two oxygen heteroatoms, an optionally tuted 4 membered heterocyclyl containing one oxygen heteroatom, an optionally substituted aromatic 6 membered monocyclic heterocycle containing one or two nitrogen heteroatoms, a partially saturated 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one nitrogen heteroatom which may optionally be substituted, an optionally tuted saturated 4 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one nitrogen atom, a saturated 5 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one nitrogen heteroatom, a saturated 6 ed monocyclic heterocyclyl ning one nitrogen heteroatom, a bicyclic heterocyclyl containing a benzene ring fused to a 5- or 6—membered ring containing 1, 2 or 3 ring heteroatoms, a 4, 5 or 6 membered monocyclic saturated heterocycle substituted with two substituents which are attached to the same atom and which are taken together to form a 4 to 7—membered saturated monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, an optionally substituted aromatic 5 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one sulphur heteroatom, an optionally substituted aromatic 5 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one sulphur and one en heteroatom, a saturated 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing two nitrogen atoms, an aromatic 5 membered clic heterocyclyl containing four nitrogen atoms, an aromatic 5 membered monocyclic cyclyl ning one oxygen and two nitrogen atoms, . an optionally substituted aromatic 5 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing two nitrogen atoms, an optionally tuted aromatic 5 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing three nitrogen heteroatoms, a saturated 5 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one nitrogen and one oxygen heteroatom, a saturated 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one nitrogen and one sulphur heteroatom, a saturated 7 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing two nitrogen heteroatoms, a saturated 7 membered clic cyclyl containing one nitrogen and one oxygen heteroatom, and phenyl or naphthyl, in particular phenyl. in one embodiment, R9 represents an optionally substituted 4 membered saturated heterocycle, such as for example oxetanyl; an optionally substituted 5 membered saturated heterocycle, such as for example pyrrolidinonyl, tetrahydrofuranyl or oxazolidinonyl; an optionally substituted 5 membered aromatic heterocycle, such as for example imidazolyl, oxadiazolyl, isoxazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, or pyrazolyl; an optionally substituted 6 ed saturated heterocycle, such as for example tetrahydropyranyl or morpholino; an optionally substituted 6 membered aromatic heterocycle, such as for example pyridyl, pyrimidinyl or pyrazinyl; an optionally substituted bicyclic cycle, such as for e benzimidazolyl or imidazotetrahydropyridinyl (3H imidazo[4,5-c]4,5,6,7-tetrahydropyridinyl); or Cg- acycloalkyl, such as for example cyclopropyl. in one embodiment, R9 represents an optionally tuted 5 membered aromatic heterocycle, such as for example imidazolyl, or an optionally substituted 6 ed aromatic heterocycle, such as for example l, dinyl or pyrazinyl. al substituents may represent C1- 4alkoxy or 2-NR14R15.
In one embodiment R9 represents an optionally substituted 5 membered saturated heterocycle, such as for example pyrrolidonyl or oxazolidinonyl, or an optionally substituted 5 membered aromatic heterocycle, such as for example imidazolyl or triazolyl.
In one embodiment, R9 represents an optionally substituted 5 membered aromatic heterocycle, such as for example olyl. Optional substituents may represent — S(=O)2-NR14R15.
In one embodiment, R9 represents an optionally substituted 6 membered aromatic heterocycle, such as for example pyridinyl or pyrimidinyl. Optional substituents may represent C1-4alkoxy.
In one embodiment, R9 represents an optionally tuted 5 membered aromatic or saturated heterocycle, such as for example imidazolyl, pyrolidinyl, oxazolidinyl. Optional substituents may ent =0, a 5 or ered aromatic monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or 8 wherein said cyclyl is optionally substituted with R16; or —S(=O)2-NR14R15.
In one ment, R9 represents C3_ecycloalkyl, such as for example cyclopropyl, a 3 ed saturated heterocyclyl, such as for example oxiranyl, an optionally substituted 5 membered ted heterocycle, such as for example pyrolidinonyl, an optionally substituted 6 membered aromatic or saturated heterocycle, such as for example pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, piperazinyl, or morpholinyl, an optionally substituted bicyclic heterocycle, such as for example indol-1,3-dione. Optional substituents may represent :0, Ct_4alkoxy, C1-4alkyl substituted with ~NR14R15, hydroxyCMalkyl, or C1_4alkyl-C(=O)-..
In one embodiment, optional substituents of R9 are hydroxyl, oxo, Ct_4alkyl, for example methyl, hydroxth_4alkyl, Ct_4alkoxy01.4alkyl, halogen, -NR14R‘5, Ct_4alkyl substituted with -NR14R15, C1_4alkoxy, -S(=0)2-NR‘4R‘5, in particular oxo.
In one embodiment R10 represents hydrogen or C1-6alkyl.
In one embodiment R” is hydrogen.
In one embodiment R11 represents hydrogen, C1-5alkyl, haloC1_6alkyl, —C(=O)—Ct-6alkyl, — S(=O)2—Ct.6alkyl, —S(=O)2-NR14R15, hydroxyC1_ealkyl, -C(=O)—hydroxyhaI001.6alkyl, - C(=O)-R6, cyanoC1_6alkyl, R6, -C(=O)-R6, C1.6alkyl substituted with R6,-C(=O)-haloC1_ 6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with —Si(CH3)3, Ctealkyl substituted with 15, Ctealkyl substituted with —C(=O)-NR14R15, C1-6alkoxy, hydroxyhaloC1-6alkyl, carboxyl, or C1- salkoxyC1-6alkyl.
In one ment R10 and R11 represent hydrogen, C1_5alkyl, hydroxth_6alkyl, -C(=O)- kyl, or R6. In one embodiment R10 and R11 ent hydrogen or C1_6alkyl.
In one embodiment, R6 represents a 6—membered monocyclic ted heterocyclyl which is optionally substituted. For example piperazinyl or morpholinyl or tetrahydropyranyl, optionally substituted with halogen, C1_6alkyl, or C1-5alkyI—O-C(=O)-.
In one embodiment, R6 represents a 6-membered monocyclic aromatic heterocyclyl which is optionally substituted. For example pyridinyl, optionally substituted with halogen, C1_5alkyl, or C1.6alkyI-O-C(=O)-.
In one embodiment, R6 represents a 4 membered monocyclic saturated heterocycle, such as for example oxetanyl; or a 6—membered monocyclic saturated heterocyclyl, such as for example piperidinyl, or a 5-membered monocyclic ic heterocycle, such as for example imidazolyl.
In one embodiment, R4 and R5 represent hydrogen.
In one ment, R7 and R8 each independently represent hydrogen or Cmalkyl, for example methyl.
In one embodiment, R12 represents hydrogen or kyl optionally substituted with C1- 4alkyloxy.
In one embodiment, R13 ents a saturated 4 to 6-membered monocyclic cyclyl ning at least one heteroatom selected from N or O.
In one embodiment, R14 and R15 each independently represent en or C1_4alkyl optionally substituted with hydroxyl. In one embodiment, R14 and R15 each independently represent hydrogen or C1_4alkyl.
In one embodiment, R22 and R23 each independently represent hydrogen.
In one embodiment of the invention, n represents an integer equal to 2, 3 or 4; and each R2 represents C1_4alkoxy, for example CH3O-, or halogen, for example fluoro; R3 represents hydroxyC1_6alkyl, hydroxyhaloC1_6alkyI, C1_6alkyl tuted with R9, C1_6alkyl substituted with -NR1°R“, C1_ealkoxyC1.6alkyl wherein each C1_5alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two yl groups or with O)—C1_6alkyl, Cg_6alkynyl substituted with R9, 02.6alkynyl; Y represents —-E-D wheren E represents a bond and D represents ally substituted pyrazoiyl. in one embodiment of the invention, n ents an integer equal to 2, 3 or 4; and each R2 represents C1_4alkoxy, for example CHgO-, or halogen, for example fiuoro; R3 represents hydroxyC1-6alkyl, hydroxyhaioC1_6a|kyi, kyt substituted with R9, C1_5alkyl substituted with —NR1°R“, C1_6alkoxyC1_6alkyl wherein each C1_6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or with ——O-C(=O)-C1_6alkyl, Czealkynyl substituted with R9, Czsalkynyl; Y represents —E—D wheren E represents a bond and D represents pyrazolyl substituted with C1-6alkyl; R10 and R11 represent hydrogen or C1- ealkyl; R9 represents an optionally tuted 5 membered aromatic heterocycle, such as for example imidazolyl, or an optionally substituted 6 ed aromatic cyole, such as for example pyridyl, dinyl or pyrazinyl.
In one embodiment of the invention, n represents an integer equal to 2, 3 or 4; and each R2 represents C1_4alkoxy, for example CH30-, halogen, for example fiuoro or chloro, hydroxyl, C1-4aikyl, for example methyl, or -—C(=O)—NR7R8, for example —C(=O)—NH-CH3; R3 represents C1_6alkyl, for example methyl or ethyl, hydroxyC1_6alkyl, hydroxyhaloC1_ 6alkyl, cyanoC1_6alkyl, kyl substituted with carboxyl, C1.6alkyl tuted with —- C(=O)—O-C1_6aikyl, kyl substituted with R9, C1_6aiky| substituted with —C(=O)-R9, C1.
Galkyl tuted with hydroxyl and R9, C1_6alkyl substituted with -NR1°R“, C1_6alkyl substituted with —C(=O)—NR1°R“, C1-5alkyi tuted with —S(=O)2-C1_6alkyl, c1. yC1-6alkyl wherein each C1_5alkyi may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or with —O-C(=O)-C1_5alkyl, 02-5GIKYHYI substituted with R9, C2_5alkynyl; Y represents —E-D wheren E represents a bond and D represents an optionally substituted clic 6 membered carbocyclyl, for example phenyl, or an optionally substituted 5 or 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl, for example an optionally substituted 5 or 6 membered saturated or aromatic heterocyclyl, such as for example pyrazolyl, pyrrolyl, pyridinyl, morpholino, zinyl or ininyi, in particuiariy D represents pyrazolyl optionally substituted with C1_6alkyl, more in particular D represents pyrazolyl substituted with C1_6aikyi.
In one embodiment of the invention, n represents an integer equal to 2, 3 or 4; and each R2 represents C1-4alkoxy, for example CH30—, halogen, for example fiuoro or chioro, hydroxyl, Ci-4alkyl, for e methyl, or —C(=O)-NR7R8, for example —C(=O)-NH-CH3; R3 represents C1-6alkyl, for example methyl or ethyl, hydroxyCi-6alkyl, hydroxyhaloC1- 6alkyl, cyanoCmalkyl, Ci_6alkyl substituted with carboxyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with — C(=O)—O-Ci_6alkyl, C1.6alkyl substituted with R9, Cmalkyl substituted with —C(=O)—R9, c1- 6alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and R9, Ci_ealkyl substituted with -NR1°R“, Ctsalkyl substituted with —C(=0)-NR‘°R“, Ct_6alkyl substituted with 2-C1_6alkyl, c1. 6alkoxyC1-6alkyl wherein each C1_6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or with O)—C1_6alkyl, CzsaalkanI substituted with R9, C2-6alkynyl; Y represents —E-D wheren E represents a bond and D represents an optionally substituted monocyclic 6 membered carbocyclyl, for e phenyl, or an optionally substituted 5 or 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl, for example an optionally substituted 5 or 6 membered ted or aromatic heterocyclyl, such as for e pyrazolyl, pyrrolyl, nyl, morpholino, piperazinyl or dinyl, in ularly D represents pyrazolyl optionally substituted with Ct.6alkyl, more in particular D represents pyrazolyl substituted with C1_6alkyl; R1 represents kyl, hydroxyC1-6alkyl, hydroxyhaloC1_6alkyl, Ci-5alkoxy01-6alkyl wherein each C1_6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, Ci_6alkyl substituted with -NR4R5, C1_5alkyl substituted with -S(=O)2-C1.5a|kyl, R6, C1_5alkyl tuted with R6, more in ular R1 represents kyl, for example ; R9 represents an optionally substituted 4 membered saturated heterocycle, such as for example oxetanyl; an optionally substituted 5 membered saturated heterocycle, such as for example pyrrolidinonyl, tetrahydrofuranyl or oxazolidinonyl; an optionally substituted 5 membered aromatic heterocycle, such as for example imidazolyl, oxadiazolyl, isoxazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, as for or pyrazolyl; an optionally substituted 6 ed saturated heterocycle, such example tetrahydropyranyl or morpholino; an optionally substituted 6 membered aromatic heterocycle, such as for example pyridyl, pyrimidinyl or pyrazinyl; an optionally substituted bicyclic heterocycle, such as for example benzimidazolyl or otetrahydropyridinyl (3H o[4,5-c]4,5,6,7-tetrahydropyridinyl); or Cgacycloalkyl , such as for example cyclopropyl, more in particular R9 represents an optionally substituted 5 membered ted heterocycle, such as for example pyrrolidinonyl or oxazolidinonyl, or an optionally substituted 5 membered ic heterocycle, such as for example imidazolyl or triazolyl; R10 and R11 represent hydrogen, Cmalkyl, hydroxth.6alkyl, -C(=O)—Ci_5alkyl, or R6; in particular R10 and R11 represent hydrogen, -C(=O)-Ct-5alkyl, or Re; R6 represents a 4 membered monocyclic saturated heterocycle, such as for example oxetanyl; or a 6-membered monocyclic saturated heterocyclyl, such as for example piperidinyl; or a ered monocyclic aromatic heterocycle, such as for example imidazolyl; R4 and R5 represent hydrogen; R7 and R8 each independently represent hydrogen or C1_6alkyl, for example methyl, R14 and R15 each independently represent hydrogen or C1_4alkyl optionally substituted with hydroxyl. in one embodiment, Y is ~E—D, n E is a bond and D is a 5 or 6 membered monocyclic aromatic heterocyclyl, wherein said heterocyclyl may optionally be substituted by one or more (eg. 1, 2 or 3) R1 groups, and wherein one or more of the following applies : n is 2; R2 is C1_6alkyloxy; R2 is placed in on 3 and 5.
In one embodiment, Y is —E—D, wherein E is a bond and D is piperidinyl, pyridinyl, phenyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, pyrrolopyridinyl, 1,3—benzodioxolyl, l, thiazolyl, cyclopentyl, azetidinyl, morpholinyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, piperazinyl, 1,2,3,6- tetrahydropyridinyl, 2,5-dihydropyrolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, said rings being optionally substituted, more in particular D is piperidinyl, pyridinyl, phenyl, yl, olyl, triazolyl, pyrrolopyridinyl, 1,3—benzodioxolyl, l, lyl, entyl, azetidinyl, morpholinyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, zinyl, 1,23,6- tetrahydropyridinyl, 2,5-dihydropyrolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, said rings being optionally substituted and n is 2, even more in particular D is piperidinyl, pyridinyl, phenyl, yl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, pyrrolopyridinyl, 1,3—benzodioxolyl, indolyl, thiazolyl, cyclopentyl, azetidinyl, morpholinyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, piperazinyl, - ydropyridinyl, 2,5-dihydropyrolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, said rings being optionally substituted; n is 2, R2 is C1_6alkyloxy, even further in particular D is piperidinyl, pyridinyl, phenyl, pyrolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, pyrolopyridinyl, 1,3- benzodioxolyl, indolyl, thiazolyl, cyclopentyl, azetidinyl, morpholinyl, olyl, oxazolyl, piperazinyl, 1,2,3,6—tetrahydropyridinyl, 2,5-dihydropyrolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, said rings being ally substituted; n is 2, R2 is C1_6alkyloxy and said R2 is placed in on 3 and 5.
In one embodiment there is provided compounds of formula (I): N N N Y UT/ / 2 N “”1 (l-A) N N N Y \ / 2 N (M (1—13) including any tautomeric or stereochemically ic form thereof, wherein each R2 is independently selected from C1_4alkoxy, for example CH30-, or n, for example fluoro; Y represents —E-D; D represents a 3 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic carbocyclyl or a 3 to 12 ring membered clic or bioyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, for example pyrazolyl, wherein said carbocyclyl and heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (eg. 1, 2 or 3) R1 groups; E represents a bond; R1 represents C1.6alkyl, for example methyl; R3 represents - hydroxyC1_6alkyl, for e —CHZCH20H or —CHQCH2CHZOH, - hydroxyhaloC1_6alkyl, for e -CHZCHOHCF3, - C1_6alkyl substituted with R9, for example —CH2- substituted with imidazol-2—yl, -CH2- substituted with imidazol-Z-yl substituted in the 1 on with —S(O)2-N(CH3)2, -CH2- substituted with pyrimidinyl, -CH2- substituted with pyrazinyl, - Cmalkyl substituted with -NR1°R“, for example —CHZCH2NHCH3 or— CH20H2NHCH(CH3)2, - C1_6alkoxyC1-6alkyl wherein each C1V6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, for example —CH2CHOHCHZOCH3, - kynyl substituted with R9, for example ——CH2 —CEC‘_ (3-methoxy-pyridin—2-yl), — kynyl, for example EC‘H; and n independently represents an r equal to 2, 3 or 4; the N-oxides thereof, the pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof or the solvates thereof.
In one embodiment there is provided compounds of formula (l) 3 N/ N N\ N\1L/ (R )n (I-C) 3 N/ ’T‘ / \ \ / (R2) N " (1-D) including any tautomeric or stereochemically isomeric form thereof; wherein n, R2 and R3 are as defined herein; the N-oxides thereof, the pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof or the solvates thereof.
In one embodiment there is provided compounds of formula (l-C) or Formula (l-D) including any tautomeric or stereochemically isomeric form thereof, n: R2 represents C1_4alkoxy (for example CH30—) or halogen (for e fluoro); and R3 represents hydroxyC1_6a|kyl (e.g. —CHZCH20H or —CHZCHZCH20H), C1-6alkoxyC1.
Balkyl wherein each C1_6alkyl may optionally be tuted with one or two hydroxyl groups (e.g. —CH2CHOHCHZOCH3), hydroxyhaloC1-6alkyl (e.g. —CHZCHOHCF3), C1- 6alkyl (e.g. C1-4alkyl) substituted with R9(e.g. wherein R9 represents an optionally substituted aromatic 5 or 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl, for example optionally substituted imidazolyl, pyrimidinyl, or pyrazinyl), C1_Ba|kyl (e.g. C1-4alkyl) tuted with -NR1°R11 wherein R10 and R11 are independently selected from en, C1_5alkyl and haloC1_6alkyl (e.g. hydrogen, iso—propyl or -CH2CF3), 02.6aikynyl (e.g. ‘CHZ'CEC_H) or 02-6aikynyl (e.g. -CH2 ‘CEC‘ ) substituted with R9 (e.g. R9 represents an optionally substituted aromatic 6-membered monocyclic heterocycle containing one or two nitrogen heteroatoms, for example pyridinyl); the N-oxides thereof, the pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof or the solvates thereof.
In one embodiment there is provided compounds of formula (l-C) or Formula (l-D) including any tautomeric or stereochemically ic form thereof, wherein: R2 represents C1-4alkoxy (for e CH3O-) or halogen (for example fluoro); and R3 represents hydroxyC1_6alkyl (e.g. —CHZCH20H or —CHZCH2CHZOH), CmalkoxyC1_ ealkyl wherein each kyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups (e.g. —CH20HOHCHZOCH3), hydroxyhaloCi-5alkyl (e.g. —CHZCHOHCF3), C1- 4alkyl (e.g. methyl) substituted with R9(e.g. wherein R9 represents an optionally substituted ic 5 or 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl, for example unsubstituted imidazolyl (e.g. imidazol-2—yl), unsubstituted pyrimidinyl (e.g. pyrimidin—2- yl), unsubstituted pyrazinyl, or imidazolyl substituted with —S(O)2-N(CH3)2), Ci.4aikyl (e.g.
-CHZCH2-) substituted with -NR1°R11 wherein one of R10 and R11 represents hydrogen and the other represents C1_6a|kyl, for example -CH3 or —CH(CH3)2 (e.g. R3 ents — CHZCHZNHCHg or—CHZCHZNHCH(CH3)2), Cg_6alkynyl (e.g. -CH2-CEC—H) or 02.6alkynyl (e.g. —CH2 “—CEC“ ) substituted with R9 (e.g. —CH2 —CEC— (3-methoxy-pyridinyl); the N-oxides f, the pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof or the es thereof. in one embodiment there is provided nds of formula (I-C) or Formula (l-D) including any tautomeric or stereochemically isomeric form thereof, n: R2 represents C1-4alkoxy (for example CH30-) or halogen (for example ) or hydroxyl; R3 represents C1-4a|kyl (e.g. —CH2- or —CH2-CH2-CH2-) substituted with R9(e.g. wherein R9 represents an optionally substituted aromatic 5 ed clic heterocyclyl, for example unsubstituted imidazolyl (e.g. imidazol-Z-yl), or unsubstituted triazolyl riazolyl) or R9 ents an optionally substituted saturated 5 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl, for example 2-pyrrolidinonyl (e.g. 2-pyrrolidinon-5—yl or 2—pyrrolidinon-1—yl) or 2-oxazolidinonyl (e.g. 2—oxazolidinonyl)) or R3 represents C1- 4alkyl (e.g. -CHzCH2-) substituted with -NR1°R11 wherein one of R10 and R11 represents hydrogen and the other represents C1_6a|kyl, for example -CH3 or —CH(CH3)2 (e.g. R3 represents —CH2CH2NHCH3 or —CH2CH2NHCH(CH3)2), or —C(=O)—C1_5alkyl, for example —-C(=O)-CH3 (e.g. R3 represents 2NH-C(=O)-CH3), or R6 (e.g. wherein R6 represents an optionally substituted 4 membered saturated heterocycle (e.g. oxetanyl)); n is 2,3, or 4; the N-oxides thereof, the pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof or the es thereof.
In one embodiment there is provided compounds of formula (l—C) including any tautomeric or stereochemically isomeric form thereof, wherein: R2 represents C1_4alkoxy (for example CH30-) or halogen (for e fluoro); R3 represents C1_4alkyl (e.g. ~CH2-) tuted with R9(e.g. wherein R9 represents an optionally substituted aromatic 5 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl, for example unsubstituted olyl (e.g. imidazolyl)) or R3 represents C1_4alkyl (e.g. -CH2CH2-) substituted with -NR1°R11 wherein one of R10 and R11 represents hydrogen and the other represents C1_6a|kyl, for example -CH3 (e.g. R3 ents —CH2CH2NHCH3 ); in particular R3 ents C1_4alkyl (e.g. —CH2-) substituted with R9 (e.g. wherein R9 represents an ally substituted aromatic 5 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl, for example unsubstituted imidazolyl (e.g. imidazol-2—y|)); n is 2, 3, or 4, in particular 3; the N-oxides thereof, the pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof or the solvates thereof.
In one embodiment there is provided compounds of formula (I-C) including any tautomeric or chemically isomeric form thereof, wherein: R2 represents C1_4alkoxy (for example CH30-) or halogen (for example fluoro); and R3 represents hydroxyC1_6alkyl (e.g. —CHZCH20H or —CHZCHZCHZOH), C1.6alkoxyC1_ 6alkyl wherein each C1_6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups (e.g. ~CH2CHOHCHZOCH3), hydroxyhaloC1_5alky| (e.g. ~CH2CHOHCF3), C1- 5alkyl (e.g. C1-4alkyl) tuted with . wherein R9 represents an ally tuted ic 5 or 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl, for example optionally substituted imidazolyl, pyrimidinyl, or pyrazinyl), C1_6a|kyl (e.g. C1_4a|ky|) substituted with -NR1°R11 wherein R10 and R11 are independently selected from hydrogen, C1.5alkyl and haloC1_6alkyl (e.g. en, iso-propyl or -CHZCF3), 02-6alkynyl (e.g. 'CHZ'CEC_H) or Cz_6alkynyl (e.g. —CH2 _CEC— ) substituted with R9 (e.g. R9 represents an optionally substituted aromatic 6-membered monocyclic heterocycle ning one or two nitrogen heteroatoms, for e pyridinyl); the N—oxides thereof, the pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof or the solvates thereof.
In one embodiment there is provided compounds of Formula (l-D) including any eric or stereochemically isomeric form thereof, wherein: R2 represents koxy (for example CHsO-) or halogen (for example fluoro); and R3 ents C1_6alkyl (e.g. C1_4alkyl) substituted with -NRwR11 wherein R10 and R11 are independently selected from hydrogen, C1_6alkyl and haloC1_5alkyl (e.g. hydrogen, iso— propyl or -CHgCF3) (e.g. R3 represents -—CHgCH2NHCH3 or—CHZCHZNHCH(CH3)2); the N-oxides thereof, the pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof or the solvates thereof.
In one embodiment the compound of formula (I) is a nd of formula (l-C): R3 N\ :11 l N N N / \ \ / / (R2) N " 0-0) n n, R1, R2 and R3 are as defined herein.
In one embodiment the compound of formula (I) is a compound of formula (l-C): 3 N/ R \ ' I N QNUN\ / \ / (Rzln N 0-9) wherein n, R1, R2 and R3 are as defined herein.
In one embodiment, the t invention relates to any one of the following compounds a / / N/ / p“ o N‘ : N N / \ _O F / w \ /'I‘ / (\N o N‘ < >~N / \ no / 2012/052672 F N o N N N /N / \ \ / / F N a N-oxide thereof, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or a solvate thereof.
In one embodiment, the present invention relates to any one of the following compounds 70 F x N / \:\ \ /’|“ Ne / (\N QNZg N / \ #0 N \/ 7 \ /“|‘ l ”\N /o N IN\ N\ / F N/ a N—oxide thereof, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or a solvate thereof.
In one ment, the present invention relates to any one of the following compounds WO 61080 S / F N\ o N§ N N\ / \ / F N F R N\ o N§ N N\ / \ / F R N\ o N N N / \ \ / / H N/\o H N /\> s / F o F (KN N I I N\N / i I \N o N N / N /N N\ / / N\ O I l \ / \ / N a N—oxide thereof, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or a solvate thereof.
For the avoidance of doubt, it is to be understood that each general and specific preference, embodiment and example for one substituent may be combined, whenever le, with. each general and specific preference, embodiment and example for one or more, preferably, all other substituents as d herein and that all such ments are embraced by this application.
Methods for the Preparation of Compounds of Formula (I) In this section, as in all other sections of this application unless the context tes otherwise, references to formula (I) also e all other sub-groups and examples thereof as defined herein. in general, compounds of formula (l-A) wherein Y is D (E is a bond), said compounds being represented by formula (l-Aa), can be prepared ing to the following reaction Scheme 1.
W2 N\ N\ D I?“ UI/ / N Q// (R2)n (XXIII) (“0/ \ NH2 (XXIH') / // (R2)n/(V RystK1‘ /C a1k1W 16 Y 3 R2 W R)n U::”———,», 4/ U:j\ N $2 wfi—RR..)”(R Ry—Zi—Rx 0"" C(vlzifikyl—W3 (VI) 0 ) R. R.
I (XXH)R"—C—OH (limalkyl CH2 O/NUN\ / \ N (R )n / (R2): U“I (VIII) CI .ealkyl UUI W6-C1_6alkyl-NR1°P (I-Aa-c-l) l tetrabutylammoniumfluoride ac'dI II‘IRIOP I|\II~IR10 1 6 alkyl C alk 1 1-6 y OH l l \ N N N D N C1_6a1ky1 \ \ \ l I ———--> \ N N\ N\ D / / / N (/R2// (IAab1) // U 3/ (XXX) (R2)n / N/ Q (I—Aa-a) 150' , Cl l1_6alkyl / \ N N N D O \ \ 2// I (R )n / I Cl _6a1ky1 NRIORII GNU j/D é,6a1kyi NHRiORll (R2)n //\ N (IX) : R" is ~O-S(=O)2-CH3 \m 022),? U:I (IX'):R”1's-C1 (I-Aa-b) In scheme 1, an intermediate of formula (IV) is d with an intermediate of formula (V) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example palladium (ll) acetate, a le base, such as sodium tert-butoxide or 032003, a suitable ligand, such as for example 1,1'-[1,1'-binaphthalene]—2,2'-diylbis[1,1-diphenylphosphine], and a suitable solvent or solvent mixture, such as for example dioxane or ethylene glycol dimethylether and water or N-methyl—pyrrolidone or e and N-methyl-pyrrolidone, resulting in an intermediate of formula (VI). Or alternatively an intermediate of formula (IV) is reacted with an intermediate of formula (V) in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. n-propanol, and optionally in the ce of a suitable acid, such as for example hydrochloric acid. Or alternatively, an intermediate of formula (IV) is reacted with an intermediate of formula (V) in the presence of potassium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide in the presence of a le solvent such as for example tetrahydrofuran or methylformamide. Said intermediate of formula (VI) can then be reacted with an intermediate of formula (Vll) wherein W3 represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo and wherein RX and Ry ent C1_4alkyl, and R2 represent C1.4alkyl or phenyl, for instance RX and Ry represent CH3 and RZ represents C(CH3)3 or phenyl, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N- dimethylformamide or N,N-dimethylacetamide, resulting in an intermediate of formula (Vlll). This type of on can also be performed to introduce a -C1-6alkyl-O- Si(Rx)(Ry)(RZ) group on an appropriate R9 ring within the R3 definition or on an appropriate D moiety. The resulting intermediate can then react with tetrabutylammonium de in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran, to result in a compound of a (I) wherein the appropriate R9 ring is substituted with hydroxyCLealkyl or the appropriate D moiety is substituted with hydroxyC1-6alkyl. Intermediates of formula (Vlll) or intermediates of formula (Vlll) wherein the R1 tuent carries a suitable tive group can also be prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (IV) or an intermediate of formula (IV) wherein the R1 substituent s a suitable tive group with an intermediate of formula (XXIII’) wherein R3“, represent -C1.6alkyl-O-Si(RX)(Ry)(RZ) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example palladium (ll) acetate, a le ligand, such as for example racemic -2,2’-bis(diphenylphosphino)—1,1’—binaphtyl or 2-dicyclohexylphosphino-Z’,4’,6’- propyl-1,1’-biphenyl, a le base, such as for example 052003, and a suitable solvent, such as for example 1,2-dimethoxyethane or dioxane. Intermediates of formula (Vlll) can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 represents —C1_6alkyl- OH, said compounds being represented by a (l-Aa-a) or compounds of formula (I- Aa) n the R1 substituent carries a suitable protective group, by reaction with tetrabutylammonium fluoride in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example 2012/052672 tetrahydrofuran. This type of reaction can also be performed in the presence of a le acid, such as for example acetic acid or HCI, and a le solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofurane or dioxane. Alternatively, an intermediate of formula (VI) can react with an intermediate of formula (VII’) wherein W3 represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo and the like, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N—dimethylformamide or N,N-dimethylacetamide, resulting in an intermediate of formula (XXV) which can then be ected in the presence of a suitable acid, such as for example HCI, and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol or panol, to give a compound of formula (I-Aa-a).The compounds of formula (I-Aa— a) or compounds of formula (I-Aa—a) wherein the R1 substituent s a suitable protective group can be reacted with methanesulfonyl chloride in the presence of a suitable base, such as for e ylamine, diisopropylethanamine or N,N- dimethyI—4-aminopyridine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane or tetrahydrofuran, to result in an intermediate of formula (IX) (mesylate derivative) or an intermediate of formula (IX’) (chloride derivative) or intermediates of formula (IX) or (IX’) n the R1 substituent carries a suitable protective group. In particular, this type of reaction is used to prepare ediates of formula (IX) or (IX’) wherein C1_6alkyl represents C3-ea|kyl. For some variants of ediates of formula (IX) or (IX’), e.g. wherein C1_6alkyl represents kyl it might be preferred to perform the reaction in non basic conditions. Intermediates of formula (IX) or (IX’) can then be d with an intermediate of formula (X) to obtain a compound of formula (la) wherein R3 represents C1_6alkyl substituted with NRmR“, said compounds being represented by formula (l-Aab ) or nds of formula (I-Aa-b) wherein the R1 substituent carries a suitable protective group. This reaction may optionally be performed in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, K2003, Na2003 or sodium hydride and optionally a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, dioxane, N,N-dimethylformamide, 1-methyI-pyrrolidinone, a suitable alcohol, e.g. 1—butanol and the like. This type of reaction can also be performed with a suitable salt of the ediate of formula (X), e.g. HCI salt of intermediate of formula (X), or may be performed in the presence of potassium iodide. In this way compounds wherein R3 ents iodoC1_6alkyI can be obtained. Compounds of formula (Ia-b) wherein the R1 substituent carries a suitable protective group can be ted in a compound of 2012/052672 formula (l-Aa-b) by reaction with a suitable acid, such as for example trifluoroacetic acid, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example romethane.
Intermediates of formula (IX) can also react with a suitable nitrogen containing ring within the definition of R9, said ring being represented by formula (XXI) or a suitable salt of an intermediate of formula (XXI), in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile, 1-methyIpyrrolidinone, or an l, e.g. 1-butanol, optionally in the presence of potassium iodide or a suitable base, such as for example N82003, K2C03 or triethylamine, resulting in a compound of formula (l-Aa-d). ediates of formula (IX) can also react with an intermediate of formula (X-a) wherein P represents a suitable protective group, such as for example —C(=O)-O-C(CH3)3, in the ce of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dimethylacetamide, resulting in an intermediate of a (XXX) which can be deprotected to a compound of formula (l-Aa-b-1) in the presence of a suitable acid, such as for example HCI or trifluoroacetic acid, and a suitable t, such as for e dichloromethane or an alcohol, e.g. methanol. Intermediates of formula (XXX) can also be prepared by reacting an ediate of formula (VI) with an intermediate of formula We-C1_6alkyl-NR1°P wherein we represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo and the like, or O)2-CH3, and P is as defined above, in the suitable presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, and a solvent, e.g. methylformamide or methylacetamide. Alternatively compounds of formula (l—Aa-d) or (l-Aa-b-l) can also be prepared by ng tively an intermediate of formula (VI) with an intermediate of formula W6-C1_5alkyl- Ncycle or Wg-C1_6alkyl-NHR10 wherein we is as defined above.
Intermediates of formula (VI) can react with We-R3d wherein W5 represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo, chloro, and the like, or -O-S(=O)2- CH3 or p-toluenesulfonate, and Rad represents optionally tuted C1.6alkyl, such as for example —CH2-C3H5, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, 082003, potassium utoxyde or potassium hydroxide, optionally a suitable phase transfer agent, such as for example tetrabutylammonium bromide, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide, N,N-dimethylacetamide, 2- methyltetrahydrofuran, tetrahydrofuran, water or acetonitrile, resulting in a compound of formula (l-Aa-c). In this way, nds of formula (l-Aa-c) wherein R3 represents — S(=O)2—N(CH3)2 can also be prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (VI) with dimethylsulfamoyl chloride, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example WO 61080 NaH, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide. This type of reaction can also be used to prepare an intermediate wherein the R3d moiety is protected by an appropriate protective group, such as for example triphenylmethyl or — CH2'O'CH2'CH2‘Si(CH3)3 , which can then be deprotected to a compound of formul (l- Aa-c) in the presence of a suitable acid, such as for example HCI or trifluoroacetic acid, in a suitable solvent, such as for e dichloromethane or acetonitrile, or by reaction with a suitable phase er agent, such as for example tetrabutylammonium fluoride in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran. This type of reaction can also be used to prepare a compound of formula (l—Ba) (see hereinafter).
Compounds of formula (l-Aa-c) n R“ represents —CH2—C(OH)(R’)(R”) wherein R’ represents optionally substituted kyl and R” represents hydrogen or optionally substituted C1_4alky|, said compounds being represented by formula (l—Aa-c-1 ), can be prepared by reacting the intermediate of formula (VI) with an intermediate of formula (XXII) in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, Cs2C03, or potassium hydroxide, and a le solvent, such as for e N,N- dimethylformamide, N,N-dimethylacetamide, acetonitrile or water. This type of reaction can also be used to prepare a compound of formula (l—Bb). 1{'\/1{Il EXOH) / \ N\ N N\ D // UK I (R \ n N (I'Bb) This type of on can also be used to introduce a —CH2- C(OH)(R’)(R”) group on a D .
Compounds of formula (l-Aa-b) wherein R11 is C1_6alkyl substituted with amino, said compounds being represented by formula b-2), can also be prepared according to the following reaction Scheme 1A.
Scheme 1A o NH N 3 C1'5a|kyl C1 ealkyl NHR10 NR“) NRIO c alkl 01'63IKY' C1-ealkyl 16 y ,NQiU”j\ N QUM: ”QUIR, (I‘Aa'b‘z) (I—Aa-b-l) (XXXVI) In Scheme 1A, a compound of formula (l-Aa-b-f) is reacted with N-(haloC1_ 6alkyl)phtalimide in the presence of a le base, such as for example potassium carbonate, and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile, resulting in an ediate of formula ) which can be converted into a compound of a (I— Aa—b—2) by reaction with ine in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol.
Compounds of formula (l-Aa) wherein R3 represents optionally substituted C2_6alkynyl, said compounds being represented by formula (l-Aa-k), can be prepared according to reaction Scheme 18.
Scheme1B Wll'R3e Q“U: R3e ——» / \ ~ x w (R // | (R / / n N (VI) ln Scheme 18, an intermediate of formula (VI) is reacted with an intermediate of formula W11-R3e wherein R39 ents optionally substituted 02-5alkynyl and W11 represents a suitable leaving group such as for example halo, e.g. chloro, or —O-S(=O)2-CH3, in the and a suitable solvent, such as presence of a suitable base, such as for e NaH, for example N,N-dimethylformamide. The intermediate WH-R3e wherein W11 represents —O-S(=O)2-CH3, can be prepared by reacting the corresponding alcohol derivative with methanesulfonyl chloride in the ce of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine or 4-dimethylaminopyridine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane.
Compounds of formula (l-Aa-k), wherein R363 represents C2.6alkynyl substituted with hydroxyl, said compounds being represented by a (l-Aa-k-1 ), can be prepared according to the following reaction Scheme 10.
Scheme 1C IIR/RXY RZ—Sli H RV\ RX 0 / \ N N N D ‘— Z /Sl 0—C2 6alkynleSOZ CH3- - - - 1k \ j R ynyl // | C2-6a (R / \ N n N/ (XXXVHI) (R/ n/ UNNjD (V1) QUEC2—6alkynyl (I-Aa-k-l) In Scheme 1C, an intermediate of formula (VI) is reacted with an intermediate of formula (XXXVlII) in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example NaH, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N—dimethylformamide, resulting in an intermediate of to formula (Vlll’), which is ted into a compound of formula (I—Aa-k-1) by reaction with a suitable acid, such as for example trifluoroacetic acid, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for e tetrahydrofuran. This reaction can also be performed with tetrabutyl ammonium fluoride in the presence of a suitable t such as for e tetrqahydrofuran.
Alternatively, instead of an intermediate of formula (XXXVIII), halo-szaalkynyl-O- Si(RX)(Ry)(RZ) can also be used.
Compounds of formula (l-Aa-k), wherein R3e represents Cg.6alkynyl, said compounds being ented by formula (l-Aa-k-2), can be prepared according to the following reaction Scheme 1D.
Scheme 1D H3C\ [CH3 1 / \ N\ N\j H3C/Si—C2—6alkynyl-Wl3 C2-6alkyny1 (V1) (XXXXH) kynyl / \ IL N\ N\ D (I-Aa-k-Z) In Scheme 1D, a compound of formula (l-Aa—k-2) is prepared by deprotecting an intermediate of formula (XXXXll) in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example K2003, and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol and the like. Said ediate of formula l) can be prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (VI) with W13-C2_6alkynyl-Si(CH3) 3 wherein W13 is a suitable leaving group, such as for example halogen, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example NaH, and a le solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide.
Compounds of formula (l-Aa), wherein R3 represents ethyl substituted with —P(=O)(OC1- 6alkyl)2, said compounds being represented by formula (l-Aa-l), can be prepared according to the following reaction Scheme 1E.
Scheme 1E C1'6alkylx (H) 1kyl o\P/o H . .
\ N D d1(C1_6a1ky1)V1nylphosphonate (CH2)2 / N\ NT | I \ D (R// N / / N\ N\ n N / / I (R / / n N (I-Aa—l) In scheme 1E, an intermediate of formula (VI) is reacted with di(C1- )vinylphosphonate in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example tri-N- butylphosphine, and a suitable solvent, such as for e acetonitrile resulting in a compound of formula (la—l).
Intermediates of formula (N) can be ed according to the following reaction Scheme 2.
N Br Vko/ 0 t lN\ 1 ___, t I / / N 2 C1 NH2 N NH2 i /“IV0— Cl C1 N NH2 0\ /D \ 3 W1 N\ N\ D HO N\ N\ D :Krd UI N\ \ <— l +____ /j / / / / / N N i lA/L Br N N OH (IV) In Scheme 2, the following reaction conditions apply: 1 : in the presence of a suitable leaving group introducing agent, such as for example N- bromosuccinimide, and a le solvent, such as for example chloroform (We represents a suitable leaving group, such as for e a halo, e.g. chloro. 2 : in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example bis(tri-tert—butyl- phosphine)palladium(0),a le base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N—dimethylformamide. 3 : in the presence of a suitable acid, such as for example HBr/acetic acid. 4 : in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium, a suitable base, such as for example N32C03, and a suitable t, such as for example 1,2-dimethoxyethane and water. : in the presence of a suitable leaving group introducing agent, such as for example POCI3.
Intermediates of formula (N) can also be prepared according to the following reaction Scheme 2A.
Scheme 2A O\/D (5 CIN\N\D CINNBH4 j/—-——> I —-——> Ur/N/ // N HN/’\O Cl N\ N\ Nd Cl UI ~N\ N\ Cl \J U 1/ / / / / In Scheme 2A, the following reaction conditions apply : 1: in the presence of POCl3 and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N- dimethylformamide or 1,2—dichloroethane. 2 : in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium, a suitable base, such as for example Na2003, and a suitable solvent, such as for example methoxyethane and water, ylether. Or 3 : in the presence of a le base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example romethane.
In general, compounds of formula (l-B) wherein Y is D (E is a bond), said compounds being represented by formula (l-Ba), can be prepared according to the following reactions in Scheme 3.
Scheme 3 (RZ/)n/ (VDU j/W6-R3d(R/// UNNjD $2 (I—Ba) Ry... -_SI Rx OH tetrabutylammonium O fluoride C1-6a1ky1 C1—6a1ky1 GNU}: j/D mg)“ (R)nGNU}: j/D 2) (I-Aa-a) (VIII) RY—Si—R" 9H (5 tetrabutylammonium C 1 —6alky1 I fluoride fil-éakyl / \ N N GNU j/D (R2)n / \IN (R2)n ]/D (I-Ba-a) (VIII') in Scheme 3, an intermediate of formula (VI) can react with We-R3 wherein W6 represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo and the like, or —O-S(=O)2—CH3 or p-toluenesulfonate, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example potassium hydroxide or sodium hydride, and optionally a suitable phase transfer agent, such as for e tetrabutylammonium bromide and, and a suitable solvent, such as for example 2-methyltetrahydrofuran and water or N,N- dimethylformamide, resulting in a nd of a (l-Ba). intermediates of formula (Vlll) can react with tetrabutylammonium fluoride, in the ce of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran, ing in a compound of formula (l—Aa—a). This type of on can also be used to prepare a compound of formula a).
Intermediates of formula (Vlll’) wherein D is a ring moiety containing a nitrogen atom, can be further reacted according to the following reaction Scheme 4.
Scheme 4 $2 Ry—— 1—1C" Rx I RY—. '_31 R" I 1|1alo Ry—Si—R" R6 C1 6a1kyl l C1 éalkyl C a1 1 lill'éNky 16_ aIkyI \ y1 F://\ N QUND1N \ N (R /// ( n (R n (v111'-b) (VHF-a) (VHH) Z RZ OH I. P 1" Ry—Si—R" y 1 R6 R —Sl—‘R 1&6 136 l OH O 1 C — alky1 Ci‘éalky—>1 C at 1 16 ‘6 L’ 01 1a1ky1 016a1ky1 $1-6a1ky1 mlu U:1N\ :rDN 112/QNlU:1:rDN )Q/N N\ Nj (VHP‘C'I) -c--2) (XXXIX) R6 C NR10R11 1'36 :6 C16alkyl (I216aIkYI 10 11 R“ NR R C1 salkyl C1 6alky1 \ N C 1-621“(1y n(R)2 UT?)NQ/NlCl -6alky1 n(R2)/ my 76011]U:jjDN (I-Ab-4) (XXXX) (xxxx1) in Scheme 4, the D’N moiety represents a —D moiety wherein the D ring moiety contains a nitrogen atom. Intermediates of a (Vlll’) wherein D represents D’NH, said intermediates being ented by formula (Vlll’—a), can be converted into an intermediate of formula (Vlll’-b) by reaction with W12-C1_6alkyl—halo wherein W12 represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. chloro, in the suitable solvent, such as presence of a suitable base, such as for example NaH, and a for example methylformamide. Said intermediates of formula (Vlll’-b) can be ted into an intermediate of formula (Vlll’~c) by reaction with R6 in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example K2003, and a suitable t, such as for example acetonitrile. When in an intermediate of formula (Vll|’-c) the R6 carries a hydroxyl group as in an intermediate of formula (Vlll’-c—1), then said hydroxyl group can be protected by a suitable protective group P, such as for example —O-C(=O)—C1_6alkyl, by on with C1_6a|kyl—C(=O)-W12, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, 4-dimethylaminopyridine, and a suitable t, such as for example dichloromethane, ing in an intermediate of formula (Vlll’—c-2) which can be converted into an intermediate of formula (XXXIX) by reaction with tetrabutylammonium fluoride in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran. Said intermediate of formula ) can be converted into an intermediate of formula (XXXX) wherein Ru represents —SOZCH3,by reaction with methane sulfonyl chloride in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane. in ular, this type of reaction is used to prepare ediates of formula (XXXX) wherein C1-6alkyl represents 03-6alkyl. For some variants of intermediates of formula (XXXX), e.g. wherein C1_6alkyl represents C1- Zalkyl, it might be preferred to m the reaction in non basic conditions.
Intermediates of formula (XXXX) can be converted into an intermediate of formula (XXXXl) by reaction with an intermediate of a (X) in a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile. Said intermediate of formula (XXXXI) can then be deprotected into a compound of formula (l-Aa-b-4) in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example K2C03, and a le solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol and the like. It is considered to be within the knowledge of the person skilled in the art to recognize for which other D ring moieties the described reactions also apply.
Intermediates of formula (Vlll’) can also be reacted to prepare compounds of the t invention according to the reaction schemes as presented in Scheme 1. It is considered to be within the knowledge of the skilled person to recognize in which condition and for which definitions of R1 on the D ring moiety a protective group may be riate for the reactions to be carried out. For instance, a hydroxyl group within the definition of R1 may be protected with a tert. butyldimethylsilyl moiety; a NH group within the definition of R1 may be protected with a —C(=O)—O-C(CH3)3 group.
It is also considered to be within the knowledge of the skilled person to recognize appropriate deprotection reactions. nds of a c) can alternatively also be prepared according to the below reaction Scheme 5.
Scheme 5 R3dNH2 om W2 N\ N\ D (Ron U j ——-> HNUNNjD (XIV) / N/ ——-——-————-—-> (XX) (I-Aa—c) In Scheme 5, an intermediate of formula (W) is reacted with R3d-NH2 in the ce of a suitable catalyst, such as for example palladium (ll) acetate, a le base, such as for example sodium tert—butoxide, and a suitable ligand, such as for example 1,1'-[1,1'— binaphthalene]-2,2'—diylbis[1,1-diphenylphosphine], resulting in an intermediate of formula (XX) which is reacted in a next step with an intermediate of a (XlV) in the presence of a suitable st, such as for example palladium (ll) acetate or Pd2(dba)3 (tris(dibenzylidene acetone) dipalladium (0)), a suitable ligand such as for example 2- dicyclohexylphosphino-tris-isopropyl-biphenyl or 1,1'-[1,1'—binaphthalene]—2,2'— diylbis[1,1-diphenylphosphine], a suitable base, such as for example sodium tert- butoxide, and a suitable solvent, such as for e ne glycol dimethylether.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 is C1_6alkyl substituted with 5-amino-1,3,4— oxadiazolyl or with 1,3,4-oxadiazolyl or with 2(3H)~1,3,4-oxadiazolonyl can be prepared according to the below reaction Scheme 6.
Scheme 6 C(=O)oC1-4alkyl HzN C1-6alkyl NHZ-NHZ C(=O)NHNH2 >‘N RQU 8- / \ N 1;“|N\ N\:(Y—-—> C1-6alkyl (I--Ac 1) (Rzln/ <thGNU: (XXXI) (1 Ac 2) I IN‘ HNf0 HN-<O 3 N, N90 \ 0 C1 ea'ky' my. \ N c1 ealkyl / \ N IN\ NjY (R)nQU: (RQU:In (R23: (1N: In Scheme 6, a nd of formula 1) is reacted with NHg-NHZ in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol resulting in an intermediate of a (XXXI) which is then reacted in a next step with Ws-CN, wherein W8 represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example NaHCog, and a suitable solvent, such as for example water or e. ediates of formula (XXXI) can further be reacted as described in step 1 in the above scheme in the presence of 1,1’—carbonyldiimidazole and a suitable solvent, such as for example e. Or intermediates of formula (XXXI) can be reacted as descrinbed in step 2 in the above scheme in the presence of trimethylorthoformate. The resulting intermediate can further be reacted as described in step 3 in the above scheme in the presence of xylene.
Reaction Schemes 6 A describes the ation of compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 is C1_6alkyl substituted with 5-methyl-1,2,4-oxadiazolyl.
Scheme 6A (131-6alkyl HzNfl—OH O/N N\ N\ Y C1—6alkyl NO‘( // l j _-1—:©/NU\ (R)n2) UN/ LID/U2)(R) \ C1-6alkNylN In Scheme 6A, the ing on conditions apply: 1: in the ce of hydroxylamine HCI, a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol. 2 ; in the presence of sodium ethoxide and a suitable t, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol.
Compounds of formula (l) wherein R3 is C1_6alkyl substituted with 3,3-dimethyl- morpholine can be prepared according to the below reaction Scheme 7.
Scheme 7 NH/P 0 km: HOV 0 HO 0 C1—ealkyl P (SQ/U\ N C16alkyl UUj\N C16alkyl (R2) (th13’” (xxxm) (xxxu) (I-Ac-3) NH/P \ ” o o ,,S\ o O// 0% gg—OV 0% \ :1Galkyl C1"631;“ (R2)QUZ: N/ “(Q/NU_—>\\(NHN(R)2) (XXXIV) (XXXV) (l-Ac4) ln Scheme 7, a compound of formula (l-Ac-3) is reacted with 2-amino-2—methyI propanol in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example NaH and in the 2012/052672 presence of a suitable solvent, such as for e N,N—dimethylformamide ing in an intermediate of formula (XXXll) of which the NH2 moiety is protected by a suitable protecting group P, such as for example —O-C(CH3)3, by reaction with for instance t—butyl dicarbonate in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane, and a suitable base, such as for example NaHCOg, resulting in an intermediate of formula (XXXlll). in a next step, said intermediate is reacted with methanesulfonyl chloride in the presence of a le solvent, such as for example dichloromethane, and a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine resulting in an intermediate of formula (XXXIV). In particular, this type of reaction is used to prepare intermediates of formula (XXXIV) wherein C1‘6alkyl represents Cg_6alkyl. For some variants of intermediates of formula (XXXIV), e.g. wherein C1-5alkyl represents Cmalkyl it might be preferred to perform the on in non basic conditions. Intermediates of formula (XXXIV) are converted into an intermediate of formula (XXXV) by reaction with a suitable acid, such as for example trifluoroacetic acid, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for e dichloromethane. The intermediate of formula (XXXV) is converted into a compound of formula (l-Ac—4) by reaction with a suitable base, such as for example N, N-diisopropylethylamine and triethylamine in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for e an alcohol, e.g. methanol.
As already shown above, compounds of formula (I) or some of the above-described intermediates can be prepared by deprotecting the corresponding protected compounds.
Other protection-deprotection ons are shown in the following reaction Scheme 8. swim o-1> P’—O- C1-6alkyl—W9 N\(|:|1-63IkyI (R2),,QNfi j“GNU j” (th “ (XXVI) a01d or base- C1-4a1ky1—O— C_C1-6a1ky1—W9 (XXVH) (PH f1 - a6 IkyI 3 O-C1-4alky1 (l:(=0) C1—6alkyl (RI)GNU jYN :rl 2) (R2): (X VIII) 4 9H <9 C1—6alkyl (l:(=0) \ NU :(YN H/IO C1—6alkyl (XXI) 1,1 I (R237 / \ N W N\ N\ (XXIX) (RN/)n/ UNI (13(4)) C1 —ealkyl ln S)cheme 8, the Y’N moiety represents an —E-D moiety wherein the D ring moiety contains a nitrogen atom. Compounds of formula (I) wherein R1 ents hydroxyC1_ Balkyl can be prepared by deprotecting an intermediate of formula (XXVI) in the presence of a suitable acid, such as for example HCI or oroacetic acid, or a suitable de-silylating agent, such as for example utyl ammonium fluoride, and a suitable solvent, such as an alcohol, e.g. methanol, or tetrahydrofuran (step 2). ediates of formula (XXVI) can be ed by reacting a compound of formula (I) wherein R1 is WO 61080 hydrogen with an intermediate of a (XXIV) wherein W9 represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo and the like, and P represents a suitable protective group, such as for example —Si(CH3)2(C(CH3)3) or in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride or K2CO3, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide or acetonitrile (step 1).
Compounds of formula (l) wherein R1 ents C1_6a|kyl substituted with —C(=O)—R6 wherein R6 is an appropriate nitrogen containing ring linked to the C(=O) moiety via the nitrogen atom can be prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (XXIX) with an intermediate of formula (XXI) in the presence of suitable e coupling reagents such as, oxy-benzotriazole and 1~(3-dimethylaminopropyl)—3-ethy| carbodiimide HCI (step 5). Intermediates of formula (XXIX) can be prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (XXVIII) with LiOH in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran or water (step 4). Intermediates of formula (XXVIII) can be prepared by as depicted in step 3 with an intermediate of formula (XXVII) wherein W9 is as defined above, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, and a suitable t, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide.
Step 6 depicts the preparation of compounds of formula (I) starting from an intermediate of formula (XXIX) by reaction with NHR4R5 in the ce of le peptide coupling ts such as 1-hydroxy—benzotriazole and 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)—3-ethyl carbodiimide HCI and a suitable base, such as triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane.
Further tion-deprotection reactions can also be used as outlined in the following reaction Scheme 9.
Scheme 9 (3—1) YNH P—O—Cmalkyl—Wg w2 N N \ \ '01-salkyi @NH2 (XXIV) 2’/ l w2 N YN (R )n ()V —, N / / 1 N (IV-a) 2 (IV-P) C1-6alkyl ‘3 ml R24, (R2)n/ / N/ [DA/V5l (VI-P1) (R2)n-1 <V-P) Y , H2N N\ Nj P_RZ\ III l \ N N N\ Y / N/ 3 4/ U 1 (R )“'1 / (X111) N R8R7N-R2\ If (R2)n.1@ij// / N/ 7 8 NHR R Ho—R2‘\ 1'13 I 7 [E/N N\ NjY 4 1'13 (R23/ 1 H3C-(O=)2S-O-R2\ N Y / / N\ N\ "‘1 N [ \ C1-S(=O)2-CH3 2/ / I (R )n—1 / N/ 1 NH 0 o HzN—RZ' R3 \\ I 6 [JR] Y N—RZ' R3 N\ N\ 4—— \ i [ \ N N\ N\ Y 2// U / (R )n-1 / N/ In Scheme 9, the ing reaction conditions apply: 1 ; in the presence of a suitable base, such as for e sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide. 2 : in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example palladium (ll)acetate, a suitable base, such as for example sodium tert-butoxide, a suitable ligand, such as for 2012/052672 example l,1'-[1,1'-binaphthalene]-2,2'-diylbis[1,1-diphenylphosphine], and a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane or ethylene glycol ylether. 3 : in the presence of a le catalyst, such as for example palladium (ll)acetate, a suitable base, such as for example sodium tert—butoxide, a suitable ligand, such as for example 1,1'-binaphtha|ene]—2,2'-diylbis[1,1—diphenylphosphine], and a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane or ethylene glycol dimethylether. 4 : in the presence of a suitable base, such as for e triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane. : in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example K2003, and a suitable solvent, such as for example 1~methylpyrrolidinone. 6 : in the presence of hydrazine monohydrate, and a suitable t, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol. 7 : in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example K2C03, and a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran.
Compounds of formula (l-A) can also be prepared as outlined in the following reaction Scheme 10.
POCI3 HOUNI ——* HOUNI ”—’ UION ( )n N W ~R3d6 \ N\ N\ CN __» l | 3 2/)/ / N/ / sodium azide (R n lhydroolysw—w—>‘ hydrolys1s' 6 HN/NN UUZJU UUZECOOHRN (Ran (Mn2) 111 HNMeOMe NRZZR" ’ | 7 I[{3d \N/o UziU3*? ~ (R2)n RNMNNl12 W6_R3d (R2): 0UfioN\ N\ N\ (R2)n N HZNORIQ J ($22)” In Scheme 10, the following reaction conditions apply: 1 : in the presence of zinc cyanide, a le catalyst such as for example tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium, a suitable ligand, such as for example triphenylphosphine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile 2 : in the presence of a chlorinating agent such as for example POCI3 3: in the presence of a le solvent, such as for e an alcohol, e.g. n-propanol 4 : in the presence of a suitable base, such as for e sodium hydride, 032003, or potassium hydroxide and a suitable phase transfer agent, such as for example utylammonium bromide, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N- dimethylformamide, N,N-dimethylacetamide, 2-methyltetrahydrofuran, water or acetonitrile : in the presence of ammonium de and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide 6-7 : first hydrolysis of the CN to the acid according to art-known methods, followed by reacting the resulting acid with NH(CH3)(OCH3) in the presence of a suitable coupling agent, such as for example N-3—(ethylcarbonimidoy|)—N1,N1-dimethyl-1,3- ropanediamine, hydrochloride (1:1), a le peptide coupling agent such as for example hydroxybenzotriazole, and a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran or dichloromethane 8: reaction with a suitable Grignard reagent in the presence of a suitable t, such as for example tetrahydrofuran 9 : in the presence of pyridine and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol 10 : hydrolysis of the CN to the acid according to own methods 11 : in the ce of a suitable coupling agent, such as for example N (ethylcarbonimidoyl)—N1,N1-dimethyl-1,3-propanediamine, hydrochloride (1:1), a suitable peptide coupling agent such as for e hydroxybenzotriazole, and a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran or dichloromethane. RX represents -(CR22R23)s-D. 12 : in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, ngCOg, or potassium ide and a suitable phase transfer agent, such as for example tetrabutylammonium bromide, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N— dimethylformamide, N,N-dimethylacetamide, 2—methyltetrahydrofuran, water or acetonitrile Compounds of formula (l-A) can also be prepared as outlined in the ing reaction Scheme 1 1.
Scheme 1 1 Sli: HOUNNj/B P003 GUNj/Br-———>\/src=*CH UZD/ ll: (F8)n 4 l W6-R3d @Nu/ j/E formaldehyde R301 I / / \ N N\ N\ / (R2): sodium azide l (szn/ / / In Scheme 11, the following reaction conditions apply: 1 : in the presence of a chlorinating agent such as for example POCl3 2 : in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example dichIorobis(triphenylphosphine) ium (II) and copper iodide, optionally a suitable ligand, such as for example triphenylphosphine, a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide 3: in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. n-propanol 4 ; in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, 032003, or potassium hydroxide and a le phase er agent, such as for example tetrabutylammonium bromide, and a suitable solvent, such as for e N,N- dimethylformamide, N,N-dimethylacetamide, 2-methyltetrahydrofuran, water or acetonitrile 5 : in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydroxyde, and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ol. 6 : in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example copper sulfate and sodium L ascorbate, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane and acetic acid nds of formula (l-A) can also be prepared as outlined in the following reaction Scheme 12.
Scheme 12 NRX ©an (R),,2) UI —> U:IfR' ’ (R2)QNUleN/ N/ 3 l w6_R3d RX deprotection (R2)orNfi: N areN//(R In Scheme 12, the ing reaction conditions apply:. RX represents -(CR22R23)s-D, and R’ represents R22 or a suitable protecting group, such as for example benzyl 1 : in the presence of a le base, such as for example cesium carbonate,and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide 2 ; in the presence of a le solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. n- ol. atively such reaction could also be performed in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example palladium (ll) acetate, a suitable base, such as sodium tert—butoxide or Cs2C03, a suitable ligand, such as for example 1,1’-[1,1'- binaphthalene]-2,2'—diylbis[1,1-diphenylphosphine], and a suitable solvent or solvent mixture, such as for example dioxane or ethylene glycol dimethylether and water or N— methyl-pyrrolidone 3 : in the ce of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, ngcog, or potassium hydroxide and a le phase transfer agent, such as for example tetrabutylammonium bromide, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N- dimethylformamide, N,N-dimethylacetamide, 2-methyltetrahydrofuran, water or acetonitrile 4 : deprotection according to art-known methods in case R’ is a suitable protecting group.
It is to be considered to be within the knowledge of the person skilled in the art to ize which of the reactions described above for compounds of (l-A) are also applicable for compounds of formula (l-B).
It is considered to be within the knowledge of the person skilled in the art to recognize in which ion and on which part of the molecule a protective group may be appropriate. For instance, protective group on the R1 substituent or on the D moiety, or protective group on the R3 substituent or on the R2 substituent or combinations thereof.
The skilled person is also considered to be able to ize the most le protective group, such as for e —C(=O)—O-C1-4alkyl or or — Si(CH3)2(C(CH3)3) or -CH2-O-CH2CH2-O-CH3 or -CH2-O-CH2-CH2-Si(CH3) 3.The skilled person is also considered to be able to recognize the most feasible deprotection on conditions, such as for example suitable acids, e.g. trifluoroacetic acid, hydrochloric acid, or suitable salts, such as for example tetrabutylammonium fluoride.
Reference herefore is also made to the es described in the Experimental Part hereinafter.
The skilled person is also ered to be able to recognize that when R1 represents C(=O)—morpholinyl, said R1 can be prepared from —C(=O)—NH-CHZ'CHQ-O'CHz-CHQ-O' 802methylphenyl, in the presence of sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide. Or that when R1 represents —NH-C(=O)- morpholinyl, said R1 can be prepared from —NH-C(=O)—O-C(CH3)3 in the presence of morpholine, and a suitable solvent, such as for e 1-methyl-2—pyrrolidinone.Or that when R1 represents hydroxle1_6alkyl, e.g. —CH2—CH2-OH, said R1 can be prepared from the corresponding alkoxycarbonyl intermediate, e.g. —CH2-C(=O)-O-CH2-CH3, in the for example presence of Dibal-H 1M in hexane, and a suitable solvent, such as tetrahyd rofuran.
The present invention also ses deuterated compounds. These deuterated compounds may be prepared by using the appropriate deuterated intermediates during the synthesis process. For instance an intermediate of formula (IV-a) (OH)n can be converted into an intermediate of formula (IV-b) (OCD3)n by reaction with iodomethane-D3 in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example cesium carbonate, and a le t, such as for example acetonitrile.
The compounds of formula (I) may also be converted into each other via art—known reactions or functional group transformations.
For instance, compounds of formula (I) wherein R1 represents tetrahydropyranyl can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R1 represents hydrogen, by on IO with a suitable acid, such as for example HCI or trifluoroacetic acid, in the presence of a le solvent, such as for example dichloromethane, dioxane, or an l, e.g. methanol, isopropanol and the like.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R1 or R3 ent monohaloalkyl, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R1 or R3 represent C1_6alkyl substituted with a ring moiety as defined hereinabove by the intermediate of formula (XXI) and linked to the C1-5a|ky| moiety by the nitrogen atom, by reaction with an intermediate of formula (XXI) optionally in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine or K2003 or sodium hydride, and optionally in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile, N,N—dimethylformamide or 1-methyIpyrrolidinone. For the R3 moiety, this type of reaction is in particular used to prepare compounds wherein C1_6alkyl represents 03-6alkyl. For some variants of the compounds, e.g. wherein C1_6alkyl represents C1_2alkyl, it might be preferred to perform the reaction in non basic conditions.
Compounds of formula (I) n R1 or R3 represents C1.6alkyI-OH, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R1 or R3 represent C1-6alkyI-F by reaction with laminosulfur trifluoride in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane and in the ce of catalytic amounts of an alcohol, such as for example l. Likewise, a compound of formula (I) wherein R1 or R3 represent C1- Balkyl substituted with R6 or R9 n said R6 or R9 is substituted with CH, can be converted into a compound of a (I) wherein R1 or R3 represent C1_6alkyl substituted with R6 or R9 wherein said R6 or R9 is tuted with F, by reaction with laminosulfur oride in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R1 or R3 represent C1_6alkyl substituted with R6 or R9 wherein said R6 or R9 is substituted with —C(=O)—O-C1_6alkyl, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R1 or R3 represent kyl substituted with R6 or R9 wherein said R6 or R9 is substituted with —CH2-OH, by reaction with LiAIH4 in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1_5alkyl substituted with 1,3—dioxo-2H- isoindoI-Z-yl, can be converted into a nd of formula (I) n R3 represents C1- 6alkyl substituted with amino, by reaction with hydrazine monohydrate in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol.
Compounds of a (I) wherein R1 or R3 represent Ci-6alkyl substituted with amino, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R1 or R3 represents C1,6alkyl substituted with —NH-S(=O)2-C1_6alkyl, by reaction with Cl-S(=O)2-C1-5alkyl in the suitable solvent, presence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a such as for e dichloromethane.
Compounds of formula (I) n R1 or R3 represents kyl substituted with halo, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R1 or R3 represent C1_6alkyl substituted with NR4R5 or NR10R“, by reaction with NHR4R5 or NHR10R“, either using such amino in large excess or in the presence of a le base, such as for example K2C03, and a suitable t, such as for example itrile, N,N-dimethylacetamide or 1-methyI—pyrrolidinone. For the R3 moiety, this type of reaction is in particular used to prepare compounds wherein C1_6alkyl represents C3-6alkyl. For some variants of the compounds, e.g. wherein C1_6alkyl represents Cmalkyl, it might be preferred to perform the reaction in non basic conditions. nds of formula (I) wherein R1 represents hydrogen, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R1 represents polyhaloC1-6aIkyl or polyhydroxyC1_6alkyl or C1_6alkyl or —S(=0)2-NR‘4R15 or 2-C1_6alkyl, by reaction with polyhanC1_6alkyl- w or polyhydroxyC1.ealkyl-W or C1.6alkyI-W or W-S(=O)2-NR14R15 or W-S(=O)2—C1.6alkyl, wherein W represents a suitable g group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo and the like, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride or K2003 or triethylamine or 4-dimethylamino-pyridine or diisopropylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for e N,N-dimethylformamide or acetonitrile or dichloromethane.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R1 represents hydrogen can also be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R1 represents C1_5alkyI-OH, by reaction with W-C1_ 5alkyl-O-Si(CH3)2(C(CH3)3) in the presence of a suitable base, such as for e sodium hydride, and a le solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide.
Compounds of formula (l) n R1 represents hydrogen, can also be converted into compound of formula (I) wherein R1 represents ethyl substituted with 2-C1.6alkyl, by reaction with C1_6alkyI-vinylsulfone, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol or by reaction with C1-6alkyl—2-bromoethylsulfone in the presence of a suitable onating agent, such as for example NaH, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dimethyformamide.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R1 represents en can also be converted into a compound of a (I) wherein R1 represents HOH—CH2 Q, by reaction 0&9in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for e N,N-dimethylformamide, wherein YbO represents a suitable nitrogen containing ring within the definition of R6.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R1 represents C1_6alkyl tuted with R6 wherein said R6 is substituted with —C(=O)—O-C1_salkyl or —S(=0)2-NR14R15 or wherein R3 represents C1_6alkyl substituted with R9 wherein said R9 is substituted with —C(=O)—O-C1_ salkyl or —-S(=O)2-NR14R15, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein the R6 or R9 is unsubstituted, by reaction with a suitable acid, such as for example HCI and a suitable solvent, such as for e e, acetonitrile or an alcohol, e.g. isopropylalcohol. Compounds of formula (I) wherein R1 represents kyl substituted with R6 wherein said R6 is a ring moiety comprising a nitrogen atom which is substituted with -CH2-OH or wherein R3 represents C1_6alkyl substituted with R9 wherein said R9 is a ring moiety comprising a nitrogen atom which is substituted with H, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein the R6 or R9 is unsubstituted, by reaction with sodium hydroxide, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran. nds of formula (I) n R1 represents C1_5alkyl substituted with R6 or R3 represents C1_6alkyl substituted with R9, wherein said R6 or said R9 is unsubstituted, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein said R6 or said R9 is substituted with C1-6alkyl, by on with W-C1_6alkyl wherein W is as defined above, in the presence of a suitable base. Such as for example sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide.
Compounds of formula (l) wherein R1 or R3 represent hydroxyC1_6alkyl, can be converted into the corresponding carbonyl compound, by reaction with dess—Martin— inane, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R1 represents C1_6alkyl substituted with R6 or R3 represents kyl substituted with R9, wherein said R6 or said R9 is tuted with C1. salkyI—halo, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein said R6 or said R9 is substituted with C1.6alkyI-CN, by reaction with sodium cyanide, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example water or an alcohol, e.g. ethanol. nds of formula (I) wherein R1 represents C1-6alkyl substituted with R6 wherein said R6 is unsubstituted or wherein R3 represents C1-6alkyl substituted with R9 wherein said R9 is unsubstituted, can be converted into a nd of formula (I) wherein R6 or R9 is substituted with —CH3 or —-CH(CH3)2, by reaction with formaldehyde or e and N, in the presence of a le t, such as for example tetrahydrofuran or an alcohol, e.g. methanol.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R1 contains a R6 substituent substituted with OH or wherein R3 contains a R9 substituent substituted with OH, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein the R6 or R9 substituent is substituted with C1-6alkyloxy, by reaction with W-C1-6alkyl, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R1 contains a R6 tuent substituted with C1- 5alkyloxy or wherein R3 contains a R9 tuent substituted with kyloxy, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein the R6 or R9 substituent is substituted with —OH by reaction with a suitable acid, such as for example hydrochloric acid.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R1 contains a R6 substituent substituted with halo or wherein R3 ns a R9 substituent substituted with halo can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein the R6 or R9 substituent is substituted with —NR14R15 by reaction with NHRMR15 in a suitable sovent, such as for example 1-methyl—pyrrolidinone.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1_6alkyl substituted with —C(=O)—O-C1_ 6alkyl, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 represents kyl substituted with COOH, by reaction with LiOH in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran. Said compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 represents kyl substituted with COOH, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 represents kyl substituted with —C(=O)—NH2 or —C(=O)— NHCH3 or —C(=O)NR1°R“, by reaction with CH3)3)2 or MeNchr or NHR‘OR“ in the presence of suitable peptide coupling ts such as for example 1-(3— dimethylaminopropyl)—3-ethylcarbodiimide HCI and 1-hydroxybenzotriazole, a suitable base, such as for example ylamine and a suitable solvent such as for example dichloromethane or N,N-dimethylformamide. Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1-6alkyl substituted with —C(=O)—O—C1-5alkyl, can also be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1_6alkyl substituted with 4,5-dihydro- ol-Z—yl, by reaction under N2 with ethylenediamine and hylaluminium in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for e toluene and heptane. Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1-6alkyl substituted with COOH, can also be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 ents C1_6alkyl tuted with —C(=O)—N(CH3)(OCH3) by reaction with dimethylhydroxylamine, in the presence of carbonyldiimidazole and a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1_6alkyl tuted with can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 ents C1-6alkyl substituted with 2 OH’s, by on with a suitable acid, such as for example trifluoroacetic acid, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane or water. These compounds of formula D (I) wherein R3 represents kyl substituted with can also be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1_6alkyl substituted with OH and NR10R“, by reaction with NH2R1°R11 optionally in salt form, such as for example NHRmRWCI', optionally in the presence of a suitable base, such as for e sodium hydride or Na2C03 or triethylamine, a suitable additive such as for example KI, and in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide or an alcohol, e.g. 1-butanol or ethanol.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1_3alkyl substituted with —C(=O)—O-C1_ Galkyl, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1_3alkyl substituted with —C(CH3)2-OH, by reaction with iodomethane and Mg poWder, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example diethylether or tetrahydrofuran.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1_5alkyl substituted with —C(=O)—O-C1- Galkyl, can be ted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1_6alkyl tuted with —OH, by reaction with LiAIH4 in a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran. nds of formula (I) n R3 ents kyl substituted with —OH, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1_5alkyl substituted with -O-C(=O)-C1_6alkyl by reaction with Cl-C(=O)—Ct—6alkyl in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example NaH, and a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahyd rofu ran.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 ents —CH2-CH=CH2, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 represents —CH2-CHOH-CH2-OH, by reaction with potassium permanganate, and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetone or water.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1_6alkyl substituted with —C(=O)—C1_ , can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 represents kyl substituted with —C(C1.4alkyl)=N-OH, by reaction with hydroxylamine, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for e pyridine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1_6alkyl substituted with NH2, can be converted into a compound of a (I) wherein R3 represents C1-6alkyl substituted with -NH-C(=O)—R6 or with -NH-C(=O)—C1-6alkyl or with -NH-C(=O)—polyhydroxyC1-6alkyl or with -NH-C(=O)—polyhaloC1.5alkyl or with -NH-C(=O)-polyhydroxypolyhanC1-6aIkyl, by reaction with the corresponding COOH analogue, e.g. Rs-COOH or CH3)(OH)- COOH and the like, in the ce of suitable peptide coupling reagents such as 1- hydroxy-benzotriazole and 1-(3-dimethylamino)propyl)carbodiimide optionally in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine. Said compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1_6alkyl tuted with NH2, can also be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1.6alkyl substituted with NH- C(=O)-CF3, by reaction with oroacetic anhydride, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran. Said nds of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1_6alkyl substituted with NH2, can also be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1_6a|kyl substituted with ~NH-polyhanC1-6alkyl, e.g. —NH-CH2—CH2—F, by reaction with polyhaloC1_6alkyI-W, with W as defined above, e.g. iodoquoroethane, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example K2CO3, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide or dioxane. Said compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 represents Cmaikyl substituted with NH2 can also be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1-6alkyl substituted with —NH-R6 or — N(R6)2 wherein R6 represents for example oxetane, by reaction with the appropriate R6 in the presence of a suitable reducing agent, such as for e sodium triacetoxyborohydride, a suitable acid, such as for example acetic acid, and a suitable solvent, such as for example 1,2-dichloroethane.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1_6aIkyI substituted with cyano, can be converted into a compound of a (I) n R3 ents C1_6alkyI substituted with tetrazolyl by reaction with sodium azide, and NHICI' in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example methylformamide.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 represents 'CHZ-CECH, can be converted into a -CH2‘</\III/\H/OV compound of formula (I) wherein R3 represents N; reaction , by with ethyl cetate in the presence of GUI and a le base, such as for e diisopropylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example tetraydrofuran.
Compounds of formula (I) n R3 represents -CH2-CECH, can be converted into a —CH2 \ 15 ,OH compound of formula (I) n R3 represents N by reaction with sodium azide and formaldehyde, in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for e CuSO4 and sodium L ascorbate, a suitable acid, such as for e acetic acid, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 represent C2_6alkynyi, can be converted into a nd of formula (I) wherein R3 represents Cz-6alkynyl substituted with R9, by reaction with W-R9 wherein W is as defined above, in the presence of a suitable st, such as for example dichIorobis(triphenylphosphine)palladium, a suitable co- catalyst such as Cul, a suitable base, such as for example triethyIamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dimethylsulfoxide.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 comprises R9 substituted with halo, can be ted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 comprises R9 substituted with — NRMR15 by reaction with NHRMR15 in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example 1-methylpyrrolidinone.
Compounds of a (l) n R3 comprises C2-5alkynyl, can be hydrogenated into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 comprises C2_6alkyl in the presence of a le catalyst, such as for example palladium on charcoal, and a suitable solvent, such as for example ethylacetate. nds of formula (l) wherein R3 comprises C2_6alkynyl, can be hydrogenated into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 comprises C2_5alkenyl in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example Lindlar catalyst, and a suitable solvent, such as for example ethylacetate.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1_6alkyl substituted with -P(=O)(OC1_ 6alky|)2 can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1_6alkyl substituted with -P(=O)(OH)2 by reaction with bromotrimethylsilane in the ce of a suitable solvent, such as for example romethane.
Compounds of formula (l) wherein the R9 substituent is substituted with =0, can be converted into the corresponding reduced R9 substituent by on with a suitable reducing agent, such as for example LiAlH4 in a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1.5alkyl substituted with —C(=O)-R9 can be ted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 ents C1_5alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and R9 by reaction with a le reducing agent, such as for example sodium borohydride, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for e an alcohol, e.g. methanol.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 comprises -NHR10 can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 comprises —NR1°-(C=O)-optionally substituted C1- ealkyl, by reaction with the corresponding W-(C=O)-optionally substituted C1_6alkyl wherein W represents a le leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. chloro and the like, in the presence of a le base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile or dichloromethane.
Compounds of a (l) wherein R3 represents C1_5alkyl substituted with NR1°(benzyl) can be converted into a nd of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1_6alkyl substituted with NHR‘O, by reaction with roethylchloroformate in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane WO 61080 nds of formula (I) n R1 represents unsubstituted piperidine, can be converted into a compound of formula (l) wherein R1 represents 1—methyl-piperidine, by reaction with iodomethane in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example potassium carbonate, and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile.
Compounds of formula (l) wherein R1 represents hydrogen can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R1 represents optionally substituted C1.6alkyl, by on with optionally substituted C1_5alkyl-W wherein W represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo and the like, in the ce of a suitable base, such as for example potassium carbonate, and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R2 represents halo, e.g. bromo, can be converted into a compound of a (I) wherein R2 represents cyano, by reaction with zinc cyanide, in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example Pd2(dba)3 and a suitable , such as for example 1,1-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene, in the ce of a suitable t, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide.
Said R2 substituent being cyano can be converted into —CH2-NH2 by hydrogenation in the presence of NH3 and Nickel.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R2 represents —OCH3 can be converted into a compounds of formula (l) wherein R2 represents —OH by on with boron tribromide in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane.
Compounds of formula (I) n R2 represents —OH can be converted into a compounds of formula (I) wherein R2 represents —OCH3 by reaction with methyl iodine in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example potassium carbonate, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N—dimethylformamide.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R2 represents hydrogen, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R2 represents —CHOH-CF3 by reaction with oroacetaldehyde methyl hemiketal.
For the conversion reactions, nce is also made to the examples described in the Experimental Part hereinafter.
A r aspect of the invention is a process for the preparation of a nd of formula (I) as defined herein, which process comprises: (i) deprotecting a compound of formula (XXX) wherein P represents a suitable protective group, such as for example a butyloxycarbonyl-group ( —C02C(CH3)3) in the presence of a suitable acid, such as for example HCI or oroacetic acid; NR‘°P C1 -6a1kyl (R2>GNU (XXX) or (ii) the reaction of a compound of the formula (IX) or (lX’): C1-6a1k1:1 }: 2) ]/D (IX) : R“ is -O-(S=O)2-CH3 (IX’) : Ru is Cl or a protected form thereof, with an appropriately substituted amine or a reactive derivative thereof, such as for example NHRWR11 (X), NHR1°P (X-a) or H’I‘Q (XXI), for example in a sealed vessel, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium e and/or in the presence or absence of a solvent such as acetonitrile, N,N- dimethylformamide or N,N-dimethylacetamide; or (iii) the reaction of a compound of the formula (Vl): G/N N\ N\ D 2/ / l (R )n / I N (VI) or a protected form thereof, with a compound of formula 5alkyl-NR1°P wherein P represents a suitable protective group and We represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo and the like, or —O-S(=O)2-CH3, in the ce of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, and a suitable t, e.g. N,N- dimethylformamide or N,N-dimethylacetamide, followed by removing P and optionally removing any further protecting group present; or (iv) the reaction of a compound of the formula (VI): Q/N N\ N\ D (RZ/ / )n / I N (VI) or a protected thereof, with a compound of formula W‘s-Cmalkyl-NHR10 wherein we represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo and the like, or ——O-S(=O)2-CH3, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for e sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, e.g. N,N—dimethylformamide or N,N-dimethylacetamide; (v) the reaction of a nd of formula (XXXVI) 0 N Crealkyl I{IRlo ('31—5alkyl QN N N D (R n U7 / N/ with ine in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol; (vi) the reaction of a compound of formula (IX-1) wherein R” represents —O-S(=O)2- CH3, C1 l (R / n N/ (IX-1) with an intermediate of formula (X) in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile; (vii) the reaction of a compound of formula (Vl) 6% N\ | (R2)n/ / Nj/D N/ (V1) with an ediate of formula W11-R3b wherein R3b represents optionally tuted C2- yl and W11 represents a le leaving group such as for example halo, e.g. chloro, or —O-S(=O)2-CH3, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example NaH, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide; (viii) the reaction of a compound of formula (Vlll’) wherein RX and Ry represent C1- 4alkyl, and RZ represent C1_4alkyl or phenyl, QU’;1C2--6alkynyl (VIII‘) with a suitable acid, such as for example trifluoroacetic acid, in the presence of a le solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran; (viii) deprotecting a compound of formula (XXXXll) QU:1C2-6a1kyny1 (xxxxn) in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example K2C03, and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol and the like; (ix) the reaction of a compound of formula (VI) (R’n9%: j/D(INF (VI) with di(C1-ealkyl)vinylphosphonate in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example tri-N-butylphosphine, and a suitable solvent, such as for e acetonitrile; (x) deprotecting a compound of formula (XXXXI) wherein the D’N moiety represents a D moiety wherein the D moiety contains a nitrogen atom NR‘OR“ $6 (111-6alky1 fréalkyl GM N\ N\ D'N n<R2>// ] (xxxxn in the presence of a le base, such as for example K2C03, and a suitable solvent, such as for example an l, e.g. methanol and the like; (xi) the reaction of a compound of formula (XXXI) $(=O}NH-NH2 C1-6alkyl (R2>n/ / N/ (XXXI) with Wg-CN, wherein W8 ents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example NaH003, and a suitable solvent, such as for example water or dioxane; (xii) the reaction of a compound of formula (XXXV) o (RNHz \\ O as~0% (Ereaikyl 0/“! NjY (Rzgn/ UN/N\ (XXXV) with a suitable base, such as for example N, N-diisopropylethylamine and triethylamine, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol; (xiii) deprotecting a nd of formula (XXVI) wherein P represents a suitable Go—0 protective group such as for example —O—Si(CH3)2(C(CH3)3) or wherein Y’N ents an —E-D moiety n the D ring moiety ns a nitrogen atom 1‘13 /C1-6a|kyl @N YN N\ N\ (Rzgn/ UNI (XXVI) in the presence of a suitable acid, such as for e HCI or trifluoroacetic acid, or a suitable de-silylating agent, such as for example tetrabutyl ammonium fluoride, and a suitable solvent, such as an alcohol, e.g. methanol, or tetrahydrofuran; (xiv) the reaction of a compound of formula (XXIX) wherein Y’N represents an —E-D moiety wherein the D ring moiety contains a nitrogen atom, with a compound of formula (XXI) C|)H (l3(=0) $3 /C1-6a|ky| @N N\ YN N\ H’@ + (XXI) // U j <R2>n / N/ (XXIX) in the presence of le peptide coupling reagents such as, 1—hydroxy-benzotriazole and 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)—3-ethyl carbodiimide HCI; (xv) the reaction of a compound of formula (XXiX) wherein Y’N represents an —E-D moiety n the D ring moiety contains a nitrogen atom §<=0> 3 C1-6alkyl \ E N “/1 UUT// (R2)n / N/ (XXIX) with NHR4R5 in the presence of suitable peptide ng reagents such as 1—hydroxy- benzotriazole and 1—(3—dimethylaminopropyl)—3-ethyl carbodiimide HCI and a suitable base, such as triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane; (xvi) ng the below compound H3C—(o:)2s—o—R2' 3 \ FF [E/N N\ N\ Y ,/ l (R2)n-1 uN/j : with NHR7R8 in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example K2C03, and a suitable solvent, such as for example ydrofuran; (xvii) deprotecting the below compound in the presence of hydrazine monohydrate, and a le solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol; (xvii) reacting an intermediate of formula (Vl) / \ N N\ N\ D (R )n U I/ N/ with W6-R3d wherein W6 represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo, , and the like, or —O-S(=O)2-CH3 or p-toluenesulfonate, and R3d ents optionally substituted C1-6alkyl, such as for example —CH2-CgH5, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, 032C03, potassium utoxyde or potassium hydroxide, optionally a suitable phase transfer agent, such as for example tetrabutylammonium bromide, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethyIformamide, N,N-dimethylacetamide, 2-methyltetrahydrofuran, tetrahyd rofuran, water or acetonitriIe. wherein the variables are as defined herein; and optionally thereafter converting one compound of the formuIa (I) into another compound of the formula (I).
A further embodiment is a s for synthesis of a compound of formula (VI) n: I —> H /j/ / | (IV) Gnu-12 GNUNj/D/ (R23/ (Rhn/ / N/ (V) (VI) a compound of a (IV) is reacted with an intermediate of formula (V) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example palladium (II) acetate, a suitable base, such as sodium tert-butoxide or CszCO3, a suitable ligand, such as for example 1,1'—[1,1'—binaphthalene]—2,2'-diylbis[1,1-diphenylphosphine], and a suitable solvent or solvent mixture, such as for example dioxane or ne glycol dimethyiether and water.
AIternatively a compound of formula (IV) is d with an intermediate of formula (V) in the presence of a suitable solvent such as for e an alcohol, e.g. isopropanoI, and optionaily in the presence of a suitable acid such as for example hydrochloric acid.
Alternatively a compound of formuIa (IV) is reacted with an intermediate of formula (V) in the presence of a suitable deprotonating agent such as for example lithium bis(trimethylsinI)amide, in the presence of a suitable sovent such as for example N<N- dimethylformamide or tetrahydrofuran.
In a further embodiment the invention provides a novel intermediate. In one ment the invention es a novel intermediate as described . In another ment the invention provides a novel intermediate of formula (VI) or formula (IX).
In one embodiment, the present invention also relates to a compound having the following formula : (RQHUT// / n N/ / \ H N\ N\ e U I (R n N \ H E'-D / N\ N\ e U I (R n N including any stereochemically ic form thereof; wherein Y represents N—OR19 or —D’ or —E’-D; D’ represents a 3 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or ic heterocyciyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or 8, wherein said carbocyclyl and heterocyciyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R1 groups; wherein E’ represents R23)n—, C2-4a|kenediyi optionally substituted with R22, c2. 4alkynediyl optionally substituted with R22, —CO-(CR22R23)s-, -(CR22R23)S-CO-, -NR22— (CR22R23)s-, -(CR22R23)S—NR22-, ~O-(CR22R23 _ -, -(CR22R23)s-O-, -S(O)m-(CR22R23)s-, (CR22R23)s—S(O)m-, —(CR22R23)s-CO—NRZZ-(CR22R23)S- or —(CR22R23)s-NR22-CO- (CR22R23)S-; and n D, R2 and n are as defined for a compound of formula (I) above; a N-oxide thereof, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or a soivate thereof.
Pharmaceutically Acceptable Salts, Solvates or tives thereof In this section, as in all other sections of this ation, unless the context indicates othenivise, references to formula (I) include references to all other sub-groups, preferences, embodiments and examples thereof as defined herein. 2012/052672 Unless otherwise specified, a reference to a ular nd also includes ionic forms, salts, solvates, isomers, tautomers, N-oxides, esters, prodrugs, isotopes and protected forms thereof, for example, as discussed below; preferably, the ionic forms, or salts or tautomers or isomers or N-oxides or solvates thereof; and more preferably, the ionic forms, or salts or tautomers or solvates or protected forms thereof, even more preferably the salts or tautomers or es thereof. Many compounds of the formula (I) can exist in the form of salts, for exampIe acid on salts or, in certain cases salts of organic and inorganic bases such as carboxylate, sulphonate and phosphate salts. AII such salts are within the scope of this invention, and references to compounds of the formula (I) include the salt forms of the nds. It will be appreciated that references to “derivatives” include references to ionic forms, salts, solvates, isomers, tautomers, N-oxides, esters, gs, isotopes and protected forms thereof.
According to one aspect of the invention there is ed a compound as defined herein or a salt, tautomer, N-oxide or solvate thereof. ing to a further aspect of the invention there is provided a compound as defined herein or a salt or solvate thereof. References to compounds of the formula (I) and sub-groups thereof as defined herein include within their scope the salts or solvates or tautomers or N-oxides of the compounds.
The salt forms of the compounds of the ion are typically pharmaceutically acceptable salts, and examples of pharmaceutically able salts are discussed in Berge et al. (1977) "Pharmaceutically Acceptable Salts," J. Pharm. Sci., Vol. 66, pp. 1- 19. However, salts that are not pharmaceutically acceptable may also be prepared as intermediate forms which may then be converted into pharmaceutically acceptable salts.
Such non-pharmaceutically acceptable salts forms, which may be useful, for example, in the purification or separation of the compounds of the invention, also form part of the invenfion.
The salts of the present ion can be sized from the parent compound that contains a basic or acidic moiety by conventional chemical methods such as methods described in Pharmaceutical Salts: Properties, Selection, and Use, P. Heinrich StahI (Editor), Camille G. Wermuth (Editor), ISBN: 3026—8, Hardcover, 388 pages, August 2002. Generally, such salts can be prepared by reacting the free acid or base forms of these compounds with the appropriate base or acid in water or in an organic solvent, or in a mixture of the two; generally, nonaqueous media such as ether, ethyl e, l, isopropanol, or acetonitrile are used. The nds of the ion may exist as mono- or di-salts depending upon the pKa of the acid from which the salt is formed.
Acid on salts may be formed with a wide variety of acids, both inorganic and organic. Examples of acid addition salts include salts formed with an acid selected from the group consisting of acetic, 2,2—dichloroacetic, adipic, alginic, ascorbic (e.g. L— ascorbic), L-aspartic, benzenesulphonic, benzoic, 4—acetamidobenzoic, butanoic, (+) camphoric, camphor—sulphonic, (+)-(1S)—camphorsulphonic, capric, caproic, caprylic, cinnamic, citric, cyclamic, dodecylsulphuric, ethane-1,2-disulphonic, sulphonic, 2- hydroxyethanesulphonic, formic, fumaric, galactaric, ic, glucoheptonic, D-gluconic, glucuronic (e.g. D-glucuronic), ic (e.g. L-glutamic), d—oxoglutaric, glycolic, hippuric, romic, hydrochloric, hydriodic, isethionic, lactic (e.g. (+)—L-lactic, (i)-DL- lactic), lactobionic, maleic, malic, (-)—L—malic, malonic, (i)—DL-mandelic, methanesulphonic, naphthalenesulphonic (e.g.naphthalene-Z-sulphonic), naphthalene- 1,5-disulphonic, 1-hydroxy—2—naphthoic, nicotinic, nitric, oleic, orotic, oxalic, ic, pamoic, phosphoric, propionic, L-pyroglutamic, pyruvic, salicylic, 4-amino-salicylic, sebacic, stearic, succinic, sulphuric, tannic, (+)-L-tartaric, thiocyanic, toluenesulphonic (e.g. p—toluenesulphonic), undecylenic and valeric acids, as well as acylated amino acids and cation exchange resins.
One particular group of salts consists of salts formed from acetic, hydrochloric, dic, phosphoric, nitric, sulphuric, citric, lactic, succinic, maleic, malic, onic, fumaric, benzenesulphonic, toluenesulphonic, methanesulphonic (mesylate), ethanesulphonic, alenesulphonic, valeric, acetic, propanoic, ic, malonic, glucuronic and lactobionic acids. Another group of acid addition salts includes salts formed from acetic, , ascorbic, aspartic, citric, DL-Lactic, fumaric, gluconic, glucuronic, hippuric, hydrochloric, glutamic, DL-malic, methanesulphonic, sebacic, stearic, succinic and tartaric acids.
If the compound is anionic, or has a functional group which may be anionic (e.g., -COOH may be -COO‘), then a salt may be formed with a le cation. Examples of suitable inorganic cations include, but are not limited to, alkali metal ions such as Na+ and W, alkaline earth metal cations such as Ca2+ and Mg2+, and other cations such as Al”. Examples of le organic cations include, but are not limited to, ammonium ion (i.e., NH4+) and substituted um ions (e.g., NH3R+, NH2R2+, NHR3+, NRJ).
Examples of some le substituted ammonium ions are those derived from: ethylamine, diethylamine, dicyclohexylamine, triethylamine, butylamine, ethylenediamine, ethanoiamine, diethanolamine, piperazine, benzylamine, phenylbenzylamine, choline, meglumine, and tromethamine, as well as amino acids, such as lysine and arginine. An e of a common quaternary ammonium ion is Where the compounds of the formula (l) contain an amine function, these may form quaternary ammonium salts, for example by reaction with an alkylating agent according to methods well known to the skilled person. Such quaternary ammonium compounds are within the scope of formula (I). Compounds of the formula (I) containing an amine function may also form N-oxides. A reference herein to a compound of the formula (I) that contains an amine function also includes the N-oxide. Where a compound contains several amine ons, one or more than one nitrogen atom may be oxidised to form an N-oxide. Particular examples of N—oxides are the N-oxides of a tertiary amine or a en atom of a nitrogen—containing heterocycle. N-Oxides can be formed by treatment of the corresponding amine with an oxidizing agent such as hydrogen peroxide or a per-acid (e.g. a peroxycarboxylic acid), see for example Advanced Organic Chemistry, by Jerry March, 4th Edition, Wiley Interscience, pages. More particularly, N-oxides can be made by the procedure of L. W. Deady (Syn. Comm. (1977), 7, 509-514) in which the amine compound is reacted with m- chloroperoxybenzoic acid ), for example, in an inert solvent such as dichloromethane.
The compounds of the invention may form solvates, for example with water (i.e., hydrates) or common organic ts. As used , the term te” means a physical association of the compounds of the present ion with one or more solvent molecules. This physical association involves varying degrees of ionic and covalent bonding, including hydrogen g. in certain ces the solvate will be capable of ion, for example when one or more solvent molecules are incorporated in the crystal lattice of the crystalline solid. The term “solvate” is intended to encompass both solution-phase and isolatabIe solvates. Non-Iimiting es of suitable solvates include compounds of the invention in combination with water, isopropanol, ethanol, methanol, DMSO, ethyl acetate, acetic acid or ethanolamine and the like. The compounds of the invention may exert their biological effects whilst they are in solution.
Solvates are well known in pharmaceutical chemistry. They can be important to the processes for the preparation of a substance (e.g. in on to their purification, the storage of the nce (e.g. its stability) and the ease of handling of the substance and are often formed as part of the isolation or purification stages of a chemical sis. A person skilled in the art can determine by means of standard and long used techniques r a hydrate or other solvate has formed by the isolation conditions or cation conditions used to prepare a given compound. es of such techniques include thermogravimetric analysis (TGA), differentiaI scanning calorimetry (DSC), X—ray crystallography (e.g. single crystal X-ray crystallography or X- ray powder diffraction) and SoIid State NMR (SS-NMR, also known as Magic Angle Spinning NMR or MAS-NMR). Such techniques are as much a part of the standard icaI toolkit of the skiIIed chemist as NMR, IR, HPLC and MS. Alternatively the skilled person can deliberately form a solvate using crystallisation conditions that include an amount of the solvent required for the ular solvate. Thereafter the standard methods described above, can be used to ish r solvates had formed. Also encompassed by formula (I) are any complexes (e.g. inclusion xes or clathrates with compounds such as cyclodextrins, or complexes with metals) of the compounds.
Furthermore, the compounds of the present invention may have one or more polymorph (crystalline) or amorphous forms and as such are intended to be included in the scope of the invention.
Compounds of the formula (I) may exist in a number of different geometric isomeric, and tautomeric forms and references to compounds of the formula (I) include aII such forms.
For the avoidance of doubt, where a compound can exist in one of several geometric isomeric or tautomeric forms and only one is specifically described or shown, all others are nevertheless embraced by formula (I). Other examples of tautomeric forms include, for example, keto-, enol-, and e-forms, as in, for example, the following eric pairs: keto/enol (illustrated below), imine/enamine, amide/imino alcohol, amidine/enediamines, nitroso/oxime, thioketone/enethiol, and nitro/aci-nitro. fi‘ 00 \ /OH H+ o —C“C : CZC : C:C/ I \ / \ H+ / \ keto enol enolate Where compounds of the formula (I) contain one or more chiral s, and can exist in the form of two or more optical isomers, nces to nds of the formula (I) include all optical isomeric forms thereof (e.g. enantiomers, epimers and reoisomers), either as individual optical isomers, or mixtures (e.g. racemic mixtures) of two or more optical isomers, unless the context requires ise. The optical isomers may be characterised and identified by their optical activity (i.e. as + and — isomers, or d and I isomers) or they may be characterised in terms of their absolute stereochemistry using the “R and S” nomenclature developed by Cahn, lngold and Prelog, see Advanced Organic Chemistry by Jerry March, 4th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1992, pages 109-114, and see also Cahn, lngold & Prelog (1966) Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Eng/., 5, 385-415. Optical isomers can be ted by a number of techniques including chiral chromatography (chromatography on a chiral support) and such techniques are well known to the person skilled in the art. As an alternative to chiral chromatography, optical s can be ted by forming diastereoisomeric salts with chiral acids such as (+)-tartaric acid, roglutamic acid, (-)—di-toluoyl-L-tartaric acid, (+)-mandelic acid, (-)—malic acid, and (-)-camphorsulphonic, separating the diastereoisomers by preferential crystallisation, and then dissociating the salts to give the dual enantiomer of the free base.
Where compounds of the formula (I) exist as two or more optical isomeric forms, one enantiomer in a pair of enantiomers may exhibit advantages over the other enantiomer, for example, In terms of biological activity. Thus, in certain circumstances, it may be desirable to use as a therapeutic agent only one of a pair of enantiomers, or only one of a plurality of diastereoisomers. Accordingly, the invention provides compositions containing a compound of the formula (I) having one or more chiral centres, wherein at least 55% (e.g. at least 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90% or 95%) of the nd of the formula (I) is present as a single optical isomer (e.g. enantiomer or diastereoisomer). In one general embodiment, 99% or more (e.g. substantially all) of the total amount of the compound of the formula (I) may be present as a single optical isomer (e.g. enantiomer or diastereoisomer). When a specific isomeric form is identified (e.g. 8 configuration, or E isomer), this means that said isomeric form is substantially free of the other (s), i.e. said ic form is present in at least 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 99% or more (e.g. substantially all) of the total amount of the compound of the ion.
The compounds of the invention include compounds with one or more isotopic substitutions, and a reference to a particular t includes within its scope all isotopes of the element. For example, a reference to hydrogen includes within its scope 1H, 2H (D), and 3H (T). Similarly, references to carbon and oxygen include within their scope respectively 12C, 130 and 14C and 16O and 18O. The isotopes may be radioactive or non-radioactive. In one embodiment of the invention, the compounds n no radioactive isotopes. Such compounds are preferred for therapeutic use. In another embodiment, r, the compound may contain one or more radioisotopes.
Compounds containing such radioisotopes may be useful in a diagnostic context.
Esters such as carboxylic acid esters and acyloxy esters of the compounds of formula (I) bearing a carboxylic acid group or a hydroxyl group are also embraced by formula (l). in one embodiment of the invention, formula (I) includes within its scope esters of compounds of the formula (l) bearing a carboxylic acid group or a hydroxyl group. In another embodiment of the invention, formula (l) does not include within its scope esters of compounds of the formula (I) bearing a carboxylic acid group or a hydroxyl group.
Examples of esters are compounds containing the group -C(=O)OR, wherein R is an ester substituent, for example, a 01.6 alkyl group, a heterocyclyl group, or a 05-20 aryl group, preferably a 01.6 alkyl group. Particular examples of ester groups include, but are not limited to, OCH3, -C(=O)OCH2CH3, -C(=O)OC(CH3)3, and -C(=O)OPh.
Examples of acyloxy (reverse ester) groups are represented by -OC(=O)R, wherein R is an acyloxy tuent, for example, a 01-7 alkyl group, a 03-20 heterocyclyl group, or a 05-20 aryl group, preferably a 01-7 alkyl group. Particular examples of acyloxy groups e, but are not d to, -OC(=O)CH3 (acetoxy), -OC(=O)CH2CH3, -OC(=O)C(CH3)3, ~OC(=O)Ph, and -OC(=O)CH2Ph.
For e, some prodrugs are esters of the active compound (e.g., a physiologically acceptable metabolically labile ester). By “prodrugs” is meant for example any compound that is converted in vivo into a ically active compound of the formula (I).
During metabolism, the ester group (-C(=O)OR) is cleaved to yield the active drug.
Such esters may be formed by esterification, for example, of any of the carboxylic acid groups (-C(=O)OH) in the parent compound, with, where appropriate, prior protection of any other ve groups present in the parent compound, followed by deprotection if required.
Examples of such metabolically labile esters include those of the formula -C(=O)OR wherein R is: C1-6alkyl (e.g., -Me, -Et, -nPr, -iPr, -nBu, -sBu, -iBu, -tBu); C1_6aminoalkyl [e.g., aminoethyl; 2-(N,N-diethylamino)ethyl; 2-(4-morpholino)ethyl); and y- C1_7alkyl [e.g., acyloxymethyl; acyloxyethyl; pivaloyloxymethyl; acetoxymethyl; 1-acetoxyethyl; 1-(1-methoxymethyl)ethyl-carbonyloxyethyl; 1-(benzoyloxy)ethyl; isopropoxy-carbonyloxymethyl; 1-isopropoxy-carbonyloxyethyl; cyclohexylcarbonyloxymethyl ; 1—cyclohexyl-carbonyloxyethyl; cyclohexyloxy—carbonyloxymethyl; 1- cyclohexyloxy-carbonyloxyethyl; (4-tetrahydropyranyloxy) carbonyloxymethyl; 1-(4— ydropyranyloxy)carbonyloxyethyl; (4-tetrahydropyranyl)carbonyloxymethyl; and etrahydropyranyl)carbonyloxyethyl]. Also, some prodrugs are activated enzymatically to yield the active compound, or a compound which, upon further chemical on, yields the active compound (for example, as in antigen-directed enzyme pro-drug therapy (ADEPT), gene-directed enzyme pro-drug therapy (GDEPT) and ligand-directed enzyme pro-drug therapy (LlDEPT) etc.). For example, the prodrug may be a sugar derivative or other glycoside ate, or may be an amino acid ester derivative.
Protein Tyrosine Kinases (PTK) The compounds of the invention described herein inhibit or modulate the activity of certain tyrosine kinases, and thus the nds will be useful in the treatment or laxis, in ular the treatment, of disease states or conditions mediated by those tyrosine kinases, in particular FGFR.
FGFR The fibroblast growth factor (FGF) family of protein tyrosine kinase (PTK) receptors regulates a diverse array of physiologic functions including nesis, wound healing, cell differentiation and angiogenesis, and development. Both normal and malignant cell growth as well as proliferation are ed by s in local concentration of FGFs, extracellular ling molecules which act as autocrine as well as paracrine factors.
Autocrine FGF signalling may be particularly important in the progression of steroid hormone-dependent cancers to a hormone independent state. FGFs and their receptors are expressed at increased levels in several tissues and cell lines and pression is believed to contribute to the malignant phenotype. Furthermore, a number of oncogenes are homologues of genes encoding growth factor receptors, and there is a ial for aberrant activation of FGF-dependent signalling in human pancreatic cancer (Knights et al., Pharmacology and Therapeutics 2010 125:1 (105-117); Korc M. et al Current Cancer Drug Targets 2009 9:5 (639-651)).
The two prototypic s are acidic fibroblast growth factor (aFGF or FGF1) and basic fibroblast growth factor (bFGF or FGF2), and to date, at least twenty distinct FGF family members have been identified. The cellular response to FGFs is transmitted via four types of high affinity transmembrane protein tyrosine-kinase last growth factor receptors (FGFR) numbered 1 to 4 (FGFR1 to .
Disruption of the FGFR1 pathway should affect tumor cell proliferation since this kinase is activated in many tumor types in addition to proliferating endothelial cells. The over— expression and activation of FGFR1 in tumor— associated vasculature has suggested a role for these molecules in tumor angiogenesis.
A recent study has shown a link between FGFR1 expression and tumorigenicity in Classic Lobular Carcinomas (CLC). CLCs account for 10-15% of all breast cancers and, in general, lack p53 and Her2 expression whilst retaining expression of the oestrogen receptor. A gene amplification of 8p12—p11.2 was demonstrated in ~50% of CLC cases and this was shown to be linked with an sed expression of FGFR1. Preliminary studies with siRNA directed against FGFR1, or a small molecule inhibitor of the or, showed cell lines harbouring this amplification to be particularly sensitive to inhibition of this signalling pathway. Rhabdomyosarcoma (RMS) is the most common pediatric soft tissue sarcoma likely results from abnormal proliferation and differentiation during skeletal myogenesis. FGFR1 is over-expressed in y rhabdomyosarcoma tumors and is associated with hypomethylation of a 5' CpG island and abnormal sion of the AKT1, NOG, and BMP4 genes. FGFR1 has also been linked to squamous lung cancer, colorectal cancer, glioblastoma, astrocytomas, prostate cancer, small cell lung cancer, melanoma, head and neck cancer, d cancer, uterine cancer.
Fibroblast growth factor receptor 2 has high affinity for the acidic and/or basic fibroblast growth factors, as well as the nocyte growth factor s. Fibroblast growth factor receptor 2 also propagates the potent osteogenic effects of FGFs during osteobiast growth and differentiation. ons in fibroblast growth factor receptor 2, leading to complex functional alterations, were shown to induce abnormal ossification of cranial sutures (craniosynostosis), implying a major role of FGFR signalling in intramembranous bone formation. For example, in Apert (AP) syndrome, characterized by ure cranial suture ossification, most cases are associated with point mutations engendering gain-of—function in fibroblast growth factor or 2. in addition, mutation screening in patients with mic craniosynostoses indicates that a number of recurrent FGFR2 mutations accounts for severe forms of Pfeiffer syndrome. Particular mutations of FGFR2 include W290C, D321A, Y34OC, C342R, C3428, C342W, N549H, K641R in FGFR2.
Several severe abnormalities in human skeletal development, ing Apert, n, Jackson-Weiss, Stevenson cutis gyrata, and Pfeiffer syndromes are associated with the occurrence of mutations in fibroblast growth factor receptor 2. Most, if not all, cases of Pfeiffer Syndrome (P8) are also caused by de novo mutation of the fibroblast growth factor receptor 2 gene, and it was recently shown that mutations in fibroblast growth factor receptor 2 break one of the cardinal rules governing ligand specificity.
Namely, two mutant splice forms of fibrobiast growth factor receptor, FGFR2c and FGFR2b, have acquired the ability to bind to and be activated by atypical FGF ligands.
This loss of ligand specificity leads to aberrant signalling and ts that the severe phenotypes of these disease syndromes result from ectopic ligand-dependent activation of fibroblast growth factor receptor 2.
Genetic aberrations of the FGFR3 receptor ne kinase such as chromosomal translocations or point mutations result in ectoplcally expressed or deregulated, constitutively active, FGFR3 receptors. Such abnormalities are linked to a subset of multiple myelomas and in bladder, hepatocellular, oral squamous cell carcinoma and cervical carcinomas. Accordingly, FGFR3 inhibitors would be useful in the treatment of multiple myeloma, bladder and cervical carcinomas. FGFR3 is also over-expressed in bladder cancer, in particular invasive bladder cancer. FGFR3 is frequently activated by mutation in urothelial oma (UC). Increased sion was associated with on (85% of mutant tumors showed high—level sion) but also 42% of tumors with no detectable mutation showed over—expression, including many muscle-invasive . FGFR3 is also linked to endometrial and thyroid cancer.
Over expression of FGFR4 has been linked to poor prognosis in both te and thyroid omas. in addition a germline polymorphism (Gly388Arg) is associated with increased incidence of lung, breast, colon, liver (HCC) and prostate cancers. In addition, a truncated form of FGFR4 (including the kinase domain) has also been found to be present in 40% of pituitary tumours but not present in normal tissue. FGFR4 pression has been observed in liver, colon and lung tumours. FGFR4 has been implicated in colorectal and liver cancer where expression of its ligand FGF19 is frequently elevated. FGFR4 is also linked to astrocytomas, rhabdomyosarcoma.
Fibrotic conditions are a major medical problem resulting from abnormal or excessive deposition of fibrous tissue. This occurs in many diseases, including liver cirrhosis, glomerulonephritis, ary fibrosis, systemic fibrosis, rheumatoid arthritis, as well as the natural process of wound healing. The mechanisms of pathological is are not fully tood but are thought to result from the actions of various cytokines (including tumor necrosis factor (TNF), last growth factors (FGF's), platelet derived growth factor (PDGF) and transforming growth factor beta. (TGFB) involved in the proliferation of fibroblasts and the deposition of extracellular matrix proteins (including collagen and fibronectin). This results in tion of tissue structure and function and subsequent pathology.
A number of preclinical studies have demonstrated the up-regulation of fibroblast growth factors in preclinical models of lung fibrosis. TGF[31 and PDGF have been reported to be ed in the fibrogenic s and further published work suggests the elevation of FGF’s and consequent increase in fibroblast proliferation, may be in response to elevated TGFBt. The potential therapeutic benefit of targeting the fibrotic mechanism in conditions such as idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis (lPF) is suggested by the reported clinical effect of the ibrotic agent pirfenidone . idiopathic pulmonary is (also referred to as Cryptogenic fibrosing itis) is a progressive condition involving scarring of the lung. Gradually, the air sacs of the lungs become replaced by fibrotic tissue, which becomes thicker, causing an irreversible loss of the tissue’s ability to transfer oxygen into the bloodstream. The symptoms of the condition e shortness of breath, chronic dry coughing, fatigue, chest pain and loss of appetite resulting in rapid weight loss. The condition is extremely s with approximately 50% mortality after 5 years.
As such, the compounds which inhibit FGFR will be useful in providing a means of preventing the growth or inducing apoptosis in tumours, particularly by inhibiting enesis. it is therefore anticipated that the compounds will prove useful in treating or ting proliferative disorders such as cancers. In particular tumours with ting mutants of receptor tyrosine s or upregulation of receptor tyrosine kinases may be particularly sensitive to the inhibitors. Patients with activating mutants of any of the isoforms of the specific RTKs discussed herein may also find ent with RTK inhibitors particularly beneficial.
Vascular Endothelial Growth Factor (VEGFR) Chronic proliferative diseases are often accompanied by profound angiogenesis, which can contribute to or maintain an inflammatory and/or proliferative state, or which leads to tissue destruction through the invasive proliferation of blood vessels. .
Angiogenesis is lly used to describe the development of new or replacement blood vessels, or neovascularisation. It is a necessary and physiological normal process by which vasculature is established in the embryo. Angiogenesis does not occur, in general, in most normal adult tissues, exceptions being sites of ovulation, menses and wound healing. Many diseases, however, are characterized by tent and unregulated angiogenesis. For instance, in arthritis, new capillary blood vessels invade the joint and y cartilage. in diabetes (and in many different eye diseases), new vessels invade the macula or retina or other ocular structures, and may cause blindness. The process of sclerosis has been linked to angiogenesis. Tumor growth and metastasis have been found to be enesis—dependent.
The recognition of the involvement of angiogenesis in major diseases has been accompanied by research to identify and develop inhibitors of angiogenesis. These inhibitors are generally classified in response to discrete s in the angiogenesis cascade, such as activation of endothelial cells by an angiogenic ; synthesis and e of degradative enzymes; endothelial cell migration; proliferation of endothelial cells; and formation of capillary tubules. Therefore, enesis occurs in many stages and attempts are underway to discover and develop compounds that work to block angiogenesis at these various stages.
There are publications that teach that inhibitors of angiogenesis, working by diverse mechanisms, are beneficial in diseases such as cancer and metastasis, ocular diseases, arthritis and hemangioma.
Vascular endothelial growth factor (VEGF), a ptide, is mitogenic for endothelial cells in vitro and stimulates angiogenic responses in vivo. VEGF has also been linked to inappropriate angiogenesis. VEGFR(s) are protein tyrosine kinases (PTKs). PTKs catalyze the phosphorylation of ic tyrosine residues in proteins ed in cell on thus regulating cell growth, survival and differentiation.
Three PTK receptors for VEGF have been fied: VEGFR-1 (Flt-1) ; VEGFR-2 (FIk—1 or KDR) and VEGFR—3 (Flt-4). These receptors are involved in angiogenesis and participate in signal transduction. Of ular interest is VEGFR-Z, which is a transmembrane receptor PTK expressed primarily in endothelial cells. Activation of VEGFR-Z by VEGF is a critical step in the signal transduction pathway that initiates tumour angiogenesis. VEGF expression may be constitutive to tumour cells and can also be upregulated in response to certain stimuli. One such stimuli is hypoxia, where VEGF sion is upregulated in both tumour and associated host tissues. The VEGF ligand activates VEGFR-2 by binding with its extracellular VEGF binding site. This leads to or dimerization of VEGFR5 and autophosphorylation of tyrosine residues at the intracellular kinase domain of VEGFR- 2. The kinase domain operates to transfer a phosphate from ATP to the tyrosine residues, thus providing binding sites for signalling proteins downstream of VEGFR-2 leading ultimately to tion of angiogenesis. inhibition at the kinase domain binding site of VEGFR-2 would block phosphorylation of tyrosine residues and serve to disrupt initiation of enesis. enesis is a physiologic process of new blood vessel formation mediated by various cytokines called angiogenic factors. Although its potential pathophysiologic role in solid tumors has been extensively studied for more than 3 decades, enhancement of angiogenesis in chronic lymphocytic leukemia (CLL) and other malignant hematological disorders has been recognized more recently. An increased level of angiogenesis has been documented by various experimental methods both in bone marrow and lymph nodes of patients with CLL. Although the role of enesis in the pathophysiology of this disease remains to be fully elucidated, experimental data suggest that several angiogenic factors play a role in the e progression. Biologic s of angiogenesis were also shown to be of prognostic relevance in CLL. This indicates that VEGFR inhibitors may also be of benefit for patients with leukemia’s such as CLL.
In order for a tumour mass to get beyond a critical size, it must develop an associated ature. It has been proposed that targeting a tumor vasculature would limit tumor expansion and could be a useful cancer therapy. Observations of tumor growth have indicated that small tumour masses can persist in a tissue without any tumour-specific vasculature. The growth arrest of nonvascularized tumors has been attributed to the effects of hypoxia at the center of the tumor. More recently, a variety of proangiogenic and antiangiogenic s have been identified and have led to the concept of the “angiogenic switch,” a process in which disruption of the normal ratio of angiogenic stimuli and inhibitors in a tumor mass allows for autonomous arization. The enic switch appears to be governed by the same c alterations that drive malignant conversion: the activation of oncogenes and the loss of tumour suppressor genes. Several growth factors act as positive regulators of angiogenesis. Foremost among these are vascular elial growth factor (VEGF), basic fibroblast growth factor (bFGF), and angiogenin. Proteins such as thrombospondin (Tsp-i), angiostatin, and endostatin function as negative tors of angiogenesis. 2012/052672 Inhibition of VEGFR2 but not VEGFR1 markedly disrupts angiogenic switching, persistent angiogenesis, and initial tumor growth in a mouse model. In late-stage , phenotypic resistance to VEGFR2 blockade emerged, as tumors regrew during treatment after an initial period of growth suppression. This resistance to VEGF blockade involves reactivation of tumour angiogenesis, independent of VEGF and associated with hypoxia-mediated induction of other proangiogenic s, ing s of the FGF family. These other proangiogenic signals are functionally implicated in the revascularization and regrowth of tumours in the evasion phase, as FGF blockade impairs progression in the face of VEGF inhibition.
There is evidence for normalization of glioblastoma blood s in patients treated with a pan-VEGF receptor tyrosine kinase inhibitor, AZD2171, in a phase 2 study. MRI determination of vessel normalization in combination with circulating biomarkers provides for an effective means to assess response to antiangiogenic agents.
PDGFR A ant tumour is the t of uncontrolled cell proliferation. Cell growth is controlled by a delicate balance between growth—promoting and growth-inhibiting factors. In normal tissue the production and activity of these factors results in differentiated cells growing in a lled and regulated manner that maintains the normal integrity and functioning of the organ. The malignant cell has evaded this control; the natural balance is disturbed (via a variety of mechanisms) and unregulated, nt cell growth occurs. A growth factor of importance in tumour development is the et- derived growth factor (PDGF) that comprises a family of peptide growth factors that signal through cell surface tyrosine kinase receptors (PDGFR) and stimulate various cellular functions including growth, proliferation, and differentiation.
Advantages of a selective tor Development of FGFR kinase inhibitors with a differentiated selectivity profile provides a new opportunity to use these targeted agents in patient sub-groups whose disease is driven by FGFR deregulation. Compounds that exhibit reduced inhibitory action on additional kinases, particularly VEGFR2 and PDGFR-beta, offer the opportunity to have a differentiated side-effect or toxicity profile and as such allow for a more effective ent of these indications. Inhibitors of VEGFR2 and PDGFR—beta are associated with toxicities such as hypertension or oedema respectively. in the case of VEGFR2 inhibitors this ensive effect is often dose limiting, may be contraindicated in certain patient populations and requires clinical management.
Biological Activity and Therapeutic Uses The compounds of the invention, and subgroups thereof, have fibroblast growth factor receptor (FGFR) inhibiting or modulating activity and/or vascular elial growth factor receptor (VEGFR) inhibiting or modulating activity, and/or platelet derived growth factor receptor (PDGFR) inhibiting or modulating activity, and which will be useful in preventing or treating disease states or conditions described herein. In addition the compounds of the invention, and subgroups f, will be useful in preventing or treating es or condition mediated by the kinases. References to the preventing or prophylaxis or treatment of a disease state or condition such as cancer include within their scope alleviating or reducing the nce of cancer.
As used herein, the term "modulation", as applied to the activity of a kinase, is intended to define a change in the level of biological activity of the protein kinase. Thus, modulation encompasses physiological changes which effect an increase or decrease in the relevant protein kinase activity. In the latter case, the modulation may be bed as "inhibition". The modulation may arise directly or indirectly, and may be mediated by any mechanism and at any physiological level, including for example at the level of gene expression (including for example transcription, translation and/or post-translational modification), at the level of expression of genes encoding regulatory elements which act directly or indirectly on the levels of kinase activity. Thus, modulation may imply elevated/suppressed expression or over- or under-expression of a , including gene amplification (i.e. multiple gene copies) and/or increased or decreased expression by a riptional effect, as well as hyper- (or hypo-)activity and (de)activation of the protein kinase(s) (including (de)activation) by on(s). The terms ated”, “modulating" and “modulate” are to be interpreted accordingly.
As used herein, the term “mediated”, as used e.g. in conjunction with a kinase as described herein (and applied for example to various physiological processes, diseases, states, conditions, ies, treatments or interventions) is intended to operate tively so that the various ses, diseases, states, conditions, ents and interventions to which the term is applied are those in which the kinase plays a biological role. In cases where the term is applied to a disease, state or condition, the biological role played by a kinase may be direct or ct and may be necessary and/or ient for the manifestation of the symptoms of the disease, state or ion (or its aetiology or progression). Thus, kinase activity (and in particular aberrant levels of kinase activity, e.g. kinase over—expression) need not necessarily be the proximal cause of the disease, state or condition: rather, it is contemplated that the kinase mediated diseases, states or ions include those having actorial aetiologies and complex progressions in which the kinase in on is only partially involved. In cases where the term is applied to treatment, laxis or intervention, the role played by the kinase may be direct or indirect and may be necessary and/or sufficient for the operation of the treatment, prophylaxis or outcome of the intervention. Thus, a disease state or condition mediated by a kinase includes the development of resistance to any particular cancer drug or treatment.
Thus, for example, the compounds of the invention may be useful in alleviating or ng the incidence of cancer.
More particularly, the compounds of the formulae (I) and oups thereof are inhibitors of FGFRs. For example, compounds of the invention have activity against FGFR1, FGFR2, FGFR3, and/or FGFR4. and in particular FGFRs ed from FGFR1, FGFR2 and FGFRS; or in particular the compounds of formula (I) and sub- groups thereof are inhibitors of FGFR4.
Preferred compounds are compounds that inhibit one or more FGFR selected from FGFR1, FGFR2, FGFRS, and FGFR4. Preferred compounds of the ion are those having lC50 values of less than 0.1 pM.
Compounds of the invention also have activity against VEGFR.
In addition many of the compounds of the invention exhibit selectivity for the FGFR 1, 2, and/or 3, and/or 4 compared to VEGFR (in particular VEGFR2) and/or PDGFR and such compounds represent one preferred embodiment of the invention. In particular, the compounds exhibit selectivity over VEGFR2. For example, many compounds of the invention have lC5o values against FGFR1, 2 and/or 3 and/or 4 that are between a tenth and a dth of the leo against VEGFR (in particular ) and/or PDGFR B. In ular red compounds of the invention have at least 10 times greater activity against or inhibition of FGFR in particular FGFR1, FGFR2, FGFR3 and/or FGFR4 than VEGFRZ. More preferably the compounds of the invention have at least 100 times greater activity against or inhibition of FGFR in particular FGFR1, FGFR2, FGFR3 and/or FGFR4 than VEGFRZ. This can be determined using the methods described herein.
As a consequence of their ty in modulating or inhibiting FGFR, and/or VEGFR kinases, the compounds will be useful in providing a means of preventing the growth or inducing apoptosis of neoplasias, particularly by inhibiting angiogenesis. it is therefore anticipated that the compounds will prove useful in treating or preventing proliferative disorders such as cancers. in addition, the compounds of the invention could be useful in the treatment of es in which there is a disorder of proliferation, apoptosis or differentiation. in particular tumours with activating mutants of VEGFR or upregulation of VEGFR and patients with elevated levels of serum lactate dehydrogenase may be particularly sensitive to the compounds of the invention. Patients with activating mutants of any of the isoforms of the specific RTKs discussed herein may also find treatment with the nds of the invention particularly beneficial. For example, VEGFR overexpression in acute leukemia cells where the clonal progenitor may express VEGFR. Also, particular tumours with activating mutants or upregulation or overexpression of any of the isoforms of FGFR such as FGFR1, FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4 may be particularly sensitive to the compounds of the invention and thus patients as discussed herein with such particular tumours may also find treatment with the nds of the invention particularly beneficial. it may be red that the treatment is related to or ed at a d form of one of the receptor tyrosine kinases, such as discussed . Diagnosis of tumours with such mutations could be med using techniques known to a person skilled in the art and as described herein such as RTPCR and FISH.
Examples of cancers which may be treated (or inhibited) include, but are not limited to, a carcinoma, for example a carcinoma of the bladder, breast, colon (e.g. colorectal carcinomas such as colon adenocarcinoma and colon adenoma), kidney, urothelial, uterus, epidermis, liver, lung (for example adenocarcinoma, small cell lung cancer and non-small cell lung carcinomas, squamous lung cancer), oesophagus, head and neck, gall bladder, ovary, as (e.g. ne pancreatic carcinoma), stomach, gastrointestinal (also known as c) cancer (e.g. gastrointestinal stromal tumours), , endometrium, d, prostate, or skin (for example squamous cell carcinoma or dermatofibrosarcoma protuberans); pituitary cancer, a hematopoietic tumour of id lineage, for example leukemia, acute lymphocytic leukemia, chronic lymphocytic leukemia, B-cell lymphoma (e.g. diffuse large B-cell lymphoma), T-cell lymphoma, Hodgkin’s lymphoma, non-Hodgkin’s lymphoma, hairy cell lymphoma, or Burkett's lymphoma; a poietic tumour of myeloid lineage, for example leukemias, acute and chronic myelogenous leukemias, chronic myelomonocytic leukemia (CMML), myeloproliferative disorder, myeloproliferative me, myelodysplastic syndrome, or promyelocytic leukemia; multiple myeloma; thyroid follicular ; hepatocellular cancer, a tumour of mesenchymal origin (e.g. Ewing’s sarcoma), for example fibrosarcoma or rhabdomyosarcoma; a tumour of the central or peripheral nervous system, for example astrocytoma, neuroblastoma, glioma (such as glioblastoma multiforme) or schwannoma; melanoma; seminoma; teratocarcinoma; osteosarcoma; xeroderma pigmentosum; keratoctanthoma; d ular cancer; or Kaposi's sarcoma. In particular, squamous lung , breast cancer, colorectal cancer, glioblastoma, astrocytomas, prostate cancer, small cell lung cancer, ma, head and neck cancer, thyroid cancer, uterine cancer, gastric cancer, hepatocellular cancer, cervix cancer, multiple a, bladder , endometrial cancer, urothelial cancer, colon cancer, rhabdomyosarcoma, pituitary gland cancer. n cancers are resistant to treatment with particular drugs. This can be due to the type of the tumour or can arise due to treatment with the compound. In this regard, references to multiple myeloma es bortezomib sensitive le myeloma or refractory multiple myeloma. Similarly, references to chronic myelogenous leukemia includes imitanib sensitive c myelogenous leukemia and refractory chronic myelogenous leukemia. Chronic myelogenous leukemia is also known as chronic myeloid leukemia, chronic granulocytic leukemia or CML. Likewise, acute myelogenous leukemia, is also called acute myeloblastic leukemia, acute granulocytic leukemia, acute phocytic leukaemia or AML.
The compounds of the invention can also be used in the treatment of hematopoetic diseases of abnormal cell eration whether pre-malignant or stable such as myeloproliferative diseases. Myeloproliferative diseases ("MPD"s) are a group of diseases of the bone marrow in which excess cells are produced. They are related to, and may evolve into, myelodysplastic syndrome. roliferative diseases include polycythemia vera, essential ocythemia and y myelofibrosis. A r haematological er is hypereosinophilic syndrome. T-cell lymphoproliferative diseases include those derived from natural Killer cells.
In addition the compounds of the invention can be used to intestinal (also known as gastric) cancer e.g. gastrointestinal l tumours. Gastrointestinal cancer refers to malignant conditions of the gastrointestinal tract, including the esophagus, stomach, liver, biliary system, pancreas, bowels, and anus.
Thus, in the pharmaceutical compositions, uses or methods of this invention for treating a disease or condition comprising abnormal cell growth, the disease or condition comprising abnormal cell growth in one ment is a cancer.
Particular subsets of cancers include multiple myeloma, bladder, cervical, prostate and thyroid carcinomas, lung, breast, and colon cancers.
A further subset of cancers includes multiple myeloma, bladder, hepatocellular, oral squamous cell carcinoma and cervical carcinomas.
The nd of the invention, having FGFR such as FGFR1 inhibitory activity, may be particularly useful in the treatment or prevention of breast cancer in particular Classic Lobular Carcinomas (CLC).
As the compounds of the invention have FGFR4 ty they will also be useful in the treatment of prostate or pituitary cancers, or they will be useful in the treatment of breast cancer, lung cancer, prostate cancer, liver cancer (HCC) or lung cancer.
In particular the compounds of the ion as FGFR inhibitors, are useful in the treatment of le a, myeloproliferatoive disorders, endometrial cancer, prostate cancer, bladder cancer, lung cancer, ovarian cancer, breast , gastric cancer, colorectal cancer, and oral squamous cell carcinoma.
Further subsets of cancer are multiple myeloma, endometrial cancer, bladder cancer, al cancer, prostate cancer, lung cancer, breast cancer, colorectal cancer and thyroid carcinomas.
In particular the compounds of the invention are useful in the treatment of multiple myeloma (in ular multiple myeloma with t(4;14) translocation or overexpressing FGFR3), prostate cancer (hormone refractory ate carcinomas), endometrial cancer (in particular trial s with activating mutations in FGFR2) and breast cancer (in particular lobular breast cancer).
In particular the nds are useful in the treatment of lobular carcinomas such as CLC ic lobular carcinoma).
As the compounds have activity against FGFR3 they will be useful in the treatment of multiple myeloma and bladder cancer.
In particular the compounds are useful for the treatment of t(4;14) translocation positive multiple myeloma.
In one embodiment the compounds may be useful for the treatment of sarcoma. In one embodiment the compounds may be useful for the treatment of lung cancer, e.g. squamous cell carcinoma.
As the compounds have activity against FGFR2 they will be useful in the treatment of endometrial, ovarian, gastric, hepatocellular, uterine, cervix and colorectal cancers.
FGFR2 is also pressed in epithelial ovarian cancer, therefore the compounds of the invention may be specifically useful in treating ovarian cancer such as epithelial ovarian cancer.
In one embodiment, the compounds may be useful for the treatment of lung cancer, in particular NSCLC, squamous cell carcinoma, liver cancer, kidney cancer, breast cancer, colon cancer, colorectal cancer, prostate cancer.
In one embodiment, the compounds may be useful for the treatment of prostate cancer, bladder , lung cancer such as NSCLC, breast cancer, gastric cancer,and liver cancer (HCC (hepatocellular cancer)).
Compounds of the ion may also be useful in the treatment of tumours pre-treated with VEGFR2 tor or VEGFR2 antibody (e.g. Avastin).
In particular the compounds of the invention may be useful in the treatment of VEGFR2- resistant tumours. VEGFR2 inhibitors and antibodies are used in the treatment of thyroid and renal cell carcinomas, therefore the nds of the invention may be useful in the ent of VEGFR2-resistant thyroid and renal cell carcinomas.
The cancers may be cancers which are sensitive to inhibition of any one or more FGFRs selected from FGFR1, FGFR2, FGFR3, FGFR4, for example, one or more FGFRs selected from FGFR1, FGFR2 or FGFR3.
Whether or not a particular cancer is one which is sensitive to inhibition of FGFR or VEGFR signalling may be determined by means of a cell growth assay as set out below or by a method as set out in the section headed “Methods of Diagnosis”.
The compounds of the invention, and in particular those nds having FGFR, or VEGFR inhibitory activity, may be ularly useful in the treatment or prevention of cancers of a type associated with or characterised by the presence of elevated levels of FGFR, or VEGFR, for example the cancers referred to in this t in the introductory section of this ation.
The compounds of the present invention may be useful for the treatment of the adult population. The compounds of the t invention may be useful for the treatment of the pediatric population.
It has been ered that some FGFR inhibitors can be used in combination with other anticancer agents. For example, it may be beneficial to e an inhibitor that induces apoptosis with another agent which acts via a different mechanism to regulate cell growth thus treating two of the characteristic features of cancer development.
Examples of such combinations are set out below.
The compounds of the invention may be useful in ng other conditions which result from disorders in proliferation such as type II or non-insulin dependent diabetes mellitus, autoimmune diseases, head , stroke, epilepsy, neurodegenerative diseases such as Alzheimer’s, motor neurone disease, ssive supranuclear palsy, corticobasal degeneration and Pick’s disease for example autoimmune diseases and neurodegenerative es.
One sub—group of disease states and conditions that the compounds of the invention wound may be useful consists of inflammatory diseases, cardiovascular diseases and FGFR, and VEGFR are also known to play a role in apoptosis, angiogenesis, proliferation, differentiation and transcription and therefore the compounds of the invention could also be useful in the treatment of the following diseases other than cancer; chronic inflammatory diseases, for example systemic lupus erythematosus, autoimmune mediated glomerulonephritis, toid arthritis, psoriasis, inflammatory bowel disease, mune diabetes mellitus, Eczema hypersensitivity reactions, asthma, COPD, rhinitis, and upper atory tract disease; cardiovascular diseases for example cardiac hypertrophy, restenosis, atherosclerosis; neurodegenerative disorders, for example Alzheimer’s disease, AIDS-related dementia, Parkinson’s disease, amyotropic lateral sclerosis, retinitis pigmentosa, spinal muscular atropy and cerebellar degeneration; glomerulonephritis; myelodysplastic syndromes, ischemic injury associated myocardial infarctions, stroke and reperfusion injury, arrhythmia, atherosclerosis, toxin-induced or alcohol related liver es, haematological es, for example, chronic anemia and aplastic anemia; degenerative es of the musculoskeletal system, for example, osteoporosis and arthritis, aspirin—sensitive inusitis, cystic fibrosis, multiple sclerosis, kidney diseases and cancer pain. ln addition, mutations of FGFR2 are associated with several severe abnormalities in human skeletal development and thus the compounds of invention could be useful in the treatment of abnormalities in human skeletal development, including abnormal ossification of cranial sutures (craniosynostosis), Apert (AP) syndrome, Crouzon syndrome, Jackson-Weiss syndrome, Beare-Stevenson cutis gyrate syndrome, and Pfeiffer syndrome.
The compound of the invention, having FGFR such as FGFR2 or FGFR3 inhibitory activity, may be particularly useful in the treatment or prevention of the skeletal diseases. Particular skeletal diseases are achondroplasia or thanatophoric sm (also known as thanatophoric dysplasia).
The nd of the invention, having FGFR such as FGFR1, FGFR2 or FGFR3 inhibitory activity, may be ularly useful in the treatment or prevention in pathologies in which progressive fibrosis is a symptom. Fibrotic conditions in which the compounds of the inventions may be useful in the treatment of include diseases exhibiting abnormal or excessive deposition of fibrous tissue for example in liver cirrhosis, glomerulonephritis, pulmonary fibrosis, systemic fibrosis, rheumatoid arthritis, as well as the natural process of wound healing. In particular the compounds of the inventions may also be useful in the treatment of lung fibrosis in particular in idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis.
The xpression and activation of FGFR and VEGFR in tumor— ated vasculature has also ted a role for compounds of the invention in preventing and disrupting initiation of tumor enesis. In ular the compounds of the invention may be useful in the treatment of cancer, metastasis, leukemia’s such as CLL, ocular diseases such as age-related r degeneration in particular wet form of age-related macular ration, ischemic erative retinopathies such as retinopathy of prematurity (ROP) and diabetic retinopathy, rheumatoid arthritis and hemangioma.
The activity of the compounds of the invention as tors of 4, VEGFR and/or PDGFR A/B can be measured using the assays set forth in the examples below and the level of activity exhibited by a given compound can be defined in terms of the lC5o value.
Preferred compounds of the present invention are compounds having an leo value of less than 1|JM, more preferably less than 0.1 uM.
The invention es compounds that have FGFR inhibiting or modulating activity, and which may be useful in preventing or treating disease states or ions mediated by FGFR kinases. in one embodiment, there is provided a compound as defined herein for use in therapy, for use as a ne. in a further embodiment, there is provided a compound as defined herein for use in the prophylaxis or treatment, in particular in the treatment, of a disease state or condition ed by a FGFR kinase.
Thus, for example, the compounds of the invention may be useful in alleviating or reducing the incidence of cancer. Therefore, in a further embodiment, there is provided a compound as defined herein for use in the prophylaxis or treatment, in particular the treatment, of cancer. In one embodiment, the compound as defined herein is for use in the prophylaxis or treatment of FGFR-dependent cancer. In one embodiment, the compound as defined herein is for use in the laxis or treatment of cancer mediated by FGFR kinases.
Accordingly, the invention provides inter alia: — A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of a disease state or condition mediated by a FGFR kinase, which method comprises administering to a subject in need thereof a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein.
— A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of a disease state or condition as described herein, which method comprises administering to a subject in need thereof a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein.
— A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer, which method ses administering to a subject in need thereof a compound of the formula (I) as defined .
— A method for alleviating or reducing the incidence of a disease state or condition mediated by a FGFR kinase, which method comprises stering to a subject in need thereof a nd of the formula (I) as d herein.
— A method of inhibiting a FGFR , which method comprises contacting the kinase with a kinase-inhibiting compound of the formula (I) as defined herein.
A method of modulating a cellular s (for e cell division) by inhibiting the activity of a FGFR kinase using a compound of the formula (I) as defined A compound of a (I) as defined herein for use as a tor of a cellular process (for example cell division) by inhibiting the activity of a FGFR kinase.
A compound of formula (I) as defined herein for use in the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer, in particular the treatment of cancer.
A compound of formula (I) as defined herein for use as a modulator (e.g. inhibitor) of FGFR.
The use of a compound of formula (I) as defined herein for the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of a disease state or condition mediated by a FGFR kinase, the compound having the formula (I) as defined herein.
The use of a compound of formula (I) as d herein for the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of a disease state or condition as described herein.
The use of a compound of formula (I) as d herein for the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment, in particular the treatment, of cancen The use of a compound of formula (I) as defined herein for the manufacture of a medicament for modulating (e.g. inhibiting) the activity of FGFR.
Use of a compound of formula (I) as defined herein in the manufacture of a medicament for modulating a ar process (for example cell division) by inhibiting the activity of a FGFR kinase.
The use of a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein for the manufacture of a medicament for prophylaxis or treatment of a disease or ion characterised by up-regulation of a FGFR kinase (e.g. FGFR1 or FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4).
The use of a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein for the cture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of a cancer, the cancer being one which is characterised by up-regulation of a FGFR kinase (e.g. FGFR1 or FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4).
— The use of a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein for the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer in a patient selected from a sub-population possessing a genetic aberrations of FGFR3 kinase.
—- The use of a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein for the cture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer in a patient who has been sed as forming part of a sub-population possessing a genetic aberrations of FGFR3 .
— A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of a disease or condition characterised by up-regulation of a FGFR kinase (e.g. FGFR1 or FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4), the method comprising administering a nd of the formula (I) as defined herein.
— A method for alleviating or reducing the incidence of a e or condition characterised by up-regulation of a FGFR kinase (e.g. FGFR1 or FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4), the method comprising administering a nd of the formula (I) as d herein.
— A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of (or alleviating or reducing the incidence of) cancer in a patient suffering from or suspected of suffering from cancer; which method comprises (i) subjecting a patient to a diagnostic test to determine whether the patient possesses a genetic aberrations of FGFR3 gene; and (ii) where the patient does possess the said variant, thereafter stering to the patient a nd of the formula (I) as defined herein having FGFR3 kinase inhibiting activity.
— A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of (or alleviating or reducing the incidence of) a disease state or condition characterised by up-regulation of an FGFR kinase (e.g. FGFR1 or FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4); which method comprises (i) subjecting a patient to a diagnostic test to detect a marker characteristic of up-regulation of a FGFR kinase (e.g. FGFR1 or FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4) and (ii) where the diagnostic test is indicative of ulation of a FGFR kinase, thereafter administering to the patient a compound of the a (I) as defined herein having FGFR kinase inhibiting activity.
In one embodiment, the disease mediated by FGFR kinases is a oncology related disease (e.g. cancer). In one embodiment, the disease mediated by FGFR kinases is a non-oncology related disease (e.g. any disease disclosed herein ing cancer). In one embodiment the disease mediated by FGFR kinases is a condition described herein. in one embodiment the disease mediated by FGFR kinases is a skeletal condition described . ular alities in human skeletal development, include abnormal ossification of cranial sutures (craniosynostosis), Apert (AP) syndrome, Crouzon syndrome, Jackson-Weiss syndrome, Bears-Stevenson cutis gyrate syndrome, Pfeiffer syndrome, achondroplasia and thanatophoric sm (also known as thanatophoric sia).
Mutated Kinases Drug resistant kinase mutations can arise in patient populations treated with kinase inhibitors. These occur, in part, in the regions of the protein that bind to or ct with the particular inhibitor used in therapy. Such mutations reduce or increase the capacity of the inhibitor to bind to and inhibit the kinase in on. This can occur at any of the amino acid residues which interact with the inhibitor or are important for supporting the binding of said inhibitor to the target. An inhibitor that binds to a target kinase without requiring the interaction with the mutated amino acid residue will likely be unaffected by the mutation and will remain an effective inhibitor of the enzyme.
A study in gastric cancer patient samples showed the presence of two mutations in FGFR2, Ser167Pro in exon llla and a splice site on 940-2A—G in exon lllc. These ons are identical to the germline activating mutations that cause craniosynotosis syndromes and were observed in 13% of primary gastric cancer tissues studied. in addition activating mutations in FGFRS were observed in 5% of the patient samples tested and overexpression of FGFRs has been correlated with a poor prognosis in this patient group.
In addition there are chromosomal translocations or point mutations that have been observed in FGFR which give rise to f—function, over-expressed, or constitutively active biological states.
The compounds of the invention would ore find particular application in relation to cancers which express a mutated molecular target such as FGFR. Diagnosis of tumours with such mutations could be med using ques known to a person skilled in the art and as described herein such as RTPCR and FISH.
It has been suggested that mutations of a conserved threonine residue at the ATP binding site of FGFR would result in inhibitor resistance. The amino acid valine 561 has been mutated to a methionine in FGFR1 which corresponds to usly reported mutations found in Abl (T315) and EGFR (T766) that have been shown to confer resistance to ive inhibitors. Assay data for FGFR1 V561 M showed that this mutation conferred resistance to a ne kinase inhibitor compared to that of the wild type.
Methods of Diagnosis Prior to administration of a compound of the formula (l), a patient may be screened to determine whether a disease or condition from which the patient is or may be suffering is one which would be susceptible to treatment with a compound having activity against FGFR, and/or VEGFR.
For example, a biological sample taken from a t may be analysed to determine whether a condition or disease, such as cancer, that the patient is or may be suffering from is one which is characterised by a genetic abnormality or al protein expression which leads to up—regulation of the levels or activity of FGFR, and/or VEGFR or to sensitisation of a pathway to normal FGFR, and/or VEGFR activity, or to upregulation of these growth factor signalling ys such as growth factor ligand levels or growth factor ligand activity or to lation of a mical y downstream of FGFR, and/or VEGFR activation.
Examples of such abnormalities that result in activation or sensitisation of the FGFR, and/or VEGFR signal include loss of, or inhibition of apoptotic pathways, up-regulation of the receptors or ligands, or presence of mutant variants of the receptors or ligands e.g PTK ts. Tumours with mutants of FGFR1, FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4 or up- regulation, in particular over-expression of FGFR1, or gain-of—function mutants of FGFR2 or FGFR3 may be particularly sensitive to FGFR inhibitors.
For example, point mutations engendering gain-of-function in FGFR2 have been identified in a number of conditions. In particular activating ons in FGFR2 have been identified in 10% of endometrial tumours.
In addition, genetic aberrations of the FGFR3 or tyrosine kinase such as chromosomal translocations or point mutations resulting in ectopically expressed or deregulated, constitutively , FGFR3 receptors have been identified and are linked to a subset of multiple myelomas, bladder and cervical carcinomas. A particular mutation T674l of the PDGF receptor has been identified in imatinib-treated patients. in addition, a gene amplification of 8p12—p1 1.2 was demonstrated in ~50% of lobular breast cancer (CLC) cases and this was shown to be linked with an increased expression of FGFR1. Preliminary studies with siRNA directed against FGFR1, or a small molecule inhibitor of the receptor, showed cell lines harbouring this amplification to be particularly sensitive to inhibition of this signalling pathway.
Alternatively, a biological sample taken from a t may be analysed for loss of a negative regulator or suppressor of FGFR or VEGFR. in the present t, the term “loss” embraces the deletion of a gene encoding the tor or suppressor, the truncation of the gene (for example by mutation), the truncation of the transcribed product of the gene, or the vation of the transcribed product (e.g. by point mutation) or sequestration by another gene t.
The term up-regulation es elevated expression or over-expression, including gene amplification (i.e. multiple gene copies) and increased expression by a transcriptional effect, and hyperactivity and activation, including activation by mutations. Thus, the patient may be subjected to a diagnostic test to detect a marker characteristic of up- regulation of FGFR, and/or VEGFR. The term diagnosis includes screening. By marker we include genetic s including, for example, the measurement of DNA composition to identify mutations of FGFR, and/or VEGFR. The term marker also includes markers which are characteristic of up regulation of FGFR and/or VEGFR, including enzyme activity, enzyme levels, enzyme state (eg. phosphorylated or not) and mRNA levels of the entioned proteins.
The diagnostic tests and screens are typically ted on a biological sample selected from tumour biopsy samples, blood samples tion and enrichment of shed tumour cells), stool biopsies, sputum, some analysis, pleural fluid, peritoneal fluid, buccal spears, biopsy or urine.
WO 61080 2012/052672 Methods of identification and analysis of mutations and up-regulation of proteins are known to a person skilled in the art. Screening methods could include, but are not limited to, standard methods such as reverse-transcriptase polymerase chain reaction (RT~PCR) or in-situ hybridization such as scence in situ hybridization (FISH).
Identification of an individual carrying a mutation in FGFR, and /or VEGFR may mean that the patient would be particularly suitable for treatment with a FGFR, and /or VEGFR inhibitor. s may preferentially be screened for presence of a FGFR, and /or VEGFR variant prior to treatment. The screening process will typically involve direct cing, oligonucleotide microarray analysis, or a mutant specific antibody. In addition, diagnosis of tumours with such mutations could be performed using techniques known to a person skilled in the art and as described herein such as RT-PCR and FISH.
In on, mutant forms of, for example FGFR or VEGFR2, can be identified by direct sequencing of, for example, tumour biopsies using PCR and s to sequence PCR products directly as hereinbefore described. The skilled artisan will recognize that all such well-known techniques for detection of the over expression, activation or mutations of the aforementioned proteins could be applicable in the present case.
In screening by RT-PCR, the level of mRNA in the tumour is assessed by creating a cDNA copy of the mRNA followed by amplification of the cDNA by PCR. Methods of PCR amplification, the selection of primers, and conditions for amplification, are known to a person skilled in the art. Nucleic acid manipulations and PCR are carried out by standard methods, as described for example in Ausubel, PM et al., eds. (2004) Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons Inc., or Innis, MA. et al., eds. (1990) PCR Protocols: a guide to s and applications, Academic Press, San Diego. Reactions and lations ing c acid techniques are also described in Sambrook et al., (2001 ), 3rd Ed, Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor tory Press. Alternatively a commercially available kit for RT- PCR (for example Roche Molecular Biochemicals) may be used, or methodology as set forth in United States patents 4,666,828; 4,683,202; 531; 5,192,659, 5,272,057, ,882,864, and 6,218,529 and incorporated herein by reference. An example of an in- situ hybridisation technique for assessing mRNA sion would be fluorescence in- situ hybridisation (FISH) (see Angerer (1987) Meth. Enzymol., 152: 649).
Generally, in situ hybridization comprises the following major steps: (1) fixation of tissue to be analyzed; (2) prehybridization treatment of the sample to increase accessibility of target nucleic acid, and to reduce nonspecific binding; (3) hybridization of the mixture of nucleic acids to the c acid in the ical structure or tissue; (4) post- hybridization washes to remove nucleic acid fragments not bound in the ization, and (5) ion of the hybridized nucleic acid nts. The probes used in such applications are lly labelled, for example, with radioisotopes or fluorescent reporters. Preferred probes are sufficiently long, for e, from about 50, 100, or 200 nucleotides to about 1000 or more nucleotides, to enable specific hybridization with the target nucleic acid(s) under stringent conditions. Standard methods for carrying out FlSH are described in Ausubel, PM et al., eds. (2004) Current Protocols in Molecular y, John Wiley & Sons Inc and Fluorescence In Situ Hybridization: Technical Overview by John M. S. Bartlett in Molecular Diagnosis of Cancer, Methods and Protocols, 2nd ed.; lSBN: 1-59259—760-2; March 2004, pps. 8; : Methods in Molecular Medicine.
Methods for gene expression profiling are described by (DePrimo et al. (2003), BMC Cancer, 3:3). Briefly, the protocol is as s: double-stranded cDNA is synthesized from total RNA Using a (dT)24 oligomer for priming first-strand cDNA synthesis, ed by second strand cDNA synthesis with random hexamer primers. The double-stranded cDNA is used as a template for in vitro transcription of cRNA using biotinylated ribonucleotides. cRNA is chemically fragmented according to protocols described by Affymetrix (Santa Clara, CA, USA), and then hybridized overnight on Human Genome Arrays. atively, the protein products expressed from the mRNAs may be assayed by immunohistochemistry of tumour samples, solid phase immunoassay with microtitre plates, n blotting, 2-dimensional SDS-polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis, ELISA, flow cytometry and other methods known in the art for detection of specific proteins.
Detection methods would include the use of site specific antibodies. The skilled person will recognize that all such well-known techniques for detection of upregulation of FGFR, and/or VEGFR, or detection of FGFR, and/or VEGFR variants or mutants could be applicable in the present case.
Abnormal levels of proteins such as FGFR or VEGFR can be measured using standard enzyme assays, for example, those assays bed herein. Activation or overexpression could also be detected in a tissue sample, for e, a tumour tissue.
By measuring the tyrosine kinase activity with an assay such as that from Chemicon International. The tyrosine kinase of interest would be immunoprecipitated from the sample lysate and its activity measured.
Alternative methods for the ement of the over sion or activation of FGFR or VEGFR including the ms thereof, include the measurement of essel density. This can for example be measured using methods described by Orre and Rogers (Int J Cancer (1999), 84(2) . Assay methods also include the use of markers, for example, in the case of VEGFR these include CD31, CD34 and CD105.
Therefore all of these techniques could also be used to identify tumours particularly suitable for treatment with the compounds of the invention.
The compounds of the ion are particular useful in treatment of a patient having a mutated FGFR. The G697C mutation in FGFR3 is observed in 62% of oral squamous cell carcmonas and causes constitutive activation of the kinase activity. Activating mutations of FGFR3 have also been identified in bladder carcinoma cases. These ons were of 6 kinds with varying degrees of prevelence: R2480, 8249C, G372C, S373C, Y375C, K6520. in addition, a Gly388Arg polymorphism in FGFR4 has been found to be associated with increased incidence and aggressiveness of prostate, colon, lung, liver (HCC) and breast cancer.
Therefore in a further aspect the invention includes use of a compound according to the invention for the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment or prophylaxis of a disease state or condition in a t who has been screened and has been determined as ing from, or being at risk of suffering from, a disease or condition which would be susceptible to treatment with a compound having activity against FGFR.
Particular mutations a patient is screened for include G697C, R2480, 8249C, G372C, S3730, Y375C, K6520 mutations in FGFR3 and Gly388Arg polymorphism in FGFR4.
In another aspect the ion includes a compound of the invention for use in the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer in a patient selected from a sub-population possessing a t of the FGFR gene (for example G697C mutation in FGFR3 and Gly388Arg polymorphism in FGFR4).
MRI determination of vessel normalization (e.g. using MRI gradient echo, spin echo, and contrast enhancement to measure blood volume, relative vessel size, and vascular permeability) in combination with ating biomarkers (circulating progenitor cells (CPCs), CECs, SDF1, and FGF2) may also be used to identify VEGFRZ-resistant tumours for treatment with a compound of the invention.
Pharmaceutical Compositions and,Combinations In view of their useful pharmacological properties, the t compounds may be formulated into various pharmaceutical forms for administration es.
In one embodiment the pharmaceutical composition (e.g. formulation) comprises at least one active compound of the invention together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, adjuvants, excipients, diluents, fillers, buffers, stabilisers, preservatives, lubricants, or other materials well known to those skilled in the art and ally other therapeutic or prophylactic agents.
To prepare the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention, an effective amount of a nd of the present invention, as the active ingredient is combined in intimate admixture with a pharmaceutically able carrier, which carrier may take a wide y of forms depending on the form of preparation desired for administration. The pharmaceutical compositions can be in any form suitable for oral, parenteral, topical, intranasal, ophthalmic, otic, rectal, intra—vaginal, or transdermal administration. These pharmaceutical compositions are desirably in unitary dosage form suitable, preferably, for administration , ly, percutaneously, or by parenteral injection. For example, in preparing the compositions in oral dosage form, any of the usual pharmaceutical media may be employed, such as, for example, water, glycols, oils, alcohols and the like in the case of oral liquid preparations such as sions, syrups, elixirs and ons; or solid carriers such as es, sugars, kaolin, lubricants, binders, disintegrating agents and the like in the case of powders, pills, capsules and tablets.
Because of their ease in administration, tablets and capsules ent the most advantageous oral dosage unit form, in which case solid pharmaceutical carriers are obviously employed. For parenteral compositions, the carrier will usually se sterile water, at least in large part, though other ingredients, to aid solubility for example, may be included. lnjectable solutions, for e, may be prepared in which the carrier comprises saline solution, glucose solution or a mixture of saline and glucose solution. lnjectable suspensions may also be prepared in which case appropriate liquid carriers, ding agents and the like may be employed. In the compositions suitable for percutaneous administration, the carrier optionally comprises a penetration enhancing agent and/or a suitable g agent, optionally combined with suitable additives of any nature in minor proportions, which additives do not cause a significant deleterious effect to the skin. Said additives may facilitate the administration to the skin and/or may be helpful for preparing the desired itions. These compositions may be administered in various ways, e.g., as a transdermal patch, as a spot-on, as an ointment. it is especially advantageous to formulate the aforementioned pharmaceutical compositions in dosage unit form for ease of administration and uniformity of .
Dosage unit form as used in the specification and claims herein refers to physically discrete units suitable as y dosages, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active ingredient calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier. Examples of such dosage unit forms are tablets (including scored or coated tablets), capsules, pills, powder s, wafers, injectable solutions or suspensions, teaspoonfuls, tablespoonfuls and the like, and segregated multiples thereof.
It is especially advantageous to formulate the aforementioned pharmaceutical itions in dosage unit form for ease of administration and mity of .
Dosage unit form as used in the specification and claims herein refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosages, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active ingredient, calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect, in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier. Examples of such dosage unit forms are tablets (including scored or coated tablets), capsules, pills, powder packets, wafers, injectable solutions or suspensions, teaspoonfuls, tablespoonfuls and the like, and segregated multiples f.
The compound of the invention is administered in an amount ient to exert its anti- tumour activity.
Those skilled in the art could easily determine the effective amount from the test results presented hereinafter. In general it is plated that a therapeutically effective amount would be from 0.005 mg/kg to 100 mg/kg body weight, and in particular from 0.005 mg/kg to 10 mg/kg body weight. it may be appropriate to ster the required dose as single, two, three, four or more sub-doses at appropriate intervals throughout the day. Said sub—doses may be formulated as unit dosage forms, for example, containing 0.5 to 500 mg, in ular 1 mg to 500 mg, more in particular 10 mg to 500 mg of active ingredient per unit dosage form.
Depending on the mode of administration, the pharmaceutical composition will preferably se from 0.05 to 99 % by weight, more preferably from 0.1 to 70 °/o by weight, even more preferably from 0.1 to 50 % by weight of the compound of the present invention, and, from 1 to 99.95 % by weight, more preferably from 30 to 99.9 % by weight, even more preferably from 50 to 99.9 % by weight of a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, all percentages being based on the total weight of the ition.
As another aspect of the present invention, a combination of a compound of the present ion with r anticancer agent is envisaged, especially for use as a medicine, more specifically for use in the treatment of cancer or related diseases.
For the treatment of the above conditions, the compounds of the invention may be advantageously employed in combination with one or more other medicinal agents, more particularly, with other anti-cancer agents or adjuvants in cancer therapy. es of anti-cancer agents or adjuvants (supporting agents in the therapy) include but are not limited to: - platinum nation compounds for example cisplatin optionally combined with amifostine, carboplatin or oxaliplatin; WO 61080 - taxane compounds for example paclitaxel, paclitaxel protein bound particles (AbraxaneTM) or docetaxel; - omerase I inhibitors such as camptothecin compounds for example ecan, SN-38, topotecan, topotecan hcl; - topoisomerase II inhibitors such as anti-tumour epipodophyllotoxins or podophyllotoxin derivatives for example etoposide, etoposide phosphate or teniposide; - anti-tumour vinca alkaloids for example vinblastine, vincristine or vinorelbine; — anti-tumour nucleoside derivatives for example 5-fluorouracil, leucovorin, gemcitabine, gemcitabine hcl, capecitabine, cladribine, fludarabine, nelarabine; - alkylating agents such as nitrogen mustard or nitrosourea for example cyclophosphamide, chlorambucil, carmustine, pa, mephalan (melphalan), ine, altretamine, busulfan, dacarbazine, estramustine, ifosfamide optionally in combination with mesna, pipobroman, procarbazine, streptozocin, telozolomide, uracil; - anti-tumour anthracycline derivatives for example daunorubicin, doxorubicin optionally in combination with oxane, doxil, idarubicin, mitoxantrone, epirubicin, icin hcl, valrubicin; - molecules that target the lGF-1 receptor for example odophilin; — tetracarcin derivatives for example tetrocarcin A; — glucocortico'iden for example prednisone; ~ antibodies for example trastuzumab (HER2 antibody), rituximab (CD20 antibody), gemtuzumab, gemtuzumab ozogamicin, cetuximab, pertuzumab, zumab, alemtuzumab, umab, ibritumomab an, nofetumomab, panitumumab, tositumomab, CNTO 328; — estrogen or antagonists or selective estrogen receptor modulators or inhibitors of estrogen synthesis for e tamoxifen, fulvestrant, toremifene, droloxifene, ex, raloxifene or letrozole; — aromatase tors such as exemestane, anastrozole, letrazole, testolactone and vorozole; - differentiating agents such as retinoids, vitamin D or retinoic acid and retinoic acid metabolism blocking agents (RAMBA) for example accutane; — DNA methyl transferase inhibitors for example azacytidine or decitabine; - antifolates for example premetrexed disodium; - antibiotics for example antinomycin D, bleomycin, mitomycin C, omycin, carminomycin, daunomycin, sole, plicamycin, mithramycin; - antimetabolites for example clofarabine, aminopterin, cytosine arabinoside or methotrexate, azacitidine. bine, fioxuridine, pentostatin, thioguanine; - apoptosis inducing agents and antiangiogenic agents such as Bel-2 tors for example YC 137, BH 312, ABT 737, gossypol, HA 14—1, TW 37 or decanoic acid; - tubuline-binding agents for example combrestatin, colchicines or nocodazole; - kinase tors (e.g. EGFR (epithelial growth factor receptor) inhibitors, MTKl (multi target kinase inhibitors), mTOR inhibitors) for e eridol, imatinib mesylate, erlotinib, gefitinib, dasatinib, lapatinib, lapatinib ditosylate, sorafenib, sunitinib, sunitinib maleate, olimus; - farnesyltransferase tors for example tipifarnib; — histone deacetylase (HDAC) inhibitors for example sodium butyrate, suberoylanilide hydroxamide acid (SAHA), depsipeptide (FR 901228), NVP- LA0824, R306465, JNJ-26481585, trichostatin A, stat; - Inhibitors of the ubiquitin-proteasome pathway for example , MLN .41 or bortezomib; - Yondelis; — Telomerase inhibitors for example telomestatin; - Matrix metalloproteinase inhibitors for example batimastat, marimastat, prinostat or at.
- Recombinant eukins for example aldesleukin, denileukin diftitox, interferon alfa 2a, interferon alfa 2b, peginterferon alfa 2b - MAPK inhibitors - Retinoids for example alitretinoin, bexarotene, tretinoin - Arsenic trioxide - Asparaginase - Steroids for example dromostanolone propionate, megestrol acetate, nandrolone oate, phenpropionate), dexamethasone — Gonadotropin releasing hormone agonists or antagonists for example abarelix, goserelin acetate, histrelin acetate, leuprolide acetate - Thalidomide, lenalidomide - Mercaptopurine, mitotane, pamidronate, pegademase, pegaspargase, rasburicase - BH3 cs for e ABT-737 - MEK inhibitors for e PD98059, AZD6244, Cl-104O — colony-stimulating factor analogs for example filgrastim, pegfilgrastim, sargramostim; erythropoietin or analogues thereof (e.g. darbepoetin alfa); interleukin 11; oprelvekin; zoledronate, zoledronic acid; fentanyl; bisphosphonate; palifermin. - a steroidal cytochrome P450 17alpha-hydroxylase-17,20-lyase inhibitor (CYP17), e.g. abiraterone, erone acetate.
The compounds of the present invention also have therapeutic applications in sensitising tumour cells for radiotherapy and chemotherapy.
Hence the compounds of the present invention can be used as "radiosensitizer" and/or sensitizer” or can be given in combination with another "radiosensitizer" and/or “chemosensitizer”.
The term "radiosensitizer", as used herein, is defined as a molecule, ably a low molecular weight molecule, stered to animals in therapeutically effective s to increase the sensitivity of the cells to ionizing radiation and/or to promote the treatment of es which are treatable with ionizing radiation.
The term “chemosensitizer”, as used herein, is defined as a molecule, ably a low molecular weight molecule, administered to animals in therapeutically ive amounts to increase the sensitivity of cells to chemotherapy and/or promote the treatment of diseases which are treatable with chemotherapeutics.
Several mechanisms for the mode of action of ensitizers have been suggested in the literature including: hypoxic cell radiosensitizers ( e.g., 2- nitroimidazole compounds, and benzotriazine dioxide compounds) mimicking oxygen or alternatively behave like bioreductive agents under hypoxia; non-hypoxic cell radiosensitizers (e.g., halogenated pyrimidines) can be analogoues of DNA bases and preferentially incorporate into the DNA of cancer cells and thereby promote the radiation—induced breaking of DNA molecules and/or prevent the normal DNA repair mechanisms; and various other WO 61080 potential mechanisms of action have been hypothesized for radiosensitizers in the treatment of disease.
Many cancer ent protocols currently employ radiosensitizers in conjunction with radiation of x-rays. Examples of x-ray activated radiosensitizers include, but are not limited to, the following: metronidazole, misonidazole, desmethylmisonidazole, pimonidazole, etanidazole, nimorazole, mitomycin C, RSU 1069, SR 4233, E09, RB 6145, nicotinamide, odeoxyuridine (BUdR), 5- iododeoxyuridine (lUdR), bromodeoxycytidine, fluorodeoxyuridine (FudR), hydroxyurea, cisplatin, and therapeutically effective analogs and derivatives of the same.
Photodynamic therapy (PDT) of cancers s visible light as the radiation activator of the sensitizing agent. Examples of photodynamic radiosensitizers include the following, but are not d to: hematoporphyrin derivatives, rin, benzoporphyrin derivatives, tin etioporphyrin, pheoborbide-a, bacteriochlorophyll-a, naphthalocyanines, phthalocyanines, zinc phthalocyanine, and therapeutically effective analogs and derivatives of the same.
Radiosensitizers may be administered in conjunction with a therapeutically effective amount of one or more other compounds, including but not limited to: compounds which promote the incorporation of radiosensitizers to the target cells; compounds which control the flow of therapeutics, nutrients, and/or oxygen to the target cells; chemotherapeutic agents which act on the tumour with or without additional ion; or other therapeutically effective nds for treating cancer or other diseases.
Chemosensitizers may be administered in conjunction with a eutically effective amount of one or more other compounds, including but not limited to: nds which promote the incorporation of chemosensitizers to the target cells; compounds which control the flow of eutics, nts, and/or oxygen to the target cells; chemotherapeutic agents which act on the tumour or other therapeutically effective compounds for treating cancer or other disease. Calcium antagonists, for example verapamil, are found useful in combination with antineoplastic agents to establish chemosensitivity in tumor cells resistant to accepted chemotherapeutic agents and to potentiate the efficacy of such compounds in drug—sensitive malignancies. in view of their useful cological properties, the components of the combinations according to the invention, i.e. the one or more other medicinal agent and the compound according to the present invention may be formulated into various pharmaceutical forms for administration es. The components may be formulated separately in individual pharmaceutical compositions or in a unitary pharmaceutical composition containing all ents.
The present invention therefore also relates to a pharmaceutical composition comprising the one or more other medicinal agent and the compound according to the t invention together with a pharmaceutical r.
The present invention further relates to the use of a combination according to the invention in the manufacture of a pharmaceutical composition for inhibiting the growth of tumour cells.
The present invention further relates to a product containing as first active ingredient a compound ing to the invention and as further active ingredient one or more anticancer agent, as a combined preparation for simultaneous, separate or sequential use in the treatment of patients suffering from .
The one or more other nal agents and the nd according to the present invention may be administered simultaneously (9.9. in separate or unitary compositions) or sequentially in either order. In the latter case, the two or more compounds will be administered within a period and in an amount and manner that is sufficient to ensure that an advantageous or synergistic effect is achieved. It will be appreciated that the preferred method and order of administration and the respective dosage amounts and regimes for each component of the combination will depend on the particular other nal agent and compound of the present invention being administered, their route of administration, the particular tumour being treated and the particular host being treated. The optimum method and order of administration and the dosage amounts and regime can be y determined by those skilled in the art using conventional methods and in view of the ation set out herein.
The weight ratio of the compound ing to the present invention and the one or more other anticancer agent(s) when given as a combination may be determined by the person skilled in the art. Said ratio and the exact dosage and ncy of administration depends 0n the particular compound according to the invention and the WO 61080 other anticancer agent(s) used, the particular condition being treated, the severity of the condition being treated, the age, weight, gender, diet, time of administration and general al condition of the particular patient, the mode of administration as well as other medication the individual may be taking, as is well known to those skilled in the art.
Furthermore, it is evident that the effective daily amount may be lowered or sed depending on the response of the treated subject and/or depending on the evaluation of the physician ibing the compounds of the instant invention. A particular weight ratio for the present compound of formula (l) and another anticancer agent may range from 1/10 to 10/1, more in particular from 1/5 to 5/1, even more in particular from 1/3 to 3/1.
The platinum coordination compound is advantageously administered in a dosage of 1 to 500mg per square meter (mg/m2) of body surface area, for example 50 to 400 mg/mz, ularly for cisplatin in a dosage of about 75 mg/m2 and for carboplatin in about 300mg/m2 per course of treatment.
The taxane nd is advantageously administered in a dosage of 50 to 400 mg per square meter (mg/m2) of body surface area, for example 75 to 250 mg/mz, particularly for paclitaxel in a dosage of about 175 to 250 mg/m2 and for docetaxel in about 75 to 150 mg/m2 per course of treatment.
The camptothecin compound is advantageously administered in a dosage of 0.1 to 400 mg per square meter (mg/m2) of body surface area, for example 1 to 300 mg/mz, particularly for irinotecan in a dosage of about 100 to 350 mg/m2 and for topotecan in about 1 to 2 mg/m2 per course of ent.
The anti-tumour podophyllotoxin derivative is advantageously administered in a dosage of 30 to 300 mg per square meter (mg/m2) of body surface area, for e 50 to 250mg/m2, particularly for etoposide in a dosage of about 35 to 100 mg/m2 and for teniposide in about 50 to 250 mg/m2 per course of treatment.
The anti-tumour vinca id is advantageously stered in a dosage of 2 to mg per square meter (mg/m2) of body surface area, particularly for vinblastine in a WO 61080 2012/052672 dosage of about 3 to 12 mg/m2 for vincristine in a dosage of about 1 to 2 mg/m2 and , , for vinorelbine in dosage of about 10 to 30 mg/m2 per course of treatment.
The anti—tumour nucleoside derivative is advantageously administered in a dosage of 200 to 2500 mg per square meter (mg/m2) of body surface area, for example 700 to 1500 mg/m2, particularly for 5—FU in a dosage of 200 to 500mg/m2, for abine in a dosage of about 800 to 1200 mg/m2 and for capecitabine in about 1000 to 2500 mg/m2 per course of treatment.
The alkylating agents such as nitrogen mustard or nitrosourea is advantageously administered in a dosage of 100 to 500 mg per square meter (mg/m2) of body surface area, for example 120 to 200 mg/mz, ularly for cyclophosphamide in a dosage of about 100 to 500 mg/m2 for chlorambucil in a dosage of about 0.1 to 0.2 mg/kg, for carmustine in a dosage of about 150 to 200 mg/m2 and for lomustine in a dosage of about 100 to 150 mg/m2 per course of ent.
The anti—tumour anthracycline tive is advantageously administered in a dosage of to 75 mg per square meter (mg/m2) of body surface area, for example 15 to 60 mg/m2, particularly for doxorubicin in a dosage of about 40 to 75 mg/m2, for daunorubicin in a dosage of about 25 to 45mg/m2 and for idarubicin in a dosage of about 10 to 15 mg/m2 per course of treatment.
The antiestrogen agent is advantageously administered in a dosage of about 1 to 100 mg daily depending on the particular agent and the ion being treated. Tamoxifen is advantageously administered orally in a dosage of 5 to 50 mg, preferably 10 to 20 mg twice a day, continuing the therapy for sufficient time to achieve and maintain a therapeutic effect. Toremifene is advantageously administered orally in a dosage of about 60mg once a day, continuing the therapy for sufficient time to achieve and maintain a therapeutic effect. Anastrozole is advantageously administered orally in a dosage of about 1mg once a day. Droloxifene is advantageously administered orally in a dosage of about 20-100mg once a day. Raloxifene is advantageously administered orally in a dosage of about 60mg once a day. tane is advantageously administered orally in a dosage of about 25mg once a day. 132.
Antibodies are advantageously administered in a dosage of about 1 to 5 mg per square meter (mg/m2) of body surface area, or as known in the art, if different. Trastuzumab is advantageously administered in a dosage of 1 to 5 mg per square meter (mg/m2) of body surface area, particularly 2 to 4mg/m2 per course of treatment.
These dosages may be administered for example once, twice or more per course of treatment, which may be repeated for example every 7, 14, 21 or 28 days.
The compounds of formula (I), the ceutically acceptable addition salts, in particular pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts, and stereoisomeric forms thereof can have valuable diagnostic properties in that they can be used for detecting or identifying the formation of a complex between a labelled compound and other molecules, peptides, proteins, s or receptors.
The detecting or identifying methods can use compounds that are labelled with labelling agents such as sotopes, enzymes, fluorescent substances, luminous substances, etc. Examples of the radioisotopes include 125I, 131i, 3H and 14C. Enzymes are y made detectable by conjugation of an appropriate substrate which, in turn catalyses a detectable reaction. Examples thereof include, for example, beta-galactosidase, beta- idase, alkaline phosphatase, peroxidase and malate dehydrogenase, preferably horseradish peroxidase. The luminous substances e, for example, luminol, l derivatives, luciferin, in and rase.
Biological samples can be defined as body tissue or body fluids. Examples of body fluids are cerebrospinai fluid, blood, plasma, serum, urine, sputum, saliva and the like.
General tic Routes The following es illustrate the present invention but are examples only and are not ed to limit the scope of the claims in any way.
Experimental Part Hereinafter, the term ‘CchN’or ‘ACN’ means acetonitrile, ‘DCM’ or ‘CHZCIZ’ means dichloromethane, ‘K2C03’ means potassium carbonate, ‘NaZCO3’ means sodium carbonate, ‘CSZCOg’ means cesium carbonate, ‘MgSO4’ means magnesium sulphate, ‘MeOH’ or ‘CHgOH’ means methanol, ‘EtOAc’ means ethyl acetate, ‘EtOH’ means ethanol, ‘Et3N’ means triethyiamine, ‘THF’ means tetrahydrofuran, ‘POCl3‘means phosphoric trichloride, ‘NH4Cl’ means ammonium chloride, ‘NaCl' means sodium chloride, ‘NaOH’ means sodium hydroxide, ‘KOH’ means potassium hydroxide, ‘DMF’ means N,N-dimethylformamide, ‘NaH’ means sodium hydride 60% in mineral oil, ‘NaHC03’ means sodium hydrogen carbonate, ‘TFA’ means trifluoroacetic acid, ‘DMAP’ means 4-dimethylaminopyridine, ‘NaBH4’ means sodium borohydride, ‘LiCl’ means lithium chloride, ‘Pd(PPh3)4’ or ‘tetrakis’ means tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium, ‘PdCl2(dppf).DCM’ means 1,1'—Bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene~palladium(|l)dichloride dichloromethane complex, ’ means ammonium hydroxide, ‘iPrOH’ means 2- propanol, ‘DiPE’ means diisopropylethyl ether, ‘COg’ means carbon dioxide, ‘EtZO’ means l ether, ‘HCl’ means hydrochloric acid, ‘BBrg’ means boron tribromide, ‘SiOz’ or ‘SiOH’ means silica, ‘Ng‘ means nitrogen, ‘LiAlH4’ means m aluminium hydride, ‘M.P.’ means melting point, ‘rt’ means room ature, ‘Bocgo’ means t— butyl onate, ‘HZO’ means water, ‘NH4HC03’ means ammonium bicarbonate, ‘DME’ means ethylene glycol dimethylether, ‘pH' means potential hydrogen, ‘nBuLi’ means n— butyllithium, ‘NMP’ means 1—methy|—2—pyrrolidinone, ‘CHCl3’ means chloroform, ‘SFC’ means ritical fluid chromatography, ‘Pd(PtBu3)2’ means bis(tri-tert-butylphosphine )palladium(0), ‘DIPEA’ means N,N-diisopropylethylamine, ‘DCE’ means 1,2- dichloroethane, ‘HOBT’ means 1-hydroxybenzotriazole, ‘EDCI means 1-Ethyl(3- dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide hloride, ’ means 2— Dicyclohexylphosphino—2',4’,6'—triisopropy|biphenyl, ‘Pd2(dba)3’ means Tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium and ‘DSC’ means differential scanning calorimetry.
Some compounds of the present invention were obtained as salt forms or hydrates or contain some amounts of solvent. Hereinafter, these compounds are reported as determined based on elemental analysis.
A. Preparation of the intermediates Example A1 N Br CIININH\I a) Preparation of intermediate 1 2 Under N2 flow, N-bromosuccinimide (121 g; 679 mmol) was added dropwise to a mixture of 6-chloro~2-pyrazinamine (88 g; 679 mmol) in CHCl3 (1000 ml) at 0°C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight then was poured out onto water and DCM was added. The organic layer was washed, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated. The residue was purified by tography over silica gel (mobile phase : 91% petroleum ether, 9% EtOAc). The pure fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated to afford 40 g (28 %) of intermediate 1.
N \ \ 0/ Cl N/ NH b) Preparation of intermediate 2 2 Under N2 flow, Pd(PtBu3)2 (3g; 5.9 mmol) was added to a mixture of intermediate 1 (41.6 g; 200 mmol), acrylic acid methyl ester (20.6 g; 240 mmol) in triethylamine (50 ml) and N,N-dimethylformamide (300 ml). The reaction mixture was stirred at reflux for 2 hours then was poured out onto water and EtOAc was added. The c layer was washed, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated. The residue was ed by chromatography over silica gel (mobile phase : 80% eum, 20% EtOAc). The pure fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated to afford 25 g (59 %) of intermediate 2.
Intermediate 2 was also prepared according to the following procedure : 2-Amino—3-bromo—6-chloropyrazine (212779-21—0) (39.78 g; 191 mmol) was diluted in dry dioxane (400 mL) and DiPEA (53.3 mL; 305 mmol). The solution was degassed with N2. Then, ibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium(0) (3.50 g; 3.82 mmol), trl—tert-butyl- phosphonium tetrafluoroborate (2.77 g; 9.54 mmol) and methyl acrylate (34.23 mL; 382 mmol) were added. The mixture was heated at 120°C for 5h30. The reaction mixture was cooled down to room temperature and a saturated aqueous solution of NaH003 and EtOAc were added. Then the e was decanted. The organic layer was dried over M9804, filtered and concentrated to dryness. The e was taken up with diisopropylether. The precipitate was filtered off to give 35.67 g (87%, brown solid) of intermediate 2 .
Br N N O 0) Preparation of intermediate 3 A mixture of intermediate 2 (1.56 g; 7.32 mmol) in a solution of lc acid in acetic acid (20 ml) was heated at 45°C for 3 hours. The reaction mixture was evaporated to give 1.66 g of intermediate 3 which was used in the next step without further purification.
Alternatively, in a round bottom flask, intermediate 2 (100 9; 468.1 mmol) was diluted in a 33% solution of bromidic acid in acetic acid (7 L). The mixture was d at 40-50°C for 3 hours. The solvent was evaporated and the residue was washed with methyl ter- butyl ether to give 110g (92%) of intermediate 3. d) ation of intermediate 4 Under N2 flow, tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (0.9 g, 0.75 mmol) was added to a mixture of the intermediate 3 (1.7 g, 7.4 mmol), 1-methylpyrazoleboronic acid pinacol ester (1.79, 8.1 mmol), sodium ate (1.6 g, 14.7 mmol) in DME (40 ml) and water (10 ml). The mixture was heated at 100°C overnight. The solvent was evaporated then the residue was triturated with methyl-tert—butyl ether, filtered and dried step to give 1.45 g (87%) of intermediate 4. It was used without r purification in the next step.
/ N/ N/ Cl e) Preparation of intermediate 5 A mixture of ediate 4 (1.56 g, 6.38 mmol) in POCl3 (15 ml) was d and heated at 70°C for 1 hour. The solvent was evaporated till dryness and the residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (mobile phase 50% DCM, 50% EtOAc) The desired fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated to give 0.72 g (45%) of intermediate 5.
Intermediate 5 was also prepared according to the following procedure : POCl3 (6.4 mL; 68.65 mmol) was added drop wise over a 10 minute period to a suspension of intermediate 4 (3.9 g; 17.16 mmol) and DMF (2.66 mL; 34.33 mmol) in 1,2—dichloroethane (75 mL) at 80°C. The reaction mixture was heated at 80°C for 3 hours and cooled to room temperature. The reaction mixture was slowly poured onto a % aqueous solution of K2C03 and ted with DCM/MeOH. The organic layer was decanted, washed with water, dried over M9804, filtered and dried to dryness yielding 3.1 g (73%) of intermediate 5. intermediate 5 was also prepared ing to the following procedure : A mixture of 6-chloropyridine-2,3-diamine (CAS 408514) (10 g; 69.65 mmol), 2- bromo(1-methyl-1H-pyrazolyl)ethanone (CAS 7068191) (14.1 9; 69.65 mmol) and DIPEA (24 mL; 139.3 mmol) in ACN (280 mL) was heated at 90°C for 18 hours. The heating was stopped and MnOz (18.2 9; 208.95 mmol) was added portion wise (carefully) and the reaction mixture was d at room temperature for 15 s.
MnOz was removed by filtration through a pad of celite® and the filtrate was concentrated. The precipitate was filtered, washed with EtZO and dried to give 10.4 g (61%) of intermediate 5.
Intermediate 5 was also prepared according to the following procedure : Cl N N Br a) preparation of intermediate 5a POCI3 (18.3 mL; 195.47 mmol) was added drop wise to a suspension of intermediate 3 (15 9; 48.87 mmol) and DMF (7.57 mL; 97.74 mmol) in 1,2-dlchloroethane (561 mL) previously heated at 80°C. The reaction mixture was heated at 80°C for 3 hours and cooled to room temperature. The reaction mixture was slowly poured onto a saturated aqueous on of Nchog. DCM was added and the 2 layers were separated. The aqueous layer was extracted with DCM/MeOH (8/2). The c layer was decanted, washed with water, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was taken up with EtZO. The precipitate was filtered and dried affording 9.059 (76%) of intermediate 5a which was directly used in the next step without any further purification. b) A solution of intermediate 5a (20 9; 81.81 mmol), 1-methylpyrazoleboronic acid pinacol ester (13.6 9; 65.45 mmol), 2M aqueous Na2C03 (205 mL) in 1,2— dimethoxyethane (798 mL) were degassed under N2. Pd(PPh3)4 (4.73 9; 4.09 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was heated at reflux for 2 hours. The mixture was poured into ice and extracted with EtOAc. The mixture was ed through a pad of celite® which was washed with DCM. The organic layers were dried over M9804, filtered and the solvent was evaporated. The residue was taken up with ACN, filtered and dried to give 15.32 g (76%) of intermediate 5 .
Intermediate 5 was also prepared according to the following procedure : A solution of 3,6-dichloropyrido[2,3,b]pyrazine 3509252) (129; ), 1- methylpyrazole-4—boronic acid pinacol ester 9; 60mmol), in s 2M sodium carbonate (90mL) and 1,2-dimethoxyethane (400mL) was degassed with N2 for 15 minutes. Then Pd(PPh3)4 (3.59; 3mmol) was added and the on mixture was refluxed for 2 hours, then cooled to room temperature, poured onto a saturated s NaH003 solution and EtOAc was added. The resulting mixture was filtered through a pad of celite®. The filtrate was extracted twice with EtOAc and the organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness.
The residue was crystallized from ACN. The precipitate was filtered off, washed with EtZO and dried yielding 5g (34%) of intermediate 5.
The filtrate was evaporated to dryness then, taken-up with a mixture of ACN/Eth. The precipitate was filtered off to give onal 2.3g (16%) of intermediate 5.
Example A2 H N~ /o N N\ N\ \ Preparation of intermediate 6 To a on of intermediate 5 (2 g, 8.14 mmol) in n-propanol (70 ml) was added 3,5— dimethoxyaniline (2.5 g, 16.3 mmol) and the reaction mixture was heated at 100°C for 4 hours. The reaction mixture was cooled down and poured out onto ice water. The reaction mixture was extracted with EtOAc, washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue (3.6 g) was purified by tography over silica gel (15-40pm 80 g, mobile phase gradient 97.5% DCM, 2.5% MeOH, 0.1% NH4OH to 97% DCM, 3% MeOH, 0.1% NH4OH). The pure ons were ted and evaporated till s to afford 2.76 g of intermediate 6 (MP: 174°C (Kofler)).
Analogous preparation of intermediate 12 Analogous preparation of intermediate 14 F l Cl N\ o n UN/N\ j/LN Analogous preparation of intermediate 16 F N\ doF / N/ Analogous preparation of ediate 17 F "\ o n N UK/ Nj/LN\ Analogous preparation of intermediate 26 / starting from intermediate 27.
Analogous preparation of intermediate 47 starting from intermediate 27 o N N N i j KIN// \ ous preparation of intermediate 54. . /0 starting from intermediate 55 | H o N /N N\ \ Analogous preparation of Intermediate 61. . . starting from intermediate 62 Analogous preparation of intermediate 68 F / starting from intermediate 62 o N UUr/N Nj/E) Analogous preparation of intermediate 71 starting from ediate 72 i H 0UU N N N \ /TO Analogous ation of intermediate 73 starting from intermediate 55 J) I U\\/\N Analogous preparation of intermediate 74 starting from intermediate 75 F /N l H l O NNN\ U\/\N Analogous preparation of intermediate 86 starting from intermediate 75 WO 61080 ous preparation of intermediate 95 o H N N I/” [j / \ \ N/ starting from intermediate 96 pSN/lkokOE F /O\I£>/NH N / /N]/N\)Ill"’o Analogous preparation of intermediate 117 (cis) starting from intermediate 119 OQNUZjQ| H Analogous preparation of intermediate 134 starting from intermediate 90 Example A2A Preparation of intermediate 129 A solution of HCl 4N in 1,4—dioxane (0.2 ml; 0.8 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 5 (1.96 g; 7.97 mmol) and 3,5-dimethoxymethyl-aniline (2 g; 11.96 mmol) in n-propanol (49 mL). The reaction mixture was heated at 100°C overnight and cooled to room ature. A 10% aqueous solution of K2003 was added and the on mixture was extracted with DCM (4 times). The organic layer was decanted, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was crystallized from ACN. The precipitate was filtered, washed with Et20 and dried to give 2.29 g (76%)of intermediate 129. M.P.: 146°C (kofler).
/ \ / Preparation of intermediate 7 N_ The reaction was performed twice on the same quantities of intermediate 5 (7.5 g; 30.53 mmol): To a solution of intermediate 5 (15 g; 61.06 mmol) in n-propanol (375 mL) was added 2- fluoro-3,5-dimethoxyaniline (10.45 g; 61.06 mmol), then HCI 4M in 1,4—dioxane (1.53 mL; 6.11 mmol) and the reaction mixture was heated at 100°C ght. The on mixture was cooled down, and the precipitate was filtered, washed with EtZO and dried.
The precipitate was taken up in a 10% aqueous on of K2003 and stirred overnight.
The precipitate was filtered off, washed with water three times, dried, dissolved with DCM/MeOH (8/2) and evaporated to s. The residue was taken up in ACN. The precipitate was filtered, washed with EtZO and dried yielding 19.58 g (84%) of intermediate 7.
Analogous preparation of intermediate 133 starting from intermediate 90 Example A3 Preparation of intermediate 7 N_ To a solution of ediate 5 (1.3 g ; 5.29 mmol) in n-propanol (60 ml) was added 2- fluoro-3,5-dimethoxybenzenamine (1.8 g ; 10.6 mmol) and the reaction mixture was heated at 100°C for 4 hours. The reaction mixture was cooled down, poured out onto ice-water and the on mixture was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried (MgSO4), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure.
The ed residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (15-40pm 3009, mobile phase: 98% DCM, 2% MeOH). The desired product ons were collected and concentrated to afford 800 mg (43%) of intermediate 7 (MP: 212°C (DSC)).
Example A4 NéjiN/inQN/ N (I) .~ 2 \ /O Preparation of intermediate 8 Under N2 fiow, NaH (0.037 g, 0.94 mmol, 60% in mineral oil) was added portionwise to a solution of intermediate 6 (0.17 g, 0.47 mmol) in methylformamide (5 ml) at 5°C.
The reaction mixture was stirred at 5°C for 30 minutes. Then a solution of (2- bromoethoxy)-tert-butyldimethylsilane (0.2 ml, 0.94 mmol) was added dropwise at 5°C.
The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 15 hours. The on was poured out onto ice water and EtOAc was added. The organic layer was separated, washed with brine, dried (MgSO4), filtered and the solvent was evaporated to dryness to give 0.22 g (91%) of intermediate 8. ><Si Analogous preparation of intermediate 11 starting from intermediate 12 0/ \ i H i”‘ o N N\ Nj/QN Analogous preparation of intermediate 15 / starting from intermediate 7 ous preparation of ediate 88 starting from intermediate 74 Preparation of intermediate 93 and N/j/[N/mmN\ \ I Q / 5 intermediate 9b X Under N2 flow, NaH (0.127 g, 3.2 mmol, 60% in mineral oil) was added portionwise to a on of intermediate 6 (0.5 g, 1.4 mmol) in N,N-dimethylformamide (15 ml) at 5°C.
The reaction mixture was stirred at 5°C for 30 minutes. Then a solution of (3— bromopropoxy)—tert-butyldimethylsilane (0.66 ml, 2.8 mmol) was added dropwise at 5°C.
The on was allowed to reach room temperature and stirred at for overnight. The reaction was poured out onto ice water and EtOAc was added. The organic layer was separated, washed with brine, dried (M9804), ed and the solvent was evaporated till dryness to give 887mg of a mixture of intermediate 9a and 9b. The mixture was used without further cation in the next step.
/ IN/ N/ N O N\ l J) l Analogous preparation of intermediate 10a and Ng/[N/ N \N ‘1 (l) /N F intermediate 10b X starting from intermediate 12 Example A5 .Q.\ HN F / N\ N / - yo Alternative preparation of intermediate 12 N_ A solution of intermediate 5 (200 mg ; 0.81 mmol), 2,6-difluoro—3,5- dimethoxybenzeneamine (308 mg ; 1.63 mmol) and C32C03 (1.339 ; 4.07 mmol) in NMP (1.2 mL) and dioxane ( 12 mL) was degassed at room temperature under N2 flow.
After 10 minutes, [+-]-2,2’-bis[diphenylphosphino]-1,1’-binaphthalene (105 mg ; 0.16 mmol) and palladium(ll) acetate (18 mg ; 0.081 mmol) were added and the reaction mixture was heated at 150°C for 30 s using microwave power. The reaction mixture was poured out onto ice water and EtOAc. The solution was ed through a pad of Celite®, ted with EtOAc, washed with water, dried (M9804) and concentrated under reduced pressure. The obtained residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (15-40pm 24 9,. mobile phase gradient from 97.5% DCM, 2.5% MeOH, 0.1% NH4OH to 97% DCM, 2% MeOH, 0.1% NH4OH). The desired product fractions were ted and the solvent was evaporated to afford 35 mg (11%) of intermediate 12.
Example A6 Preparation of intermediate 18 R Et3N (6 mL; 41.69 mmol), enesulfonyl chloride (7.95 g; 41.69 mmol) and DMAP (424 mg; 3.47 mmol) were added successively to a on of (R)—(-)5-(hydroxymethy|)— 2-pyrrolidinone (CAS 66673—40-3) (4 9; 34.743 mmol) in DCM (60 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. An aqueous solution of HCl 1N was added. The mixture was extracted with DCM (3 times). The c layer was dried over M9804, filtered and the solvent was evaporated to dryness.
The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH, 20-45pm, 80g; mobile phase: 98% DCM, 2% MeOH, 0.2% NH4OH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to give 6.8 g (72%) of intermediate 18.
ExampleA7 | Cl N\ \ \ / / Preparation of intermediate 19 A solution of potassium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide 0.5M in toluene (12.2 mL; 6.11 mmol) was added drop wise to a solution of 2,6-chloro—3-methoxyphenylamine (0.78 g; 4.07 mmol) in THF (20 mL) at 0°C. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0°C at for 1 hour.
Then, intermediate 5 (1 g; 4.07 mmol) was added portion wise at 0°C, after 30 minutes DMF (20 mL) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for hours. The on mixture was poured into ice water, brine then EtOAc was added and the on mixture was stirred at room temperature for 30 minutes. The organic layer was separated, extracted with EtOAc, washed with brine then dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The e was purified by chromatography on silica gel (Spherical Silica, 5pm, 150x30.0mm; mobile phase: gradient from 0.1% NH4OH, 97% DCM, 3% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to give 0.85 g (52%) of intermediate 19 .
.Q.\ HN F Preparation of intermediate 12 N Potassium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide 1M in THF (71 mL; 70 mmol) was added drop wise at 0°C to a solution of 2,6-difluoro-3,5-dimethoxyphenylamine (8.9 g; 46.9 mmol) in DMF (220 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at 0°C for 1 hour. Then; intermediate 5 (12 g; 39 mmol) was added portion wise at 0°C and the reaction e was stirred at room temperature for 24 hours. The reaction mixture was poured into ice water and brine.
EtOAc was added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 30 minutes, then filtered through a pad of ®. The filtrate was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was taken-up with Et20, the precipitate was filtered and dried to give 14 g (90%) of intermediate 12.
I CI IN\ 0&1: N \ Nj/QN/ Analogous preparation of intermediate 20 F N starting from intermediate 5 1 Cl ’N\ o N N \ rtj/E/q Cl N/ Analogous preparation of ediate 22 / starting from intermediate 5 | F Orim“N /N N\j/[CN/ ous preparation of intermediate 30 starting from ediate 27 H lN\ F N N N /N F\U\/N Analogous preparation of intermediate 60 F starting from ediate 5 1F H (\o orim?/F\N N N My ous preparation of intermediate 89 starting from intermediate 90 Example A8 Preparation of intermediate 21 Under N2 at 10°C, NaH (33 mg; 0.83 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 6 (300 mg; 0.83 mmol) in DMF (10 mL). The solution was stirred at 10°C for 30 minutes.
Then, a solution of 1H—1,2,4—Triazole-3—methanol, 1-(triphenylmethyl)—, 3— methanesulfonate (CAS: 1630093) (540 mg; 1.29 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) was added drop wise and the solution was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred overnight. The solution was cooled and the reaction mixture was poured into cooled water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with water, decanted, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by WO 61080 chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 20—45um, 4509; mobile phase: 0.3% NH4OH, 97% DCM, 3% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated to give 0.45 g (79%) of intermediate 21 .
Analogous ation of intermediate 23 Analogous ation of intermediate 24 O 2 \ /Z /2 Analogous preparation of intermediate 112 \ starting from intermediate 6 and intermediate 113 z’2 \ Analogous preparation of intermediate 116 \ starting from intermediate 7 and intermediate 113 Example A8a ,f~ o / N N | (l \ O [j N N N I/ / \ \ N/ Preparation of intermediate 70 NaH (88 mg; 2.21 mmol) was added under N2 at 10°C to a solution of intermediate 6 ((400 mg; 1.1 mmol) in DMF (5 mL). The solution was stirred at 10°C for 30 minutes. 5- chloromethyl—2-trityl-2H-tetrazole (CAS 1609984) (619 mg; 1.72 mmol) was added portion wise and the solution was allowed to slowly warm to room temperature and stirred overnight. The solution was cooled, poured into cooled water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, washed with brine, dried over M9804, ed and evaporated to dryness to give 0.76 g (100%) of intermediate 70.
Analogous preparation of intermediate 43 Analogous ation of ediate 78 starting from intermediate 7 and intermediate 82.
ExampleA9 >\/o | H 0fijN /N N\j/[TN k/ \ 'N/ Preparation of intermediate 25 In a round bottom flask, intermediate 26 (1.06 g; 2.89 mmol) was diluted in DCM (30 mL). Then, at room ature, Eth (2.07 mL; 14.48 mmol) followed by B0020 (760 mg; 3.4 mmol) were added. The reaction mixture was stirred for 18 hours at room ature. The reaction mixture was partitioned between water and DCM. The organic layer was ted, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness to afford a crude which was taken up with EtZO to give after filtration 990 mg (82%) of intermediate 25 (orange powder). M.P.: 160°C (gum, Kofler).
ExampleA9A P" 5 F N\ ('3 H N N [/N / \ \ 'N/ Preparation of intermediate 140 1-(Tert-butoxycarbonyl)(methanesuIfonyloxy)azetidine (CAS: 1416993) (850 mg; 3.38 mmol) was added a solution of intermediate 26 (826 mg, 1.86 mmol) and 052C03 (1.47 g; 4.51 mmol) in ACN (16 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred in a sealed tube at 100°C for 6 hours. The reaction mixture was poured into ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by tography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-45um, 12g; mobile phase: gradient from 99% DCM, 1% MeOH to 97% DCM, 3% MeOH). The product ons were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 147 mg (15%) of intermediate 140.
Example A10 I /N CI N N Preparation of intermediate 27 A mixture of intermediate 5a (7.5 g; 30.68 mmol) and 1-(tetrahydro-2H-pyranyl)—4— (4,4,5,5-tetramethyI-1,3,2-dioxaborolan—2—yl)—1H-pyrazole (CAS 1003846—21-6) (9.39 g; 33.75 mmol) in a 2M s solution of sodium carbonate (76 mL; 153.39 mmoi) and DME (310 mL) was degassed with N2 for 15 minutes, then Pd(Ph3)4 (1.77 g; 1.53 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was ed overnight, poured into a ted solution of NaHC03 and extracted with AcOEt. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The e was crystallized from ACN. The precipitate was filtered, washed with Ego and dried yielding 3.06 g (32%) of intermediate 27 silica gel (irregular . The filtrate was purified by chromatography over SiOH, 15-45um, 120g; mobile phase : gradient from 100% DCM, 0% MeOH to 99% DCM, 1% MeOH). The fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 4.21 g (43%) of intermediate 27 . (overall yield: 75%). or N N UJ/ \ of intermediate 55 N Analogous preparation starting from intermediate 5a or N U,/ Nj/E/\ Analogous preparation of intermediate 72 starting from intermediate 5a Example A10 b—1 WO 61080 Cl /N |N\ \ \ N/ Preparation of intermediate 62 A solution of intermediate 5a (1.25 g; 5.10 mmol) and 3-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2— dioxoborolanyl)-pyridine (1.1 g; 5.10 mmol) in Na2C03 2M (12.7 mL) and DME (51 mL) were degassed with N2 for 15 minutes. PdCl2(dppf).DCM (373 mg; 0.51 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was refluxed for 1 hour. The on mixture was cooled to room temperature, poured into water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, dried over M9804, filtered and the solvent was evaporated. The residue (1.7 g) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, m, 9; mobile phase: 0.1% NH4OH, 97% DCM, 3% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated to give 330 mg of intermediate 62. (130 Analogous preparation of intermediate 75 starting from intermediate 5a NBoc Analogous ation of intermediate 96 starting from intermediate 5a Example A11 —0 N \_</ BMW Preparation of intermediate 29 H Methanesulfonyl chloride (0.229 mL; 2.96 mmol) was added drop wise to a solution of 2- ymethyl—1,4,6,7-tetrahydro-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridinecarboxylicacidtert-butylester (CAS 12510007) (0.250 g; 0.99 mmol) and Eth (0.69 mL; 4.94 mmol) in DCM (10 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow. The reaction mixture was stirred at 5°C for 2 hours. The reaction mixture was poured into iced water and DCM was added. The organic layer was separated, dried over M9804, filtered and the solvent was evaporated to give 0.237 g (72%) of intermediate 29. The product was used without purification in the next step.
Example A11A Preparation of intermediate 113 Methanesulfonyl de (0.75 mL; 9.666 mmol) was added dropwise at 5°C under N2 flow to a solution of 1-(triphenylmethyl)—1H-1,2,3-triazole-4—methanol (CAS 885296) (2.2 g; 6.444 mmol) and Et3N (1.34 ml; 9.666 mmol) in F 50/50 (45 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred below 0°C for 1 hour, poured onto ice and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was decanted, dried over MgSO4, filtered and evaporated to s yielding 2.4 g (89%) of intermediate 113.
Example A12 a) Preparation of intermediate 33 ° Dimethylsulfamoyl chloride (2.16 mL; 19.98 mmol) was added to a solution of 4-methyl— -imidazolecarboxaldehyde (CAS 682821) (2 g; 18.16 mmol) and Et3N (4.16 mL; 29.06 mmol) in ACN (20 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at 50°C ght. The mixture was poured into water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-40pm, 809; mobile phase: 99% DCM, 1% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 2.35 g (60%) of ediate 33. b) Preparation of intermediate 32 0” NaBH4 (491 mg; 12.98 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 33 (2.35 g; 10.81 mmol) in MeOH (20 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow. The on mixture was then d at room temperature 2 hours, poured into ice water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was dried over M9804, ed and evaporated to dryness. The crude product was taken up in EtZO then filtered and dried yielding 1.09 g (46%) of intermediate 32.
‘S\\ 2E />N / 0 0) Preparation of intermediate 31 0' Et3N (8.24 mL; 57.58 mmol), methanesulfonyl chloride (2.67 mL; 34.55 mmol) and lithium chloride (3.66 g; 86.37 mmol) were added successively to a solution of intermediate 32 (5.91 g; 28.79 mmol) in THF (145 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow. The reaction e was stirred at room temperature for 4 hours. The on mixture was poured into ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness yielding 6.76 g of intermediate 31. The crude mixture was used in the next step without any purification.
Example A13 a) Preparation of intermediate 340 Dimethylsulfamoyl chloride (3.09 mL; 28.62 mmol) was added to a solution of 3— carboxaldehyde pyrazole (2.5 g; 26.02 mmol) and Et3N (5.96 mL; 41.63 mmol) in ACN (25 mL) and the reaction mixture was stirred at 50°C overnight. The reaction mixture was poured into ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine and dried over MgSO4, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The crude product was ed by tography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-45um, 80g; mobile phase: 99% DCM, 1% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 4.42 g (84%) of intermediate 34. b) Preparation of intermediate 35 0“ NaBH4 1 mg; 26.1 mmol) was added portion wise to a solution of intermediate 34 (4.42 g; 21.75 mmol) in MeOH (50 mL) at 5°C. The on mixture was then stirred at room temperature 2 hours, poured out into ice water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was decanted, dried over MgSO4, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The crude product was taken up with EtQO; the precipitate was filtered and dried yielding 3.04 g (68%) of intermediate 35. 0) Preparation of intermediate 36 C' Eth (4.24 mL; 29.63 mmol), methanesulfonyl chloride (1.38 mL; 17.78 mmol) and m chloride (1.88 g; 44.45 mmol) were added successively to a solution of intermediate 35 (3.04 g; 14.82 mmol) in THF (75 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 4 hours, poured into ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness yielding 3.82 g of intermediate 36 which was used in the next step without any purification.
Example A14 ,N\ ,9 / O \ a) Preparation of intermediate 37 NaH (214 mg; 5.35 mmol) was added portion wise to a solution of ethyl 4— lecarboxylate (CAS 90-5) (0.5 g; 3.93 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) under N2 flow at 5°C. The reaction mixture was stirred at 5°C for 30 minutes. then ylsulfamoyl chloride (424 pL; 3.93 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred at room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was poured into ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and ated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-45um, 259; mobile phase: 99% DCM, 1% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness ng 720 mg (82%) of ediate 37.
/N\ ,9 / \ N‘fi‘N o \ b) Preparation of intermediate 38 0” Intermediate 37 (720 mg; 2.91 mmol) in THF (7 mL) was added drop wise to a suspension of LiAlH4 (221 mg; 5.82 mmol) in THF (6 mL) at room temperature and d all over the weekend. The reaction e was quenched successively with water (220 uL), NaOH (220 uL) and water (660 uL), then extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness yielding 229 mg (38%) of intermediate 38. c) Preparation of intermediate 39 C' Eth (0.32 mL; 2.23 mmol), methanesulfonyl chloride (0.104 mL; 1.34 mmol) and lithium chloride (142 mg; 3.35 mmol) were added successively to a solution of intermediate 38 (229 mg; 1.12 mmol) in THF (5 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 4 hours. The reaction mixture was poured into ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and evaporated to s yielding 245 mg (98%) of intermediate 39. The residue was used in the next step without any purification.
Example A15 a) Preparation of intermediate 40 ° Dimethylsulfamoyl chloride (CAS 133601) (1.81 mL; 16.78 mmol) was added to a solution of 2-methyl-1H-imidazole-4—carbaldehyde (CAS 350341) (1.68 g; 15.26 mmol) and Et3N (3.49 mL; 24.41 mmol) in ACN (17 mL) and the reaction mixture was stirred at 50°C overnight. The reaction mixture was diluted with EtOAc and washed with water. The organic layer was then dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness.
The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-40um, 24g; mobile phase: 100% DCM). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 1.36 g (41%) of intermediate 40. b) Preparation of intermediate 41 0” NaBH4 (284 mg; 7.51 mmol) was added n wise to a solution of intermediate 40 (1.36 g; 6.26 mmol) in MeOH (15 mL) at 5°C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours, poured into ice water, extracted with DCM, dried over M9804, ed and evaporated to dryness. The crude product was taken up with EtZO; the precipitate was filtered and dried yielding 795 mg (58%) of intermediate 41. 0) Preparation of intermediate 42 C' Et3N (1.04 mL; 7.25 mmol), methane yl de (0.337 mL; 4.35 mmol) and LiCl 3 mg; 10.9 mmol) were added successively to a solution of intermediate 41 (795 reaction mixture was stirred at mg; 3.62 mmol) in THF (18 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow. The room temperature for 4 hours, poured into ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to s yielding 844 mg (98%) of intermediate 42 which was used in the next step without any purification in the preparation of compound 138.
Example A16 a) Preparation of intermediate 44 0” A solution of 1-[[2-(Trimethylsilyl)-ethoxy]-methyl]-1H-imidazole—2-carboxaldehyde (CAS 1012260) (2.25 g; 9.94 mmol) in MeOH (29 mL) was cooled to —20°C and treated portion wise with NaBH4 (0.45 g; 11.9 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour, ed by addition of an aqueous solution of NH4C| and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was dried over M9804, filtered and the solvent was evaporated to give 2.13 g (94%) of intermediate 44. \ _/ / 1. b) Preparation of ediate 45 c' Methanesulfonyl chloride (1.07 mL; 13.8 mmol) was added drop wise to a solution of intermediate 44 (2.1 g; 9.2 mmol) and Et3N (1.92 mL; 13.8 mmol) in DCM (31 mL) at 0°C under N2 flow. The reaction mixture was stirred below 0°C for 1 hour, poured into ice and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was separated, dried over MgSO4, filtered and the solvent was evaporated under vacuum at room temperature to give 2.27 g (100%) of intermediate 45 which was used t further purification in the next step.
Ni HS? 0 ii N Nj/EéN1 9l\ E :1 I \ N/ c) Preparation of intermediate 46 NaH (0.13 g; 3.27 mmol) was added portion wise to intermediate 47 (1.14 g; 3.27 mmol) in DMF (11 mL) under N2 flow at room ature. The mixture was stirred for 1.5 hours, then 2-(trimethylsi|yl)-ethoxymethyl chloride (0.58 mL; 3.27 mmol) was added drop wise. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight, quenched with ice and ted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and the t was evaporated to dryness. The residue (1.62 g) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-40 pm, 80g; mobile phase: gradient from 100% DCM, 0% MeOH to 96% DCM, 4% MeOH. The product fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated to give 0.77 g (49%) of intermediate 46 . d) Preparation of intermediate 48 NaH (125 mg; 3.13 mmol) was added under N2 at 10°C to a on of intermediate 46 (750 mg; 1.57 mmol) in DMF (10 mL). The solution was stirred at 10°C for 30 minutes. intermediate 45 (601 mg; 2.44 mmol) was added portion wise and, the on was allowed to slowly warm to room temperature and stirred overnight. The solution was cooled, poured into cooled water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15—40 pm, 809; mobile phase: gradient from 0% NH4OH, 0% MeOH, 100% DCM to 0.1% NH4OH, 5% MeOH, 95% DCM). The product ons were collected and the solvent was evaporated to give 0.789 (72%) of intermediate 48. ous preparation of intermediate 66 Analogous preparation of intermediate 94 o g_ \/\ N KL”\ N\ 0 N N N l/N U\// N starting from intermediate 95 and intermediate 45 Analogous preparation of intermediate 97 starting from intermediate 7 and intermediate 102 ous preparation of intermediate 107 starting from intermediate 7 and from intermediate 108 /\Si\\//\/OC‘NQUDL Analogous preparation of intermediate 115 starting from ediate 83 and from intermediate 45 /S|i\/\O/;‘\l 6 t}UTE Analogous preparation of ediate 145 starting from intermediate 146 and from intermediate 45 Example A17 Preparation of intermediate 49 A 30% aqueous solution of NaOH (1.99 mL; 19.9 mmol) was added gradually to a solution of p-toluenesulfonyl chloride (2.6 g; 13.6 mmol) and benzyltriethylammonium chloride (CAS 561) (0.194 g; 0.85 mmol) in toluene (5 mL) at 5°C. 3- Oxetanemethanol (CAS 62466) (0.915 mL; 11.35 mmol) was added drop wise below 10°C. The on mixture was stirred below 10°C for 1 hour and at room WO 61080 temperature for 5 hours. The reaction mixture was poured into ice and extracted with DCM (3 times). The organic layer was dried over M9804, filtered and the solvent was evaporated to give 2.49 g (91%) of intermediate 49.
Example A18 Preparation of intermediate 50 NaH (107 mg; 2.68 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 7 (510 mg; 1.34 mmol) in DMF (10 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow. The reaction was stirred at 5°C for 30 minutes and a solution of intermediate 53 (554 mg; 2.02 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) was added at 5°C under N2 flow over a 30 minutes period. The reaction mixture was d to warm to room temperature and stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was poured into ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, ed and ated to dryness. The crude product was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-45um, 249; mobile phase: nt from DCM 99%. MeOH 1% to DCM 98%, MeOH 2%). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 200 mg (24%) of intermediate 50 .
Examgle A19 a) Preparation of intermediate 51 NaH (724 mg; 18.11 mmol) was added n wise to a solution of 2— imidazolecarboxaldehyde (1.16 g; 12.07 mmol) in DMF (58 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow.
The reaction mixture was stirred at 5 °C for 30 minutes and moethoxy)-tert- butyldimethylsilane (3.11 mL; 14.49 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred all over the weekend. The reaction mixture was poured into ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and dried. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-45 pm, 40g; mobile phase: DCM 99%, lVleOH 1%). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 940 mg (31%) of ediate 51. b) Preparation of intermediate 52 0“ NaBH4 (168 mg; 4.43 mmol) was added portion wise to a solution of intermediate 51 (940 mg; 3.70 mmol) in MeOH (10 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature 2 hours, poured into ice water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The crude product was taken up with Et20.The precipitate was filtered and dried yielding 597 mg (63%) of intermediate 52. 0) Preparation of ediate 53 C' Et3N (666 uL; 4.66 mmol), methanesulfonyl de (216 uL; 2.79 mmol) and LiCl (296 mg; 6.99 mmol) were added successively to a solution of intermediate 52 (597 mg; 2.33 mmol) in THF (12 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 4 hours. The on mixture was poured into ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The c layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness yielding 554 mg (87%) of intermediate 53 which was used in the next step without any purification.
Example A20 \N // Preparation of intermediate 56 NaH (149 mg; 3.71 mmol) was added portion wise at 5°C under NZ to a soiution of (S)—5- (Hydroxy-methyi)—2-pyrrolidinone p-toluenesulfonate (CAS 516935) (1 g; 3.71 mmol) and thane (277 uL; 4.46 mmol) in THF (20 mL). The reaction e was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was quenched with brine and extracted wit EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, washed with water then brine, dried over M9304, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 30pm, 309; mobile phase: gradient from 100% DCM, 0% MeOH to 98% DCM, 2% MeOH). The t fractions were collected and evaporated to give 390 mg (37%) of intermediate Example A21 Preparation of intermediate 57 NaH (149 mg; 3.71 mmol) was added portion wise at 5°C under N2 to a solution of intermediate 18 (1 g; 3.71 mmol) and iodomethane (277 uL; 4.46 mmol) in THF (20 mL).
The reaction e was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred overnight.
The reaction mixture was quenched with brine and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, washed with water then brine, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 30pm, 309; mobile phase: gradient from 100% DCM, 0% MeOH to 98% DCM, 2% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to give 377 mg (36%) of intermediate 57.
Example A22 a)Preparation of intermediate 59 NaH (30 mg; 0.74 mmol) was added at 0°C to a solution of 2-(trimethylsilyl)— ethoxymethyl chloride (0.13 mL; 0.74 mmol) and (S)-5—(Hydroxy—methyl)—2-pyrrolidinone p~toluenesulfonate (CAS 51693-17—5) (0.2 g; 0.74 mmol) in THF (5 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred 3 hours at 0°C, then partitioned between water and EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, ed and evaporated to s. The residue (0.4 g) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-40pm, 249; mobile phase: 98% DCM, 2% MeOH). The product fractions were evaporated to dryness to give 0.142 g (48%, colorless oil) of intermediate 59. b) Preparation of intermediates 67 and 58 /Sl >Si 1 Z O o 0 o / s / N‘ N\ | | o N N Nj/LN o N U11“. out“/N Nj/Ll/N o o / and / Intermediate 67 ediate 58 NaH (14.9 mg; 0.37 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 6 0.09 g; 0.25 mmol) in DMF (2.25 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow. The on was stirred at 5°C for 30 minutes and a solution of intermediate 59 (0.149 g; 0.37 mmol) in DMF (1 mL) was added. The reaction mixture was d to warm to room temperature and stirred during 3 days.
The reaction mixture was partitioned between water and EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue (0.2 g) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-40um, 249; mobile phase: nt from 98% DCM, 2% MeOH to 95% DCM, 5% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness to give 0.076 g (52%, orange oil) of intermediate 67 and 0.05 g (20%, orange oil, purity: 60% based on 1H NMR) of intermediate 58.
Example A23 ation of intermediate 63 and 64 Intermediate 63 and Intermediate 64 ylamine hydrochloride (26 mg; 0.37 mmol) was added to a suspension of compound 187 (100 mg; 0.25 mmol) and Et3N (52 uL; 0.37 mmol) in EtOH (3 mL). The resulting mixture was stirred at 80°C overnight. The precipitate was ed and dried to give 0.08 g (74%) of a mixture intermediate 63 and intermediate 64 (70/30 based on 1H NMR).
/O AfroH N / / \ j/QNN / N\ F / /O N/ Analogous preparation of intermediate 139 starting from compound 298 Example A24 NHZNH /O\©/ /il Preparation of intermediate 65 Hydrazine monohydrate (1.22 ml, 31.2 mol) was added to a solution of compound 189 (0.7 g, 1.56 mmol) in EtOH (70 ml). The mixture was stirred overnight at reflux. After cooling down to room temperature, the precipitate was ed off, washed with EtOH and dried to give 0.56 g (83%) of intermediate 65, which was used without further purification for the next step.
Analogous preparation of intermediate 106 starting from compound 234 Example A25 Preparation of intermediate 76 and 77 Sli\ Z 58x N:\\N N§\ o / Nf / N N I I I ‘UN N N\N o N N / / \ 1:0 \ N\\ O\ 0\ lntermediate 76 and lntermediate 77 C32C03 (0.3 g; 0.9 mmol) was added to a solution of compound 71 (0.2 g; 0.45 mmol) and (2-Bromoethoxy)—tert-butyldimethylsilane (0.22 mL; 0.99 mmol) in DMF (15 mL) at °C under N2 flow. The reaction mixture was stirred at room ature for 24 hours, poured into ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with water then brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue (609 mg) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-40um, 249. mobile phase: 0.1% NH4OH, 3% MeOH, 97%). The fractions containing the product were collected and evaporated. The residue (388 mg) was purified again by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical Silica, 5pm, 150x30.0mm; mobile phase: gradient from 71% Heptane, 1% MeOH (+10% NH4OH), 28% EtOAc to 0% Heptane, % MeOH (+10% NH4OH), 80% EtOAc). The product ons were collected and the solvent was ated to give 0.080 g (29%) of intermediate 76 and 0.175 g (64%) of intermediate 77.
Example A26 a) Preparation of intermediate 79 NaH (235 mg; 5.88 mmol) was added portion wise to a suspension of 1-Trityl-1H- imidazole—4-methanol (CAS 33769—07-2) (1 g; 2.94 mmol) in DMF (10 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow. The reaction mixture was d at 5°C for 30 minutes and bromoethane (219 uL; 2.94 mmol) was added drop wise. The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred ght. The reaction mixture was poured into water.
The precipitate was filtered, washed with water, then ved in ACN and evaporated to dryness. The residue was taken up twice in EtOH and ated to dryness. The crude product was purified by chromatography over silica gel ular SiOH, 15-45um, 249; mobile phase: gradient from 99% DCM, 1% MeOH to 97% DCM, 3% MeOH, 0.1% NH4OH). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 675 mg (62%) of intermediate 79.
O (QJK/ b) Preparation of intermediate 80 A solution of nBuLi 1.6M in hexane (1.17 mL; 1.87 mmol) was added drop wise to a solution of intermediate 79 (575 mg; 1.56 mmol) in THF (11 mL) at -78°C under N2 flow.
The reaction e was stirred at -78°C for 10 minutes, then DMF (846 pL; 10.92 mmol) was added drop wise. The reaction mixture was stirred at —78°C for 30 s, allowed to warm to 0°C over a 3 hour period, quenched with water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, m, 12g; mobile phase: 99% DCM, 1% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 556 mg (90%) of intermediate 80. 0) Preparation of intermediate 81 NaBH4 (64 mg; 1.68 mmol) was added n wise to a solution of intermediate 80 (556 mg; 1.40 mmol) in MeOH (5 mL) at 5°C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room ature for 2 hours, poured out ice water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was decanted, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was taken up with EtZO. The precipitate was filtered and dried yielding 530 mg (95%) of intermediate 81 which was used in the next step without any further purification. 0 (K?N OJ d) Preparation of intermediate 82 cr Et3N (0.37 mL; 2.66 mmol), methanesulfonyl chloride (124 pL; 1.60 mmol) and LiCl (169.15 mg; 3.99 mmol) were added successively to a solution of intermediate 81 (530 mg; 1.33 mmol) in THF (10 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 4 hours, poured into ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and evaporated to dryness yielding 610 mg of intermediate 82 which was used in the next step without any further purification.
Example A27 Preparation of intermediates 83 and 84 9° ,.
N 1 H I \N I \ o N N N / H I o N N N /N / \ 11 // \ | \ N/ 0\ °\ intermediate 83 and intermediate 84 Intermediate 26 (2.08 g, 4.68 mmol), Oxetanyl methanesulfonate (CAS: 1484303) (1.14 g; 7.49 mmol) and cesium ate (2.29 g; 7.02 mmol) in DMF (35 mL) were stirred in a sealed tube at 100°C for 6 hours. The mixture was poured into ice and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, ed evaporated to dryness. The crude product was purified by chromatography over silica gel (59 of dry loading irregular SiOH 70-200pm, lar SiOH, 15-45um, 25g; mobile phase : gradient from 98% DCM, 2% MeOH to 97% DCM, 3% MeOH). The product ons were ted and evaporated to dryness yielding 2 fractions — Fraction 1: 80 mg of a compound which was dissolved in ACN. crystallized from CAN. The itate was filtered, washed with ACN then EtZO and dried yielding 27 mg (1%) intermediate 84. M.P.:187-188°C (Kofler).
- Fraction 2: 550 mg of impure intermediate 83 was purified by achiral SFC (AMINO 6pm 150x21.2mm; mobile phase 0.3% lSOPROPYLAMINE, 75% C02, % MeOH). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 420 mg (21%) of ediate 83.
Example A28 Preparation of ediate 87 Eth (1.4 mL; 9.7 mmol) was added to a solution of 2-(hydroxymethyl)-N,N-dimethyl-1H- imidazole—1-sulfonamide (CAS 935862—80-9) (1 g; 4.87 mmol) in THF (25 mL). The reaction e was cooled down to 5°C under N2 and methanesulfonyl chloride (0.45 mL; 5.85 mmol) followed by lithium bromide (1.27 g; 14.62 mmol) were added. The reaction mixture was stirred at room ature for 2 hours, poured into ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue (1.43 g) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-40um, 24g; mobile phase: 99% DCM, 1% MeOH). The t fractions were collected and evaporated to give 0.92 g (70%) intermediate 87.
Example A29 m UI/N N\ Nd N Preparation of intermediate 90 A solution of 3,6—dichloropyrido[2,3,b]pyrazine (CAS: 13509252) (14 g; 69.99 mmol), morpholine (12.32 mL; 139.98 mmol), Eth (19.4 mL; 139.98 mmol) in DCM (500 mL) was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. Then, water was added. The c layer was separated, washed with brine, dried over MgSO4 and filtered. The filtrate was evaporated to dryness The residue (17g) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 20-45um, 450g; Mobile phase: 40% Heptane, 10% MeOH (+10% NH4OH), 50% AcOEt). The product fractions were mixed and the solvent evaporated to give 2 fractions: - Fraction 1: 9.7 g (55%) of intermediate 90 - on 2: 4.9 g of impure intermediate 90 which was ed by achirai SFC (Stationary phase: Chiralpak lA 5pm 250*20mm; Mobile phase: 55% C02, 45% MeOH) to afford additional 3.3 g (19%) of intermediate 90.
Example A30 Preparation of intermediate 91 A solution of intermediate 65 (316 mg; 0.73 mmol) in trimethyl orthoformate (CAS 149- 73-5) (80 mL; 731.24 mmol) was refluxed (100°C) overnight. The mixture was ated until dryness yielding 350 mg of intermediate 91 which was directly used in the next step.
Example A31 Preparation of intermediates 92 and 93 fifi\ y?» :1"7° ZN (111% @Url NaH (50.26 mg; 1.26 mmol) was added portionwise to a solution of a 93/7 mixture of nd 46 and compound 45 (400 mg; 0.21 mmol) in DMF (8 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow. The reaction mixture was stirred at 5°C for 30 minutes then, (2-bromoethoxy)—tert- butyldimethylsilane (198 pl; 0.92 mmol) was added dropwise and the reaction mixture was d at room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was quenched with iced WO 61080 water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was separated, dried over M9804, ed and evaporated to dryness yielding 415 mg (78%) of a mixture of intermediates 92 and 93 which was used without further cation in the next step. In this mixture, also amounts of nd 218 and 219 were present.
Analogous preparation of intermediate 111 (mixture) starting from compound 53 Intermediate 111 Example A32 a) Preparation of intermediates 98 and 99 N4\ II / \ N—Is—N\ Li/ 0 N¢\ fl / ‘./ \ N—fi—N\ 0 /S|7( intermediate 98 and intermediate 99 Et3N (3.75 mL; 26.2 mmol) and dimethylsulfamoyi chloride (CAS 133601) (2.26 mL; 21 mmol) were added to a solution of 5~[[[(1,1-dimethylethyl)dimethylsilyl]oxy]methyl]— 1H-imidazole (CA8 127056-45—5) (3.71 g; 17.5 mmol) in ACN (38 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at 50°C overnight. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature, poured into water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with water, dried over M9804, filtered and the solvent was evaporated. The residue was eptanes by tography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-40 pm, mobile phase: gradient from 100% DCM, 0% MeOH to 99% DCM, 1% MeOH). The product fractions were mixed and the solvent was evaporated yielding 2.52 g (45%) of intermediate 98 and 1.11 g (20%) of intermediate 99. éi/ N! 020,20 / O—iT —N\ b) Preparation of intermediate 100 nBuLi 1.6M in hexane (5.85 mL; 9.35 mmol) was added dropwise to a solution of intermediate 98 (2.49 g; 7.79 mmol) in THF (52 mL) at -78°C under N2 flow. The reaction mixture was stirred for 30 minutes at -78°C and DMF (3.8 mL; 49.1 mmol) was added.
The e was stirred for 1 hour at -78°C allowing the temperature to warm at room temperature. The reaction mixture was neutralized with a 10% aqueous solution of NH4Cl, then water and EtOAc were added. The organic layer was decanted, dried over MgSO4, filtered and the solvent was evaporated. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-40 pm, 120 9; mobile phase: gradient from 100% DCM, 0% MeOH to 98% DCM, 2% MeOH). The product fractions were mixed and the solvent was evaporated yielding: 1.1 g (41%) of intermediate 100. 5W 3 \ 0) Preparation of ediate 101 Sodium dride (122 mg; 3.22 mmol) was added to a solution of ediate 100 (1.12 g; 3.22 mmol) in MeOH (32 mL) at 0°C and the reaction mixture was stirred for 1 hour. The reaction mixture was poured into ice and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and the solvent was evaporated. The residue was taken up by DIPE and heptanes, filtered and dried yielding 0.9 g (80%) of intermediate 101. éi/ N! R / (vs-Ho d) Preparation of intermediate 102 iEt3N (0.369 mL; 2.58 mmol), methanesulfonyl de (0.12 mL; 1.55 mmol) and LiCl (0.164 g; 3.86 mmol) were successively added to a on of intermediate 101 (0.45 g; 1.29 mmol) in THF (10 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was poured into water and extracted with EtOAc. The c layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness yielding 0.47 g (100%) of intermediate 102 which was used without further purification for the next step.
Example A33 Preparation of intermediates 103, 104 and 105 intermediate 104 intermediate 103 \~/ —sa / \O /|Si‘o F R N\ I N /o N N N\ / U /N and intermediate 105 CszCog (533.61 mg; 1.64 mmol), then (2-bromoethoxy)—tert-butyldimethylsilane (211 uL; 0.98 mmol) were added to a solution of ediate 26 (300 mg; 0.82 mmol) in ACN (6 mL) and the reaction mixture was heated at 100°C for 6 hours.
The reaction e was poured into ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The crude product was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-45um, 249; mobile phase: gradient from 99% DCM, 1% MeOH to 96% DCM, 4% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 10 mg (2%) of intermediate 105, 70 mg (13%) of intermediate 103 and 124 mg (29%) of intermediate 104.
Example A34 O/\N HO\/1§/N\>¥Br a) Preparation of ediate 109 Sodium borohydryde (3.2 g; 85.89 mmol) was added nwise to a solution of 1H- lmidazolecarboxylic acidbromo—1-[[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl] ethyl ester (CA8 954125—17—8) (259; 71.57 mmol) in l (500 mL) at 5°C. The reaction was stirred at room temperature overnight, poured into ice water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was dried over MgSO4, filtered and evaporated to dryness to give 18.65 g (85%) of intermediate 109. oldixmN b) Preparation of intermediate 108 Et3N (466 uL; 3.255 mmol), methanesulfonylchloride (151 uL; 1.953 mmol) and LiCl (207 mg; 4.882 mmol) were added successively to a solution of ediate 109 (500 mg; 1.627 mmol) in THF (10 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. The reaction e was poured into ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness yielding 539 mg (100%) of intermediate 108 which was used in the next step without any further purification.
ExampleA35 are.
I F H /N\ o N N /N / \ \ IN/ Preparation of intermediate 110 Isobutylene oxide (155 pL; 1.73 mmol) was added to a solution of ediate 26 (700 mg; 1.58 mmol) and ngC03 (1.03 g; 3.15 mmol) in ACN (10.5 mL). The on mixture was stirred at 100 °C overnight. The reaction mixture was poured into ice water and ted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and evaporated. The crude product was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-45um, 249; mobile phase: gradient from 99% DCM, 1% MeOH to 96% DCM, 4% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and ated to dryness ng 192 mg (28%) of intermediate 110 .
Example A36 \ \N a) Preparation of intermediate 118 (cis) A solution of 3,6-dichloropyrido[2,3-b]pyrazine (1 g; 5 mmol), 2,6-dimethylpiperazine (0.81 mL; 7 mmol), triethylamine (1.39 mL; 10 mmol) in DCM (86 mL) was stirred at 0°C for 4 hours then at room temperature for 2 hours. Then, water was added. The organic layer was separated, washed with brine, dried over MgSO4 and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure to afford 1.38 g of intermediate 118 (85%) which was used without further purification in the next step.
O J< l/I\N/U\Oa Cl N N Nd, (Ir\ \N b) Preparation of intermediate119 (cis) Di—tert-butyl dicarbonate (1.3 g; 5.96 mmol) was added portion wise to a solution of intermediate 118 (1.38 g; 4.97 mmol) and N,N-diisopropylethylamine (2 mL; 11.43 mmol) in dioxane (35mL) at room temperature. The mixture was heated at 80°C for 3 hours, then the solution was cooled down to room temperature and poured into iced water, ted with EtOAc. dried over MgSO4, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The e (2.41 g) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular 15-40 pm, 40 9, mobile phase: 98% DCM, 2% MeOH). The product fractions were mixed and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford 700 mg (37 %) of intermediate 119.
Example A37 a) Preparation of intermediate120 A mixture of intermediate 5 (1.54 g; 6.28 mmol) and ofluorobenzoic acid ethyl ester (CAS 8508078) (2.3 g; 12.56 mmol) in n-propanol (30 mL) was heated at 100°C for 1h. The reaction mixture was cooled down to room temperature, poured into water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was crystallized from ACN; the precipitate was filtered, washed with EtZO and dried under vacuum to give 285 mg (12%) of intermediate 120 . M.P.: 250-260°C (Kofler).
{A\ \ 0 N% N\ /\O N N\ / N/Nj/EéN b) Preparation of intermediate 121 F NaH (61 mg; 1.529 mmol) was added at 5°C under N2 flow to a solution of intermediate 120 (300 mg; 0.765 mmol) in DMF (10 mL). The reaction e was stirred at 5°C for minutes. 2-(chloromethyl)—N,N-dimethyl-1H-imidazolesulfonamide (CAS 935862- 81-0) (0.31 g; 1.376 mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 48 hours. The reaction mixture was poured into cooled water, acidified with a 6N aqueous solution of HCl and ted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue (500 mg) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, m, 249; mobile phase: 0.1% NH4OH, 3% MeOH, 97% DCM). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness to give 250 mg (56%) intermediate 121. c) Preparation of intermediate 122 O\\S/N\ (CN"‘o / o N N\ H N N HO I j \ \ / N/Nj/LN A mixture of intermediate 121 (200 mg; 0.35 mmol), lithium hydroxide monohydrate (25 mg; 1.04 mmol) in THF (8 mL) and water (2 mL) was stirred at room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was ied with a 3N aqueous solution of HCI. The precipitate was filtered, washed with water, then E120 and dried under vaccum to give 200 mg (quantitative) of intermediate 122.
Example A38 t? / Ot-‘Lq r a) Preparation of intermediate 124 H ylamine (1.4 mL; 9.78 mmol), p—toluenesulfonyl chloride (1.86 g; 9.78 mmol) and 4—dimethylaminopyridine (99 mg; 0.815 mmol) were added successively to a solution of 3—[[(1,1-dimethylethyl)dimethylsilyl]oxy](hydroxymethyl)—, (3R,5S)—2-pyrrolidinone (CAS 13114061) (2 g; 8.15 mmol) in DCM (20 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow and, the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 18 hours. The on mixture was diluted with DCM and washed with a 10% aqueous solution of K2003. The organic layer was decanted, dried over MgSO4, filtered and evaporated to s. The residue (400 mg) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15—40um, 24g; mobile phase: gradient from 100% DCM, 0% MeOH to 97% DCM, 3% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 2.48 g of ediate 124 (76%). b) ation of intermediates 125 and 126 /S1\ (($10R / /o / N\ N Sig/[5NN\ / 0\ intermediate 125 \ intermediate 126 NaH (105 mg; 2.629 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 7 (500 mg; 1.314 mmol) in DMF (15 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow. The reaction was stirred at 5°C for 15 minutes. A solution of ediate 124 (1 g; 2.629 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) was added over a 2 hours period and the reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was poured onto iced water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, washed with brine (twice), dried over MgSO4, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The e (1 .49) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15—40pm, 300g; mobile phase: 0.1% NH4OH, 5% iPrOH, 95% DCM). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 300 mg (37%) of intermediate 125 and 540 mg (56%) of intermediate 126.
Analogous preparation of intermediates 127 and 128 O\ 0\ intermediate 127 and intermediate 128 ng from intermediate 6 and intermediate 124 Example A39 a) Preparation of ediate 130 Methylmagnesium bromide (36.91 mL; 36.91 mmol) was added se at 5°C under N2 flow to a solution of 2-formyl-N,N-dimethyl-1H-imidazolesulfonamide (CA8 167704—98-5) (5 g; 24.60 mmol) in EtZO (250 mL). The reaction was allowed to raise room temperature and stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was partionned between water and EtOAc. The organic layer was dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness to give 5.09 g (66%) of intermediate 130 (70% of purity based on 1H NMR). b) Preparation of intermediate 131 Eth (6.65 mL; 46.43 mmol), methanesulfonyl de (2.16 mL; 27.86 mmol) and lithium chloride (2.95 g; 69.64 mmol) were added successively at 5°C under N2 flow to a solution of intermediate 130 (5.09 g; 23.21 mmol) in THF (127 mL) and the reaction mixture was d at room temperature for 4 hours. The reaction mixture was poured into ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-45 pm, 80g; mobile phase: 100% DCM). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness to give 3.26 g (84%) of intermediate 131.
Example A40 Preparation of intermediate 132 Methanesulfonyl chloride (0.13 mL; 1.64 mmol) was added se at 5°C under N2 flow to a on of compound 145 (0.275 g; 0.55 mmol) and triethylamine (0.31 mL; 2.18 mmol) in DCM (5 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at 5°C for 2 hours, poured out into iced water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was separated, dried over M9804, filtered and the solvent was evaporated to dryness at room temperature to give 376 mg of intermediate 132 which was used without purification for the next step.
Example A41 a) Preparation of intermediate 135 NaH (1.55 g; 38.65 mmol) was added dropwise to at 5°C under N2 flow a on of 4,4,5,5-tetramethyl(1H-pyrazolyl)-1,3,2-dioxaborolane (5 g; 25.77 mmol) in DMF (40 mL). The reaction was d at 5°C for 1 hour, then a solution of N-(3- bromopropyl)-phthalimide (11 g; 41.23 mmol) in DMF (10 mL) was added dropwise. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 4 hours, poured into iced water and extracted with EtOAc (two times). The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and the solvent was evaporated. The residue (11.8 g) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 20-45um, 450g; mobile phase: 62% heptane, 3% MeOH, 35% AcOEt). The product fractions were collected and ated to dryness to give 2.8 g (29%) of intermediate 135. :i/ \léo Cl /N /Nj/[>NI b) Preparation of ediate 136 T\:E~ A solution of intermediate 5a (1.6 g; 6.48 mmol), intermediate 135 (2.6 g; 6.48 mmol) in a 2M aqueous on of sodium carbonate (16 mL; 32.4 mmol) and 1,2- dimethoxyethane (65 mL) was degassed with N2 for 15 minutes. Then, PdC|2(dppf).DCM (0.474 g; 0.65 mmol) was added. The reaction e was refluxed for 1h30, cooled to room temperature, poured out into water, filtered over a pad of ® and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried over M9804, filtered, and the solvent was evaporated untill dryness. The residue (2.6 g) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 20-45pm, 4509; mobile phase: gradient from 0.1% NH4OH, 1% MeOH, 99% DCM to 0.1% NH4OH, 98% DCM, 2% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness to give 1 g (37%) of intermediate 136.
/O NH N N :\ 0) Preparation of intermediate 137 °\ A solution of HCI 4M in 1,4-dioxane (0.06 mL; 0.24 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 136 (1 g; 2.39 mmol) in n-propanol (15 mL). 2—fluoro-3,5—dimethoxyaniline (0.82 g; 4.78 mmol) was added and the reaction e was heated at 100°C for 18 hours. The reaction mixture was poured into iced water, basified with an aqueous solution of NH4OH and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was dried over MgSO4, filtered and evaporated till dryness. The residue (1.84 g) was dissolved in DCM. The precipitate was filtered and dried to give 0.81 g (61%) of intermediate 137. The filtrate was concentrated and the resulting residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-40um, 409; mobile phase: 0.1% NH4OH, 2% MeOH, 98% DCM).
The product ons were collected and evaporated to dryness to give additional 0.479 g (36%) of intermediate 137. d) ation of intermediate 138 Intermediate 137 (1.2 g, 2.17 mmol) and hydrazine monohydrate (1 mL, 21.7 mmol) in EtOH (8 mL) were heated at 80°C for 2 hours. The reaction mixture was cooled down, poured into cooled water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to s to give 1 g of intermediate 138 which was used without further purification in the next step.
Example A42 O>/—wo/“3° 3) Preparation of intermediate 141 NaH (1.88 g; 47.2 mmol) was added to a solution of 1H-[1,2,4]triazolecarboxylic acid methyl ester (5 g; 39.3 mmol) in DMF (60 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at 25°C for 20 minutes followed by 1 hour at 70°C. 1-(Tert-butoxycarbonyl) (methanesulfonyloxy)azetidine (CAS: 1416993) was added and the reaction mixture was heated at 70°C for 48 hours. The solution was cooled to 0°C and the ble material was removed by filtration. The filtrate was diluted with DCM and washed with water, brine, dried over Na2804, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by tography over silica gel (mobile phase: eum ether/ethyl acetate 1/5) to give 2 g (18%) of intermediate 141. pox? b) Preparation of intermediate 142 Sodium borohydrlde (1.07 g; 28.3 mmol) was added at 0°C to a solution of intermediate 141 (2 g; 7.09 mmol) in MeOH (50 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at 25°C for 1 hour, then refluxed for 40 hours. The reaction was cooled to 0°C and water (50 ml) was slowly added. The solution was extracted with DCM. The organic layer were dried over NaZSO4, filtered and evaporated to s. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (mobile phase: OH 30/1) to give 0.781 g (43%) of intermediate 142 o N/N 7K my 0 o c) Preparation of ediate 143 esulfonyl chloride (0.27 mL; 3.461 mmol) was added dropwise at 5°C under N2 flow to a solution of intermediate 142 (440 mg; 1.73 mmol) and triethylamine (0.72 ml; .191 mmol) in DCM (15 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight, poured into ice and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was decanted, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness yielding 500 mg (87%) of intermediate 143 which was used without further purification in the next step. d) Preparation of intermediate144 NaH (168 mg; 4.2 mmol) was added to a on of intermediate 7 (798 mg; 2.1 mmol) in DMF (21 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow. The reaction mixture was stirred at 5°C for 30 minutes. A solution of ediate 143 (1.21 g; 3.66 mmol) in DMF (7 mL) was added at °C under N2 flow over a 2 hours period and the reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was poured onto iced water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, washed with brine (twice), dried over MgSO4, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The e was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, m, 409; mobile phase: 0.5% NH4OH, 5% MeOH, 95% DCM). The product fractions were coiiected and evaporated to dryness yielding 560 mg (60%) of intermediate 144.
Example A43 t1uN. 1 ID Preparation of intermediate 146 Glycidyl isopropyl ether (207 uL; 0.1.64 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 26 (500 mg; 1.37 mmol) and cesium carbonate (889.36 mg; 2.73 mmol) in ACN (7.5 mL) and the reaction mixture was stirred at 80°C overnight. The reaction mixture was poured into an aqueous solution of 10% K2003 and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804 and evaporated to dryness. The crude product was ed by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH m, 24g Grace; mobile phase: gradient from 98% DCM, 2% MeOH, 0.2% NH4OH to 97% DCM, 3% MeOH, 0.3% NH4OH). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The residue (200 mg) was crystallized from ACN. The itate was filtered, washed with ACN then EtZO and dried to afford 44 mg of intermediate 146 (7%). MR: 150°C r). The mother liquor was evaporated to give additional 156 mg (24%) of intermediate 146.
B. Pre aration of the com ounds Example B1 /LNH o “N “@115N rd Preparation of compound 1 To a solution of intermediate 6 (498 mg ; 1.37 mmol) in 2-methyltetrahydrofuran (15 ml) and water (1 ml) were added at room temperature, 1-butanaminium, N,N,N-tributyl- bromide (1:1) (111 mg ; 0.34 mmol) and KOH (1.36 g ; 20.6 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at 50°C for 1 hour and N-(2-ch|oroethy|)propanamine hydrochloride (304 mg ; 1.9 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at 50°C for 22 hours. The reaction mixture was cooled down to room temperature, poured out onto water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried (M9804), filtered and trated under reduced pressure. The obtained residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (5pm, mobile phase, gradient from 0.2% NH4OH, 98% DCM, 2% MeOH to 1.1% NH4OH, 88% DCM, 11% MeOH). The desired product fraction were collected and ated till dryness. The residue was taken up in EtZO to afford 128 mg (21%) of compound 1.
F N\ I N /o NU \/N N / Analogous preparation of nd 2 Example B2 o F $ — N -0 F CW1“ Preparation of compound 3 N‘ and compound 4 N To a solution of intermediate 12 (716 mg ; 1.8 mmol) in tetrahydromethylfuran (15 ml) and water (1 ml) were added at room temperature, 1-butanaminium, N,N,N-tributyl-, bromide (290 mg ; 2.7 mmol) and KOH (1.8 g; 27 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at 50°C for 1 hour and N-(2-chloroethyl)-methylamine hydrochloride (252 mg ; 2.7 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred for 20 hours at 50°C. The on mixture was cooled down to room temperature, poured out onto water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried (M9804), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (15-40pm 3009; mobile phase, gGradient from 0.5% NH4OH, 95% DCM, 5% MeOH to 0.5% NH4OH, 90% DCM, 10% MeOH). The desired product fractions were collected, concentrated and residue (1.3g) was purified by l SFC on e phase 0.3% isopropylamine, 82% C02, 18% MeOH). The two desired product fractions were collected, evaporated till dryness to provide Fraction 1 (83 mg, 10%) and Fraction 2 (226 mg, 26%).
Fraction 1 (was taken up in EtZO to afford 42 mg of compound 4(MP:174°C (DSC)).
Fraction 2 was taken up in EtZO to afford 154 mg of compound 3(MP: 134°C (DSC)) C22H23F2N702.0.97H20.0.027Et20.
Alternatively, compound 3 and 4 were also prepared as s : A solution of KOH (12.4 g; 188 mmol) in 2-methyltetrahydrofuran (200 mL) was stirred for 10 minutes at room temperature. Water (20 mL), intermediate 12 (5 g; 12.6 mmol) followed by tetrabutyiammonium bromide (1.62 g; 5 mmol) were added at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred at 50°C for 1 hour and oroethyl)- methylamine hydrochloride (3.3 g; 25 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred for 24 hours at 50°C. The reaction mixture was cooled down to room ature, poured into water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure.
The residue (5.6 g) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH, 20- 45um, 4509; mobile phase: gradient from 0.1% NH4OH, 90% DCM, 10% MeOH to 0.5% NH4OH, 90% DCM, 10% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated to dryness ing 0.6g (10%) of compound 4 and 2g of an intermediate residue which was crystailized from EtZO to give 1.64 g (29%) of compound 3 . M.P.: 159°C (DSC). 022H23F2N702 . 0,09 EtZO . 0,02 DCM.
Analogous preparation of compounds 107 and 108 starting from ediate 30 compound 107 and compound 108 Analogous preparation of nd 236 and 237 starting from intermediate NH2 NH2 S / Kl / N N I I \N I I \N o N N N / o N N N / / N/ \ N/ /° /° compound 236 and compound 237 Example 82a 611% Preparation of compound 44 Water (0. 5 mL), intermediate 17 (0.17 g; 0.51 mmol) followed by tetrabutylammonium bromide (41 mg; 0.13 mmol) were added at room temperature to a mixture of potassium hydroxide (0.50 g; 7.63 mmol) in 2—methyltetrahydrofuran (5 mL). The on mixture was stirred for 10 minutes at room temperature, then stirred at 50°C for 1 hour and (2- chloroethyl)—methylamine hydrochloride (CAS 45354) (0.119 g; 0.92 mmol) was added. The reaction e was stirred for 24 hours at 50°C. The reaction mixture was cooled down to room temperature, poured into water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was ed by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical SiOH, 10um, 60g; mobile phase: gradient from 0.5% NH4OH, 97% DCM, 3% MeOH to 0.5% NH4OH, 95% DCM, 5% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to WO 61080 give 30 mg (15%) which was taken up EtZO and evaporated to give 29 mg (14%) of compound 44 M.P.: 80°C (gum, Kofler).
Example BB F N\ /o N /N \ N\ N\ l/ U/ F N Preparation of compound 5 O\ and /LNH \ ~/ /o N \ N\ Nj/E/UN compound 6 0\ To a solution of intermediate 12 (400 mg ; 1.0 mmol) in tetrahydromethylfuran (10 ml) and water (0.66 ml) were added at room ature, 1—butanaminium, N,N,N- tributyl-bromide (81 mg; 0.25 mmol) and KOH (994 mg; 15.1 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at 50°C for 1 hour and N-(2-chloroethyl)propanamine hydrochloride (222 mg ; 1.4 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred for 22 hours at 50°C. The reaction mixture was cooled down to room temperature, poured out onto water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried (M9804), filtered and concentrated under d pressure. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (15-40um 909; mobile phase, 0.5% NH4OH, 95% DCM, % MeOH). The d fractions were collected, concentrated and residue (165 mg) was ed by achiral SFC (20pm 430g, mobile phase 0.3% isopropylamine, 75% C02, % MeOH). The product fractions were collected and evaporated as Fraction 1 (120 mg) and Fraction 2, yielding 16 mg (3%) of compound 6. Fraction 1 was taken up in EtZO to afford 107 mg (22%) of compound 5(MP: 183°C (DSC)).
Analogous preparation according to procedure 82 or B3 of compounds 37 and 2 starting from intermediate 7 /LNH ANH / / F 3 Nj/[éN~\ F 5 ~\ /0 N\ N /o N N\ Nj/E/N 0\ °\ nd 37 and Compound 2 Analogous preparation ing to procedure BZ or B3 of compounds 38 and 39 starting from intermediate 7 R / F N\ I / N HN /O N\ N F Kl N{ (1) N / N\ N I / Nj/E/qN/ o\ /0 compound 38 and compound 39 Analogous ation according to procedure B2 or B3 of compounds 67 and 68 starting from intermediate 12 NH NH 2 2 / / F N\ F N\ I I | I O N N N /N O N N N /N / \ \ / U\\ F N F N/ Compound 67 and compound 68 Analogous ation according to procedure B2 or BB of compounds 69 and 70 starting from intermediate 20 HN/ HN/ / / Cl H Nj/EyNN\ | c: H N\ | I oUU\ N N N N /N N/ O\©:N \ U\ F F N/ nd 69 and compound 70 Analogous preparation according to ure B2 or B3 of compounds 81 and 82 starting from intermediate 22 HN/ HN/ / / | Cl N\ | c: N\ I I o N N N /N o N N N /N U\\ / U\\ / Cl N Cl N /o /0 Compound 81 and compound 82 Analogous preparation according to procedure 82 or BB of compounds 83 and 84 starting from intermediate 19 HN/ HN/ / / c: H NIL”N\ Cl 1) N\ N N N N N ’/N Cl N/ \ Cl N/ /O /0 Compound 83 and nd 84 Analogous preparation according to procedure BZ or BB of compounds 167 and 168 starting from intermediate 7 NH2 NH2 / / F Nj/EyNN\ I F N\ I I I o N N o N N Nj/LN compound 167 and compound 168 2012/052672 Example B4 ation of compound 7 \ To a solution of intermediate 6 (352 mg ; 0.97 mmol) in DMF (10 ml), was added under N2 at 5°C, NaH (39 mg ; 0.97 mmol, 60% in mineral oil). The reaction mixture was stirred at 5°C for 45 minutes then 2—(methoxymethyl)—oxirane (0.082 ml; 0.92 mmol) was added dropwise at 5°C. The reaction mixture was stirred them at 5°C then allowed to reach room temperature. The reaction was stirred at 80°C overnight. The reaction mixture was cooled down, poured out onto ice—water and the reaction mixture was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried (MgSO4), filtered and trated under reduced re. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (5pm; mobile phase, gGradient from 100% DCM to 0.8% NH4OH, 92% DCM, 8% MeOH). The desired fractions were collected and were purified by achiral SFC on (2 ethylpyridine 6pm, mobile phase, 0.3% isopropylamine, 78% 002, 22% MeOH).
The product fraction weres collected and the solvent was evaporated, yielding 46 mg (10%) of compound 7 (MP:65°C (Kofler)).
F F HO /N.
/ / Analogous ation of compound 8 Example B4a RS / F OH | ’N\ o N N N /N U\/\ N Preparation of compound 29 and or:3 RS / I F OH IN\ 0 N N N /N U\// N preparation of compound 30 NaH (56 mg; 1.39 mmol) was added to a solution of ediate 7(560 mg; 1.47 mmol) in DMF (25 mL) under N2 at 5°C. The reaction mixture was stirred at 5°C for 30 s then 1,2-epoxy-3,3,3-trifluoropropane (CAS 3591) (0.12 mL; 1.39 mmol) was added drop wise at 5°C. The reaction mixture was d for 1 hour at 5°C, then d to reach room temperature and stirred for 6 hours. The reaction mixture was poured into ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and concentrated. The residue (929 mg) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Sphericai Silica, 5pm, 150x30.0mm; mobile phase: gradient from 71% Heptane, 1% MeOH, 28% EtOAc to 0% Heptane, 20% MeOH, 80% EtOAc). The product fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated to give 23 mg (3%) of compound 29, M.P.: gum at 100°C (kofler), and 66 mg (9%) of compound . M.P.: 202°C (kofler) Example B4b F OH I ”(N /O N%[N;[N\ / \ N/ Preparation of compound 31 To a on of intermediate 7 (1 g ; 2.51 mmol) in DMF (25 mL) was added under N2 at °C, NaH 60% in mineral oil (95.4 mg ; 2.38 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at °C for 45 minutes then oxy-3,3,3-trif|uoropropane (0.21 mL ; 2.38 mmol) was added drop wise at 5°C. The reaction mixture was stirred for 1 hour at 5°C, overnight at room temperature and 3 hours at 50°C. The reaction mixture was poured into ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and trated under reduced pressure.
The residue (1 .699) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15- 40um, 309; Mobile phase: 20% eptanes, 80% EtOAc). The t fractions were mixed and the solvent was concentrated to afford 92 mg of an intermediate fraction which was ed by achiral SFC on (2 ETHYLPYRIDINE 6pm 150x21 .2mm; Mobile phase: 80% C02, 20% MeOH) to give 40 mg of a compound which was was crystallized from EtZO. The precipitate was filtered and dried to afford 35mg (3%) of compound 31.
M.P.:200°C (kofier) Example 840 Preparation of compound 8 and preparation of compoundCF33 / and studSorRKt\ compound 34 NaH (99 mg; 2.46 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 6(940 mg; 2.59 mmol) in DMF (25 mL) under N2 at 5°C. The reaction mixture was stirred at 5°C for 30 minutes then 1,2-epoxy-3,3,3-trifluoropropane (0.21 mL; 2.46 mmol) was added drop wise at °C. The reaction mixture was d for 1 hour at 5°C, then allowed to reach room temperature. The reaction was then stirred at 50°C for 15 hours. The reaction e was poured into ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated till s. The residue (1.41 g) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-40um; mobile phase 0.1% NH4OH, 98% DCM, 2%MeOH to 0.1% NH4OH, 97% DCM, 3% MeOH). The pure ons were ted and evaporated to dryness. The residue (0.59 g) was purified by achiral SFC (DIETHYLAMINOPROPYL, 5pm, 150x21.2mm; mobile phase: 93% C02, 7% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness ng 219 mg (18%) of compound 8. 300 mg of compound 32 ned from 7.4 mmol of intermediate 6) were purified by chiral SFC (CHlRALPAK AD-H, 50m, 250x20mm; mobile phase: 60% C02, 40% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness to give 2 fractions: - Fraction A: 135 mg which were llized from EtZO to give 112 mg (3%) of compound 33 . M.P.: 208°C (DSC) - Fraction B: 147 mg which were crystallized from EtZO to give 127 mg (4%) of compound 34 . M.P.: 208°C (DSC).
Example B4d RS / I F OH N\ o N N U\/ N/Nj/E//N Preparation of compound 50 / and RS / I F OH N\ I N o N N / \ / preparation of compound 51 NaH (201 mg; 5.02 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 12 (2 g; 5.02 mmol) in DMF (35 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow. The reaction e was stirred at 5°C for 30 minutes, then a solution of glycidyl methyl ether (0.42 mL; 4.77 mmol) in DMF (15 mL) was added drop wise at 5°C. The mixture was stirred at 5°C for 1 hour, then allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred at 80°C overnight. The reaction mixture was cooled down, poured into ice-water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The crude t was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-40um, 3009; mobile phase: 0.2% NH4OH, 98% DCM, 2% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness to give 250 mg of fraction 1 e) and 60 mg of on 2 (impure).
Fraction 1 was purified by i SFC (2 ETHYLPYRlDlNE, 6pm, 150x21.2mm; mobile phase 80% C02, 20% MeOH). The residue was taken up in ACN and crystallized from ACN. The precipitate was filtered, washed with EtZO and dried to give 78 mg (3%) of compound 50 . M.P.: 162—163°C (Kofler).
Fraction 2 was purified by achirai SFC (2 ETHYLPYRlDlNE, 6pm, 150x21 .2mm; mobile phase 80% C02, 20% MeOH). The e was taken up in ACN and crystallized from ACN. The precipitate was filtered, washed with EtZO and dried to give 28 mg (1%) of compound 51 . M.P.: 180°C (Kofler).
Example B4e Preparation of compound 59, 58 and 60 / / compound 59 compound 58 (El l/Co N/ ° 111%I;(INTC compound 60 and compound 57 NaH (105 mg; 2.63 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 7 (1 g; 2.63 mmol) in DMF (15 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow. The reaction mixture was stirred at 5°C for 30 minutes, then a solution of glycidyl methyl ether (0.22 mL; 2.50 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) was added drop wise at 5°C. The mixture was stirred at 5°C for 1 hour, then allowed to warm to room temperature and d at 80°C overnight. The reaction mixture was cooled down, poured into ice-water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to s. The crude product was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-40pm, 300g; mobile phase: gradient from 0.1% NH4OH, 98% DCM, 2% MeOH to 0.1% NH4OH, 96% DCM, 4% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness to give 2 fractions: - Fraction A: 243 mg of compound 57 which was purified by chiral SFC LPAK AD-H, 50m, 250x20mm; mobile phase: 60% C02, 40% iPrOH).
The product fractions were collected and evaporated to give 51 mg (4%) of compound 58 ; M.P.: 94-95°C (Kofler); and 51 mg (4%) of compound 59 ; M.P.: C (Kofler).
- Fraction B: 227 mg of of compound 60 which was purified by achiral SFC (2 ETHYLPYRlDlNE 6pm 150x21.2mm; mobile phase 85% C02, 15% MeOH. The product fractions were mixed and the solvent was evaporated. The resulting residue was taken up in EtZO. The precipitate was filtered and dried yielding 76 mg (6%) of compound 60 . M.P.: 114°C (kofler) Analogous preparation of compounds 61, 62, 63 and 64 ng from intermediate 12 compound 63 and nd 64 Example B4e1 Preparation of compound 75 ,76, 77, 78 and 79 Rs / OH 0t F OH N\ / I N F N\ o N N N / | 1 U\ N o N /N N\ / /o /0 Compound 75 compound 76 Compound 77 compound 78 and compound 79 NaH (210 mg; 5.26 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 7 (2 g; 5.26 mmol) in DMF (35 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow. The reaction mixture was stirred at 5°C for 30 minutes,then, a solution of glycidyl isopropyl ether (0.63 mL; 5.00 mmol) in DMF (15 mL) was added drop wise at 5°C. The mixture was stirred at 5°C for 1 hour, then allowed to warm to room temperature and d at 80°C ght. The reaction mixture was cooled down, poured into ter and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-40um, 3009; mobile phase: 0.3% NH4OH, 97% DCM, 3% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated to give 2 fractions: - Fraction 1: 600 mg of an intermediate residue which was purified by achiral SFC (2—ETHYLPYRlDlNE, 6pm, 150x21.2mm; mobile phase: 90% C02, 10% MeOH).
The product fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated to give 2 ons: 0 Fraction A: 271 mg which were crystallized from ACN to give, after filtration and , 171 mg (7%) of compound 77 (M.P.: C, Kofler) 0 Fraction B: 82 mg which were taken up in EtZO to afford after Et20 washing, filtration and drying 59 mg (2%) of compound 76 .
M.P.: 137- 138°C (Kofler).
- Fraction 2: 1.35 g of an impure residue which was ed by l SFC (2- ETHYLPYRlDlNE, 6pm, 150x21.2mm; mobile phase: 85% C02, 15% MeOH).
The t fractions were collected and the t was ated to dryness.
The resulting compound (404 mg) was crystallized from ACN. The precipitate was filtered, washed with EtZO and dried yielding 390 mg (15%) of compound 75 M.P.: 148-149°C (Kofler).
Compound 75 was purified by chiral SFC LPAK AD—H, 5pm, 250x20mm; mobile phase: 60% C02, 40% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to give 2 fractions: 0 Fraction C: 169 mg of a compound which was dissolved in ACN and crystallized from ACN. The precipitate was washed with Et20 and dried to give 92 (4%) mg of compound 78 (M.P.: 143-144°C, Kofler) 0 Fraction D: 161 mg of a compound which was dissolved in ACN and crystallized from ACN. The precipitate was washed with Etgo and dried to give 86 mg (3%) of compound 79 (M.P.: 142°C, Kofler).
Examgle B5 Preparation of compound 9 N_ N\ Under N2, NaH (142 mg ; 3.55 mmol, 60% in mineral oil) was added to a solution of intermediate 7 (450 mg; 1.2 mmol) in DMF (10 ml) at 5°C. The on mixture was stirred 30 minutes at 5°C and a solution of 2-(chloromethyl)pyrlmidine (390.5 mg ; 2.4 mmol) in DMF (5 ml) was added. The reaction mixture was d to reach room temperature and stirred for 20 hours. The reaction mixture was poured out onto ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried (M9804), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. The obtained residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (15-40um 150g, mobile phase 40% Heptane, 50% EtOAc. 10% MeOH (+10% NH4OH)). The desired fractions were collected, concentrated under reduced pressure to provide 430 mg (77%) of compound 9. This nd was taken up in EtZO, a solid was filtered and dried to afford 305 mg of compound 9 (MP:227°C (DSC)).
Analogous preparation of compound 10 starting from ediate 12 Analogous preparation of compound 11 \ starting from intermediate 12 | Nj/Ex/NN\ oUUN N\ Analogous preparation of compound 12 starting from intermediate 6 0/ N: ”’1 N\ in N _O F /_\ \ / T/ Analogous preparation of compound 13 N‘ starting from intermediate? / ”jg/ha o N‘ o O~ N _o /_\ \ / fil/ Analogous preparation of nd 14 N‘ starting from intermediate 6 Analogous preparation of compound 15 starting from intermediate 12 /N\ 1,0 ’/S\ 0 59N \ F U UN N\ Nj/[éN Analogous preparation of compound 28 F starting from intermediate 14 /N\ 00 ’IS\ I Cl (KNN/\> N\ o N N\ Nj/Ey" Analogous preparation of compound 43 starting from ediate 16 /N\ ,,0 ’,s\ 0 N (KN/>\ / Cl N\ l l o N /N N\ /N Analogous preparation of compound 66 C' N ng from intermediate 19 /N\ ,,0 l (k?N \ N\ O N UN/N\ Nj/CflN Analogous preparation of compound 72 starting from intermediate 6 WO 61080 N\ «,0 N N‘ o N /N \ Nj/[yN Analogous preparation of compound 74 F N starting from intermediate 20 °fij€1 /"HN/Q / Analogous preparation of compound 80 starting from intermediate 7 :13 N/ Analogous preparation of compound 99 / starting from intermediate 22 Analogous ation of compound 105 starting from intermediate 29 WO 61080 Analogous preparation of compound 110 starting from intermediate 7 ”f” / I F M 1 N N N N / / \ \ N/ . /0 Analogous preparation of compound 128 starting from intermediate 7 F N NIL”N\ i l o N N / \ \ N/ Analogous preparation of compound 131 starting from intermediate 7 \N/\ \ \,~ F N N‘ i / N o N N N / / \ \ N/ Analogous preparation of compound 132 ng from intermediate 7 Analogous preparation of nd 136 starting from intermediate 7 0\ IN, NI \0 £\F / F N I Nj/QNN‘l o N /N \ N/ Analogous preparation of nd 138 starting from intermediate 7 /N\ 00 ,,S\ (I) RN N N N E j / \ \ N/ Analogous preparation of compound 153 starting from intermediate 54 A“fl / 0/ ~\ l I N oQupN N N / / \ Analogous preparation of compound 174. starting from intermediate 6.
/N\ 00/> (111%O//\N Analogous preparation of nd 176 starting from intermediate 60 1111116 Analogous preparation of compound 177 starting from intermediate 7 \N /N o N N UU/ Nj/Q\ Analogous ation of compound 183 starting from intermediate 61 Analogous preparation of compound 191 /N\ //O O K0N \ N F N / o NU\N N \ \ / starting from intermediate 68 ous preparation of compound 199 starting from ediate 71 Analogous preparation of compound 201 starting from intermediate 73 Analogous preparation of compound 203 starting from intermediate 74 Analogous preparation of compound 210 starting from intermediate 83 /N\ ,0 O N \ i (Q / l“ O N /N N\ \ \ N/ Analogous preparation of compound 212 starting from intermediate 86 and ediate 87 /N~ f? Analogous ation of compound 216 starting from intermediate 89 Analogous preparation of compound 220 starting from intermediate 7 Analogous preparation of compound 224 starting from intermediate 84 F o N\ o N N N [/N / \ \ / N/ Analogous preparation of compound 225 starting from intermediate 7 Analogous preparation of compound 241 starting from intermediate 110 Analogous preparation of compound 260 (cis) ng from intermediate 117 ous preparation of compound 274 starting from intermediate 129 Analogous ation of compound 281 starting from intermediate 6 and intermediate 131 O\\S/\N\ / \\ / N 0 I QY 0upN N\ / rNj/I://N Analogous preparation of compound 288 starting from intermediate 7 and intermediate 131 (\)\ /N\ /S§O </\N/ 0 N N\ N\ N0° ol / I F N Analogous preparation of compound 292 starting from ediate 133 ?\ /\N\ /S:O 0UN N\ N\ N0° / NI Analogous preparation of compound 294 starting from ediate 134 \N ‘1 / 07/S\N§ NH2 I F k” NJJ O N N\ N\ \ / N/ Analogous preparation of compound 296 starting from intermediate 138 2012/052672 Example B5a Preparation of compounds 102 and and 101 02:3 o ,S N Xi’é‘i”3 V0 0’13 W4] K (k: N [/N (I)fij .1”.Nj/CN Compound 102 and compound 101 NaH (49 mg; 1.22 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 25 (0.38 g; 0.82 mmol) in DMF (8 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow. The reaction mixture was stirred for 30 minutes at °C and a solution of 2-(chloromethyl)—N,N-dimethyl-lH—imidazole—l-su1fonamide (CAS 9358620) (0.219 g; 0.98 mmol) in DMF (2 mL) was added drop wise. The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred for 4 hours. The reaction mixture was partitioned n water and EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The e was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH, 15-40um, 40g; mobile phase: gradient from 99% DCM 1% MeOH 0.1% NH4OH to 95% DCM 5% MeOH 0.5% NH4OH). The product fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated to give 0.294 g (55%) of compound 102 (orange oil) and 83 mg (14%) of compound 101 w oil).
Example B5b Preparation of nds 254 and 255 F N\ o N N N [/N FU\/N compound 254 F N\ o N N I N /N \ N/ compound 255 NaH (100 mg; 2.51 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 12 (500 mg; 1.255 mmol) in DMF (11 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow. The reaction mixture was stirred at 5°C for minutes. Then, a solution of iodomethane (195 uL; 3.138 mmol) in DMF (4 mL) was added at 5°C under N2 flow over a 2 hours period and the reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and d overnight. The reaction mixture was poured onto iced water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, washed with brine (twice), dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue (530 mg) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (spherical , 5pm 150x30.0mm; mobile phase: gradient from 98% DCM, 2% MeOH, 0.2% NH4OH to 92% DCM, 8% MeOH, 0.8% NH4OH). The t fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 2 fractions: - Fraction 1: 90 mg of a compound which was crystallized from ACN/EtZO. The itate was filtered and dried to give 60 mg of compound 255 (11%), MP=199°C r).
- Fraction 2: 300 mg of a compound which was crystallized from ACN/Etgo. The precipitate was filtered and dried to give 230 mg of compound 254 (44%), MP=210°C (Kofler).
WO 61080 Analogous preparation of compound 256 and 257 starting from intermediate 12 I NM 0 N / UK / / / F N compound 256 /o N§£N:[N\ / \ / F N compound 257 Example B6 0 F g o: E N WVN /N Preparation of compound 16 N“ and O F —oQRka/V F W\N / ,fll/ N compound 17 To a solution of a e of intermediate 10a and 10b (429 mg ; 0.75 mmol) in THF (10 ml) was added dropwise at room temperature, 1-butanaminium, tributyl- fluoride (0.9 ml ; 0.90 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours.
The mixture was poured out into ice water and EtOAc and the mixture was basified with an aquous solution of K2C03 (10%). The reaction mixture was extracted, the organic layer was washed with brine, dried (M9804), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (5pm,. mobile phase, gradient from, 100% DCM, to 0.8% NH4OH, 92% DCM, 8% MeOH). Two product fractions were collected and trated under reduced pressure to afford 91 mg (26%) of compound 17 as Fraction 1 and 117 mg (34%) of comound 16 as Fraction 2.
Fraction 1 was taken up in Eth, trlturated, filtered and dried to afford 38 mg of nd 17 (MP:206°C (DSC)) in EtZO triturated, filtered . Fraction 2 was taken up and dried to afford 53 mg of compound 16 (MP:208°C (DSC)).. nd 19 N" Analogous preparation of compound 20 Analogous preparation of compound 21 / Analogous preparation of compound 40 starting from intermediate 15 Analogous preparation of nd 145 starting from intermediate 50 l H / l‘ o N /N N\ \ ous preparation of compound 213 starting from intermediate 88 Example B6a N’\\ KKN/N / o N N N [/N \ \ / / Preparation of compound 204 A 1M solution of tetrabutylammonium fluoride in THF (0.31 mL; 1 mmol) was added to a solution of ediate 76 (0.08 g; 0.13 mmol) in THF (3 mL) at 10°C. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours, poured into cold water, basified with a 10% aqueous solution of K2C03 and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with a 10% aqueous solution of K2C03, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue (10 mg) was taken up with Et20 and evaporated to give 0.006 g (9%) of compound 204.
Analogous preparation of compound 205 starting from intermediate 77 emfN/\N/fOH Example B6b Preparation of compounds 218 and 219 ©1119@1115U .OZNO compound 218 and compound 219 A 1M solution of tetrabutylammonium fluoride in THF (3.26 mL; 3.26 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediates 92 and 93 (415 mg; 0.65 mmol) in THF (20 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight, poured into ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, m, 309; mobile phase: 0.1% NH4OH, 3% MeOH, 97% DCM). The product ons were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 2 fractions: - Fraction 1: 80 mg (23%) of compound 218 ;M.P.: 130°C (gum, Kofler) — Fraction 2: 136 mg of an impure compound which was ed by achiral SFC (2 ETHYLPYRIDINE, 6pm, 150x21 .2mm; mobile phase: 85% COZ, 15% MeOH).
The product fractions were ted and evaporated to dryness ng 18 mg (5%) of compound 219 M.P.: 112°C (gum, Kofler).
Analogous preparation of compounds 247 and 53 starting from intermediate 111 01 i? F R F /O MEN/\[N /O O\ 0\ compound 247 and compound 53 Example B6c F R N\ I N /o N IN\ N\ / / N/ Preparation of nd 233 A 1M solution of tetrabutylammonium fluoride in THF (1.03 mL; 1.03 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 103 (70 mg; 0.10 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (1 mL) and the reaction mixture was refluxed overnight. The reaction mixture was poured into a 10% aqueous solution of K2C03 and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, ed and evaporated to dryness. The crude product was ed by chromatography over silica gel-(spherical silica, 5pm, 150x30.0mm; mobile phase: nt from 0.2% NH4OH, 2% MeOH, 98% DCM to 1% NH4OH, 10% MeOH, 90% DCM). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 29 mg (62%) of compound 233. M.P.:194°C (Kofler).
Example B6d WO 61080 gig:R O N/ /o /<1 UVN N\ N\j/[/\N/ Preparation of compound 269 O\ A mixture of intermediate 126 (450 mg; 0.74 mmol) and a on of 1M tetrabutylammonium fluoride in THF (3.7 mL; 3.702 mmol) in THF (10 mL) was stirred at room temperature overnight. The on mixture was diluted with DCM and quenched with a 10% aqueous solution of K2C03. The organic layer was decanted, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue (420 mg) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-40um, 409; mobile phase: 95% DCM, % MeOH, 0.5% NH4OH). The product fractions were ted and evaporated to dryness. The residue (354 mg) was crystallized from ACN. The precipitate was filtered and dried yielding 324 mg (89%) of compound 269 . M.P.: gum at 160°C (kofier).
S / F E N\ /0 / N\ N Nj/E//N Analogous preparation of compound 270 starting from intermediate 125 s / E N\ /oUN N\ Nj/LN ous preparation of nd 271 starting from intermediate 127 N N/ /ogUN.N\ N N\Hj/E/\N/ Analogous preparation of compound 272 starting from intermediate 128 Example B7 Preparation of intermediate 13 and compound 22 // \ é | / 1):“:“1— I / o N N N \ 0 N U v vN\ N\ N/jfiN— O O / / intermediate 13 and compound 22 Under N2, to a solution of ediate 6 (980 mg ; 2.7 mmol) in DMF (20 ml) was added at 5°C, NaH (217 mg ; 5.4 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred for 30 minutes at 5°C and 3-bromo(trimethylsilyl)—1-propyne (0.97 ml ; 6.2 mmol) was added dropwise. The reaction mixture was stirred for 1hour 30 minutes at 5°C. The reaction mixture was poured out into ice water and extracted with EtOAC. The c layer was washed with brine, dried (M9804), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure.
The obtained residue (1.22 g) is a mixture of intermediate 13 and compound 22. The e was ed by chromatography over silica gel (15-40pm 3009, ). Mobile phase, 60% Heptane, 5% MeOH, 35% EtOAc). The desired fractions were ted, and evaporated to afford 644 mg (59%) of compound 22.
Example 88a ation of compounds 45 and 46 I O F hi NjLN F 8% |\/l /0 N N /o N N Nj/LN 0\ 0\ compound 45 and nd 46 NaH (841 mg; 21.03 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 7 (2 g; 5.26 mmol) in DMF (35 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow. The reaction was stirred at 5°C for 30 minutes. A solution of (S)—5-(Hydroxy-methyl)pyrrolidinone p-toluenesulfonate (CAS 51693-17— ) (2.1 g; 7.89 mmol) in DMF (15 mL) was added at 5°C under N2 flow over a 4 hour period and the reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was quenched with iced water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, dried over MgSO4, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The e was ed by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, -40pm, 509; mobile phase: gradient from 0.1% NH4OH, 98% DCM, 2% MeOH to 0.2% NH4OH, 97% DCM, 3% MeOH). The t fractions were collected and evaporated to give 169 mg (7%) of compound 45 M.P.: 127°C (gum, Kofler) and 157 mg (6%) of compound 46 . M.P.: 131°C (gum, Kofler).
Analogous preparation of compound 158 and 159 starting from intermediate 7 and intermediate 56 0 o / S / F N‘ I Nj/[¢N F N\ o N N o N /N Nj/E4N /0 /0 compound 158 and compound 159 ous preparation of compound 192 and 193 starting from intermediate 12 and intermediate 18 0 0 / R / N / \ \ \ \ l | /0 /0 Compound 192 and compound 193 Analogous preparation of compound 285 and 286 starting from intermediate 2:: 1 fit;2ij cIUL compound 285 and compound 286 Example B8a1 | (Q o N N out\Nj/RN\ ation of compound 49 NaH (552 mg; 13.80 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 6 (2 g; 5.52 mmol) in DMF (35 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow. The reaction was stirred at 5°C for 30 minutes. A solution of (S)(Hydroxy-methyl)pyrrolidinone p-toluenesulfonate (CAS 516935) (3.7 g; 13.80 mmol) in DMF (15 mL) was added at 5°C under N2 flow over a 2 hour period and the reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was quenched with iced water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, dried over MgSO4, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was ed by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 20— 45um, 4509; mobile phase: gradient from 30% e, 15% MeOH, 55% EtOAc to % Heptane, 18% MeOH, 52% . The product fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The residue (375 mg; 15%) was crystallized from ACN/EtZO to give 302 mg (12%) of nd 49 . M.P.:182°C (Kofler).
RS /N\ o~<— /o“@1138N /N /N]/E/N‘<>N_<O Analogous preparation of compound 300 starting from intermediate 140 Example B8b ation of compound 47 and compound 48 compound 47 and compound 48 NaH (502 mg; 12.55 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 12 (2 g; 5.02 mmol) in DMF (35 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow. The reaction was stirred at 5°C for 30 minutes. A on of (S)(Hydroxy—methyl)pyrrolidinone p-toluenesulfonate (CAS 51693-17—5) (2 g; 7.53 mmol) in DMF (15 mL) was added at 5°C under N2 flow over a 1hour period and the reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was quenched with iced water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, dried over M9804, ed and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15- 40pm, 3009; mobile phase: 0.3% NH4OH, 97% DCM, 3% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to give 478 mg (19%) of compound 47 M.P.: 169°C (Kofler) and 1 g (40%) of compound 48 . M.P.: 134°C (gum, Kofler).
Example B80 Preparation of compound 52 and compound 53 /0 O H N H N N/ N/ F F I R I \N I R I \N O N N N / O N N N / U\ \ \ \ N/ / N/ /O /0 compound 52 and compound 53 NaH (79 mg; 1.97 mmol) was added to a solution of ediate 7 (500 mg; 1.31 mmol) in DMF (10 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow. The reaction was stirred at 5°C for 30 minutes. A solution of intermediate 18 (531 mg; 1.97 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) was added at 5°C under N2 flow over a 1 hour period and the reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and d overnight.
The reaction mixture was quenched with iced water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to s. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical , 5pm, 150x30.0mm; mobile. phase: nt from 70% Heptane, 2% MeOH (+10% NH4OH), 28% EtOAc to 0% Heptane, 20% MeOH (+10% NH4OH), 80% EtOAc). The product fractions were collected and ated to give 140 mg (22%), which was crystallized from ACN/DiPE, filtered and dried to give 96 mg (15%) of compound 53 . M.P.: 176°C (Kofler) and 208 mg (33%) of compound 52 . M.P.: 190°C (Kofler).
Analogous preparation of compounds 160 and 161 starting from intermediate 7 and intermediate 57. 0 o \ / \ // N N / R / | F N\ F N\ o “1% N o N /N I Nj/[yN I Nj/[//N /0 /0 compound 160 and compound 161 Example B801 Preparation of compound 54 NaH (83 mg; 2.07 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 6 (500 mg; 1.38 mmol) in DMF (12 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow. The reaction was stirred at 5°C for 30 minutes. A solution of ediate 18 (557 mg; 2.07 mmol) in DMF (3 mL) was added at 5°C under N2 flow over a 1 hour period and the reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was quenched with iced water and extracted with EtOAc. The c layer was decanted, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical Silica, 5pm, 150x30.0mm; mobile phase: gradient from 0.2% NH4OH, 98% DCM, 2% MeOH to 1.3% NH4OH, 87% DCM, 13% MeOH). The t fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 20 mg (3%) of compound 54 . M.P.: 125°C (gum, Kofler).
Example B8d Preparation of compounds 55 and 56 13 13 (f / / F NjLNN‘ | F N‘ I l (f l o N\ N o N /N INjLN /0 /0 nd 55 and compound 56 NaH (113 mg; 2.82 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 12 (750 mg; 1.88 mmol) in DMF (18 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow. The reaction was stirred at 5°C for 30 minutes. A on of 1-[3-[(methylsulfonyl)oxy]propyl]—2-pyrrolidinone (625 mg; 2.824 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) was added at 5°C under N2 flow over a 1 hour period and the reaction e was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred all over the week end. The reaction mixture was poured onto iced water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was ed, washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH, 20-45um, 4509; mobile phase: 95% DCM, 5% MeOH). The t fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 215 mg (22%) which was crystallized from ACN to give 169 mg (17%) of compound 55 ; M.P.: 227°C (Kofler) and 207 mg (21%) of compound 56 . M.P.: 99°C (gum, Kofler).
Analogous preparation of nds 119 and 120 starting from intermediate 7. o o 73 D\ / / | F Kr ”\ F 1 I (r N\ O N N Nj/QN O N N Nj/£¢N 0\ 0\ Compound 119 and compound 120 Analogous preparation of compounds 133 and 134starting from intermediate 6 o 0 i3 13 A “Hip J, {N NYC OUN/ QQN/ /O /0 compound 133 and compound 134 Analogous preparation of nds 150 and 151 starting from intermediate 6. compound 150 and compound 151 Analogous preparation of compounds 156 and 157 ng from intermediate 7 o 0 N N / / F N\ F N\ I I N 1 l N o N N N / o N N N / \ \ / \ /o /0 compound 156 and compound 157 Example B8e Preparation of compounds 111 and 112 Compound 111 and compound 112 Under N2, NaH (0.289 g; 7.22 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 7 (0.915 g; 2.41 mmol) in DMF (8 mL) at 0°C and the solution was stirred at room temperature for minutes. (S)—(2-oxooxazolidinyl)methyl 4-methylbenzenesulfonate (CAS - 49-5 ) (0.784 g; 2.89 mmol) was added and the solution was stirred for 18 hours. The reaction mixture was poured into water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and concentrated under reduced silica gel (irregular pressure. The e (1.1 g) was purified by chromatography over SiOH, 15-40Hm, 3009; mobile phase: 42% Heptane, 8% MeOH, 50% EtOAc). The t fraction were collected and evaporated to give 2 fractions: - Fraction 1: 98 mg of a compound which was taken up with Et20. The precipitate was filtered and dried to give 0.093 g (8%) of compound 112 . M.P.: 207°C (DSC). - on 2: 215 mg of an impure compound which was purified by reverse phase chromatography (X-Bridge-C18, 5pm, 30*150mm; mobile phase: gradient from 85% NH4HC03 0.5%, 15% ACN to 0% NH4HC03 0.5%, 100% ACN). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The residue (0.13 g) was crystallized from EtZO. The itate was filtered and dried to give 0.108 g (9%) of compound 111 . M.P.: 202°C (DSC).
Analogous preparation of compounds 123 and 124 starting from intermediate 7 and (R)-(2-oxooxazolidiny|)methyl 4-methylbenzenesulfonate o o // // HN/\ HN’\ RKK/o / / N N F F l i \N l RKK/o i \N O N% N N\ / O N /N N\ / I l \ N. U,/ /o /0 nd 123 and compounds 124 Example 89 /> / N ”\ I A oQN /N \ psi/EN Preparation of compound 71 TFA (3.3 mL; 43.31 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 21 (0.45 g; 0.66 mmol) in DCM (15 mL) and stirred at room temperature for 24 hours. The reaction mixture was poured into ice, basified with a 10% aqueous solution of K2C03 and extracted with DCM. The c layer was decanted, dried over MgSO4, filtered and the solvent was evaporated. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical Silica, 5pm, 150x30.0mm; mobile phase: nt from 0.2% NH4OH, 98% DCM, 2% MeOH to 1% NH4OH, 90% DCM, 10% MeOH). The t fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated. The residue (185 mg) was crystallized from ACN and EtZO. The precipitate was filtered and dried to give 0.125 g (43%) of compound 71 . M.P.:238°C (DSC) F N I #9 (N‘ o N /N \ Nj/LN F N/ Analogous preparation of compound 85 starting from intermediate 23.
Analogous preparation of compound 86 / starting from ediate 24.
HN OJ F N ”\ | Ku¥ o N /N Nj/LN Analogous preparation of compound 206 starting from intermediate 78 Example 89a l :N / F N N\ i 1 o N N N /N / \ \ N/ Preparation of compound 140 A solution of HCI 4M in 1,4-dioxane (2.63 mL; 10.5 mmoi) was added to a solution of intermediate 43 (740 mg; 1.05 mmol) in ACN (26 mL). The reaction mixture was heated at 50°C for 15 hours. The reaction e was poured into a saturated aqueous solution of K2C03 and ted with DCM. The organic layer was dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to s. The residue (0.76 g) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical Silica, 5pm, 150x30.0mm; mobile phase: gradient from 0.5% NH4OH, 95% DCM, 5% MeOH to 1.8% NH4OH, 82% DCM, 18% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated. The residue (0.214 g) was crystallized from MeOH. The precipitate was filtered and dried to give 0.106 g (22%) of compound 140 . M.P.: 149°C (gum, Kofler).
Analogous preparation of compound 197 starting from intermediate 70 Example B10 Preparation of compounds 87 and 88 0 // p/ HN HM S / / 6' KO °' "\ l l l ”N 0 / o N\ N TL“CUM ”(EEK/c1 N/ /o /0 compound 87 and compound 88 A solution of KOH (2.4 g; 36 mmol) in 2—methyltetrahydrofuran dry (40 mL) and water (4 mL) was stirred for 10 minutes at room temperature. Intermediate 22 (1 g; 2.32 mmol) followed by utyl ammonium bromide (309 mg; 0.96 mmol) were added. The reaction mixture was stirred at 50°C for 1 hour and (S)-(+)(hydroxymethyl) pyrrolidinone p-toluenesulfonate (CAS 516935) (1.3 g; 4.8 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was d for 48 hours at 50°C. The reaction mixture was cooled down to room temperature, poured into water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and ated to dryness. The residue (0.85 g) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15- 40pm, 300g; mobile phase: 0.1% NH4OH, 96% DCM, 4% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated to afford 2 ons: - Fraction 1: 86 mg of an intermediate compound which was crystallized from EtZO to give 50 mg of nd 87 . M.P.: 160°C (kofler).
— Fraction 2: 95 mg of an intermediate compound which was crystallized from EtzO to give 75 mg of impure compound 88. The precipitate and the mother layer were dissolved in DCM and the solution was evaporated to dryness. The resulting residue was purified by achiral SFC (DIETHYLAMINOPROPYL, 5pm, 150x21.2mm; mobile phase: 80% C02, 20% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The residue (31 mg) was crystallized from EtzO to give 22 mg (2%) of compound 88 . M.P.: 175°C-180°C (Kofier).
Example B11 Preparation of compounds 89, 90 and 91 O O ' ‘3' "‘N C' C' I I OUUTL UU:rL UUILCl \ l 1 i N\ N N / 0 N N N / 0 N N N\ / / / N Cl N Cl N compound 89 and compound 90 and compound 91 A solution of KOH (1.97 g; 29.91 mmoi) in 2-methyltetrahydrofuran dry (40 mL) and water (4 mL) was stirred for 10 minutes at room temperature. Intermediate 19 (800 mg; 1.99 mmol) followed by tetrabutyi ammonium bromide (257 mg; 0.80 mmol) were added at room temperature. The reaction mixture was d at 50°C for 1 hour and )—5- (hydroxymethyl)pyrro|idinone p—toluenesulfonate (CAS 516935) (1.07 g; 3.99 mmoi) was added. The reaction mixture was heated in a seated reactor at 120°C using a multimode cavity ave (CEM MARS system) with a power output ranging from 0 to 400 W for 1h30. The reaction mixture was cooled down to room temperature, poured into water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue (1.2 g) was purified by tography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, m, 300g; mobile phase: 0.5% NH4OH, 95% DCM, 5% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness to give 2 fractions: — Fraction 1 : 225 mg of a nd which was crystallized from EtZO to give 168 mg (17%) of compound 89 . M.P.:183OC (DSC) - Fraction 2: 250 mg of a compound which was crystallized from Et20. The precipitate was filtered off and dried under vaccum. The resulting residue (0.192 g) was purified by chiral SFC (CHIRALPAK AD-H, 5pm, 250x20mm; mobile phase: 60% C02, 40% . The product ons were collected and ated to s to give 0.072 g (7%) of compound 90 (M.P.: 160°C, gum, Kofler) and 0.075 g (8%) of compound 91 (M.P.: 160°C, gum, Kofler).
Analogous preparation of compounds 92, 93 and 94 starting from intermediate 19 /0/ HN K13HM / R / Cl R or N. I N\N TXUYLl ”UNU“ / I / / Cl N/ C[ilorS compound 92 and compound 93 C‘ R IN‘N /ONUUN\ / c1 N/ SorR compound 94 Example B12 Preparation of compound 97 A solution of KOH (1.84 g; 27.82 mmol) in 2-methyltetrahydrofuran dry (25 mL) and water (5 mL) was stirred for 10 minute at room temperature. Intermediate 22 (800 mg; 1.86 mmol) followed by utyl ammonium bromide (239 mg; 0.74 mmol) were added.
The reaction mixture was stirred at 50°C for 1 hour and toluene-4—sulfonic acid (R)—5- oxopyrrolidin-Z—ylmethyl ester (CAS 1288990) (1 g; 3.71 mmol) was added. The on mixture was heated in a sealed reactor at 120°C using a multimode cavity microwave (CEM MARS system) with a power output ranging from 0 to 400 W for 1h30.
The reaction mixture was cooled down to room temperature, poured into water and extracted with EtOAc. The c layer was washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure.
WO 61080 The residue (1.2 g) was purified by column chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-40um, 40g; mobile phase: 96% DCM, 4% MEOH, 0.1% . The product fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated to dryness to give 80 mg (8%) of a compound which was llized from EtZO to give, after filtration, 59 mg (6%) of compound 97. M.P.: 150°C (Kofler).
Example B13 Preparation of compounds 35 and 36 compound 35 and compound 36 NaH (105 mg; 2.63 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 7 (500 mg; 1.31 mmol) in DMF (10 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow. The reaction e was stirred for 30 minutes at 5°C and a solution of oromethyl)—N,N-dimethyl-1 H-imidazole sulfonamide (CA8 1610177) (472 mg; 2.11 mmol) in DMF (3 mL) was added drop wise. The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was poured into ice water and extracted with EtOAc.
The c layer was washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and evaporated till dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH, 20- 45um; mobile phase: 40% Heptane, 10% MeOH, 50% EtOAc). The pure fractions were collected and concentrated to give 70 mg (9%) of compound 35 and 590 mg (79%) of compound 36 . M.P.: 100°C (gum, Kofler).
\ / I F o N N N /N / \ \ IN/ . 0\ Analogous preparation of compound 113 and \ / I F i ‘ o N N N /N \1L\ compound 114 ..——— O\ IN I (K)i I o N N N /N / \ \ IN/ Analogous preparation of nd 116 and '— O\ IN / N/ I F I \ o N N N /N compound 117 using intermediate 36.
/N\ ,9 / \ N—s-N n \ N I F O I \ o N N N /N / \ \ N/ Analogous preparation of compound 126 and / 0* IN /3:0 i /N N/ o : .N N N /N U\\ N/ /o . . compound 127 starting from Intermediate 7 and intermediate 39 I /N N/ (I) \ N N UN// NJLN\ Analogous preparation of nd 178 and i \ N / I [N\ o N N N x" compound 179 starting from intermediate 7 [7/0 / l F M o N N N /N / \ \ IN/ Analogous preparation of compound 180 and MlI / F N‘ o N N N /N \1L\ compound 181 starting from intermediate 7 \ / F N\ I l o N N N /N Analogous ation of compound 184 and (w / l F l ‘N o N N N / / \ \ N/ compound 185 Analogous preparation of compound 195 and \NN / I F l”\ o K: U\/\N N Nj/E/l compound 196 starting from intermediate 7 WO 61080 Example B14 compound 130 NaH (46 mg; 1.15 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 6 (208 mg; 0.57 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) under N2 at 10°C. The on was stirred at 10°C for 30 minutes and 2H—Pyranmethanol tetrahydro(4—methylbenzenesulfonate) (CAS 754348) (241 mg; 0.89 mmol) was added portion wise. The solution was allowed to slowly warm to room temperature, overnight, poured into ice and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered off and the solvent was evaporated. The e (0.69 g) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical Silica, 5pm, 150x30.0mm; mobile phase: gradient from 0.2% NH4OH, 98% DCM, 2% MeOH to 0.8% NH4OH, 92% DCM, 8% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated to give 2 fractions: - Fraction 1: 110 mg of a compound which was crystallized from acetone and EtZO. The precipitate was filtered and dried to give 83 mg (31%) of compound 129 . M.P.: 137°C r).
- Fraction 2: 12 mg of an impure compound which was purified by achiral SFC (amino, 6pm, 150x21.2mm; mobile phase: gradient from 0.3% isopropylamine, 82% C02, 18% MeOH to 0.3% pylamine, 70% C02, 30% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated to give 8 mg (3%) of compound 130 (94% of purity based on .MP: 210°C (kofler) Analogous preparation of compounds 143 and 144 starting from intermediate 7 and intermediate 49 (U N/ (U N/ I F I F O N N N O N N Nj/E/h/ \ \ I j/E/N/ / \ /o /0 Compound 143 and compound144 ous preparation of compounds 165 and 166 starting from intermediate 6 Q(IN N NJLN (I) Q(1N N Nj/Ef‘ Compound 165 and compounds 166 e B14a RS / F N‘ I l o N N N /N / \ \ N/ Preparation of compound 139 NaH (87 mg; 2.19 mmol) was added under N2 at 10°C to a solution of intermediate 7 (208 mg; 0.55 mmol) in DMF (5 mL). The solution was stirred at 10°C for 30 minutes. Tetrahydro—2H-pyranylmethyl 4-methylbenzenesulfonate (CAS 75434- 63—8) (443 mg; 1.64 mmol) was added portion wise and the solution was allowed to slowly warm to room temperature and d overnight. The reaction e was poured into ice and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue (0.25 g) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical Silica, 5pm, 150x30.0mm; mobile phase: gradient from 0% NH4OH, 0% MeOH, 100% DCM to 0.8% NH4OH, 92% DCM, 8% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated to give 0.024 g (9%) of compound 139 . M.P.: 94°C (Kofler).
Analogous preparation of compound 142 starting from intermediate 6 and . /0 Analogous preparation of compound 187 starting from intermediate 7 AOJH N\/ /0 N N\ Analogous preparation of compound 189 starting from intermediate 6 F o Nj/QNN\ l I o N N / \ \ N/ ous ation of compound 214 starting from intermediate 7 Analogous preparation of compound 234 starting from intermediate 7 Example B15 Preparation of compound 141 A solution of tetrabutylammonium fluoride 1M in THF (6.53 mL; 6.53 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 48 (450 mg; 0.65 mmol) in THF (47 mL). The reaction mixture was refluxed for 18 hours, poured into ice and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with a saturated on of NaHC03, then with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and the solvent was evaporated. The residue (1.13 g) was ed by tography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 20-45pm, 4509; mobile phase: 0.5% NH4OH, 93% DCM, 7% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated. The residue (0.128 g) was taken up with ACN. The itate was filtered and dried to give 0.088 g (31%, yellow solid) of compound 141. M.P.: 285°C (DSC).
Analogous preparation of compound 248 starting from intermediate 67.
I F (H N‘ l N o N N N / / \ \ N/ Analogous preparation of compound 190 starting. from intermediate 66 Analogous preparation of compound 228 starting from intermediate 94 £9HN \ I N /o N N\ N\ / / N/ \ Br / I (KN N\ o N N I \ \ N/ ous preparation of compound 238 starting from intermediate 107 (/7N p l N\ I /N o N N\ N\ F N/ Analogous preparation of compound 253 starting from intermediate 1 15 NH \ | K9 (LC) 0 N /N /Nj/©N >— ufiumI Analogous preparation of compound 302 starting from intermediate 145 (the reaction was performed in the presence of tetrabutylammonium fluoride at room temperature) Example B16 H / o N N \E 9/ UN// \ I NJLN Preparation of compound 146 l and N r; I/N compound 147 2.76 HCI NaH (41 mg; 1.04 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 6 (250 mg; 0.69 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow and the on mixture was stirred at 5°C for 30 minutes. A solution of 4-(2-chloroethyl)morpholine (CAS 32406) (155 mg; 1.04 mmol) in DMF (3 mL) was added at 5°C under N2 flow over a 1 hour period and the reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred overnight. The on mixture was poured onto iced water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was ed, washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue (460 mg) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15—40um, 309; mobile phase: 0.5% NH4OH, 97% DCM, 3% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and ated to dryness yielding 2 fractions: WO 61080 — Fraction 1: 107 mg of a compound which was dissolved in ACN. The solution was cooled in an ice bath and a 4N solution of HCl in 1,4-dioxane was added.
The hydrochloride salt was filtered, washed with Eth and dried yielding 109 mg (28%) of compound 146 . M.P.: 143°C (gum, Kofler). CZ5H29N703 . 1.66HCI . 2.11H20 - Fraction 2: 167 mg of an impure compound which was purified by achiral SFC (CYANO, 6pm, 150x21.2mm; mobile phase: 0.3% isopropylamine, 82% C02, 18% MeOH). The t ons were collected and evaporated to dryness.
The e was dissolved in ACN. The solution was cooled in an ice bath and a 4N solution of HCI in 1,4—dioxane was added. The hydrochloride salt was filtered, washed with Et20 and dried yielding 72 mg (17%) of compound 147 . M.P.: 162°C (gum, Kofler). 025H29N7O3 . 2.76HCI . 2.41H20.
Analogous preparation of l F H N\ o N N N /N \MK\ compound 148 2.37HCI and I F R IN‘ 0 N UK/N Nj/EflN compound 149 1.71 HCl starting from intermediate 7 Example B17 F N\ I l o N N N /N FU\ N/ Preparation of compound 154 NaH (161 mg; 4.02 mmol) was added portion wise to a solution of intermediate 12 (0.8 g; 2.01 mmol) in DMF (25 mL) under N2 at 5°C. The reaction mixture was stirred for 30 minutes at 5°C and a solution of 3-bromomethyl-tetrahydro-furan (484 mg; 4.02 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) was added drop wise. The reaction mixture was allowed to reach room temperature and stirred for 48 hours. The reaction mixture was poured into ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, washed with brine (twice), dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue (1 g) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-40um, 409; mobile phase: 0.1% NH4OH, 3% MeOH, 97% DCM). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to give 0.15 g (15%) of an ediate compound which was llized from EtZO to give 48 mg (5%) of compound 154 . M.P.: 226°C r). on'f/O F N\ I N o N |N\ N / / \ / / Analogous preparation of compound 226 starting from ediate 7 Example B17a Preparation of compounds 169, 170, 171 and 172 I F o N N N Q U\/\ j/C/N compound 169 RS / I IN‘ 0 N N N /N U\\ N/ compound 170 RorS / I F IN 0 N N N /N U\/\ N compound 171 S orPO / F N\ I l N O N N N / / \ \ / nd 172 NaH (109 mg; 2.73 mmol) was added portion wise to a on of intermediate 7 (260 mg; 0.68 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) at 5°C under N2. The reaction mixture was stirred for 30 minutes at 5°C and a solution of 3-bromomethyl-tetrahydro—furan (CAS 165253-29—2) (450 mg; 2.73 mmol) in DMF (3 mL) was added drop wise. The reaction mixture was allowed to reach room temperature and stirred for 48 hours. The reaction mixture was poured into ice water and EtOAc was added. The organic layer was decanted, washed with brine (twice), dried over MgSO4, filtered and ated to dryness. The residue (0.35 g) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-40pm, 30g; mobile phase: 40% Heptane, 8% MeOH, 52% EtOAc). The product fractions were ted and the solvent was evaporated to give 2 fractions: - Fraction 1: 56 mg (18%) of compound 169 (M.P.: 80°C, gum, kofler) - Fraction 2: 80 mg of a compound which was taken-up with Et20 to give, after tion, 70 mg (22%) of compound 170 . M.P.: 80°C (gum, Kofler). 52 mg of compound 170 were purified by chiral SFC (CHIRALPAK AD-H, 5pm, 250x20mm; mobile phase: 50% C02, 50% MeOH). The t ons were collected and the solvent was evaporated to give 2 additional fractions: 0 Fraction 3: 26 mg of compound 171 . MP : 172°C (kofler) 0 Fraction 4: 26 mg of compound 172 . MP : 170°C (kofler) Example B18 /N / l F I \N o N N N / F N/ Preparation of compound 173 A solution of KOH (1.74 g; 26.36 mmol) in 2-methyltetrahydrofuran dry (15 mL) was stirred for 10 minutes at room temperature. Water (2.5 mL), intermediate 12 (700 mg; 1.76 mmol) followed by tetrabutylammonium bromide (142 mg; 0.44 mmol) were added.
The reaction e was stirred at 50°C for 1 hour and bromoacetonitrile (0.22 mL; 3.16 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred for 24 hours at 50°C, cooled to room temperature, then poured into ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, washed with brine (twice), dried over MgSO4, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue (0.8 g) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-40pm, 509; mobile phase: 0.1% NH4OH, 3% MeOH, 97% DCM). The resulting residue (0.4 g) was again purified by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical Silica, 5pm, 150x30.0mm; mobile phase: nt from 0.1% NH4OH, 99% DCM, 1% MeOH to 0.7% NH4OH, 93% DCM, 7% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to give 65 mg of a nd which was crystallized from Et20 ng 44 mg (6%) of compound 173,. MP: 250°C (Kofler).
/ N / I / I o N N N f\N Analogous preparation of compound 298 starting from intermediate 7 Example B19 Preparation of compound 217 A solution of ediate 91 (350 mg; 0.74 mmol) in xylene (40 mL) was refluxed for 36 hours. The reaction mixture was poured into water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel ical silica, 5pm, 150x30.0mm; mobile phase: gradient from 0.1% NH4OH, 1% MeOH, 99% DCM to 0.8% NH4OH, 8% MeOH, 92% DCM). The product fractions were collected and ated to dryness. The residue (75 mg) was taken up in ACN. The precipitate was ed, washed with ACN then EtZO and dried yielding 48 mg (15%) of compound 217 .
M.P.: 240°C (Kofler).
Example B20 Preparation of compound 251 A solution of HCl 4N in 1,4-dioxane (0.84 mL; 3.349 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 112 (319 mg; 0.335 mmol) in ACN (8 mL) and the reaction mixture was heated at 50°C for 18 hours. The reaction mixture was poured into a 10% cold aqueous solution of K2C03 and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to s. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-40um, 249; mobile phase: gradient from 95%DCM, 5% MeOH, 0.1% NH4OH to 95%DCM, 5% MeOH, 0.5% NH4OH). The product fractions were ted and evaporated to dryness. The e (120 mg, 81%) was gathered with 50 mg coming from another batch (performed on 415 mg of intermediate 112). The resulting residue was crystallized from ACN. The precipitate was filtered, washed with Eth and dried yielding 120 mg (29% based on the 2 batches) of compound 251 (81%), MP=247°C (Kofler).
I /,N / F N I N\N /o N N\ N\ / / N/ Analogous preparation of nd 258 starting from intermediate 116 Example B21 ation of compounds 207 and 208 He“ rem Hg... //<OH F N\ F N\ (I) N\ N NjLN (I) N /N Nj/DN 0\ 0\ compound 207 and compound 208 intermediate 26 (300 mg; 0.82 mmol), isobutylene oxide (3 mL; 33.62 mmol) and 082C03 (267 mg; 0.82 mmol) were heated at 100°C in a sealed tube for 5 hours. The reaction mixture was poured into water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was ed by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical Silica, 5pm, 150x30.0mm; mobile phase: gradient from 0.2% NH4OH, 2% MeOH, 98% DCM to 1% NH4OH, 10% 2012/052672 MeOH, 90% DCM). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 2 fractions: - Fraction1: 13 mg (3%) of compound 207 (MR: 154°C, Kofler) — on 2: 139 mg of a compound which was crystallized from ACN, yielding 98 mg (22%) of compound 208 . M.P.: 124°C (gum, Kofler).
Analogous preparation of compounds 245 and 246 starting from intermediate 7 / / F OH N\ F 0H ”\ (I) I N I N N N N / (I) N N N / U\\ / U\\ / N N °\ °\ compound 245 and compound 246 Analogous preparation of compounds 276 and 277 starting from intermediate 6 fl 7 X N/ (I) OH N N Nj/[ZN (I) N N 01L j/[ZN /° /0 compound 276 and compound 277 Analogous preparation of compounds 278 and 279 starting from intermediate 12 OH OH / / F N F N l I \N I I \N o N N N / o N N N / U\/ U\ \ F N/ F N/ nd 278 and compound 279 Example 821a Preparation of nd 250 (by CH N N N /N \ \ . 0.98 HCI Glycidyl isopropyl ether (87 uL; 0.689 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 47 (200 mg; 0.574 mmol) and cesium carbonate (299.2 mg; 0.92 mmol) in ACN (3 mL) and the reaction mixture was stirred at 100°C overnight. The reaction mixture was filtered.
The filtrate was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness.
The residue (0.259) was purified by tography over silica gel (stationary phase: stability Silica 5pm 150x30.0mm; mobile phase: gradient from 0.2% NH4OH, 98% DCM, 2% MeOH to 1% NH4OH, 90% DCM, 10% MeOH). The product fractions were mixed and the solvent was evaporated affording an intermediate nd which was treated with a solution of HCI 4N in dioxane. The solvent was concentrated to give 48 mg of nd 250 MP: gum at 96°C (kofler). C30H40N605 , . 0.98 HCI . 0.9 H20 . 0.05 C4H802 Example BZlb Preparation of compound 252 and intermediate 114 (511% compound 252 RS>_ (511% intermediate 114 Glycidyl isopropyl ether (51 uL; 0.41 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 26 (150 mg; 0.34 mmol) and cesium carbonate (219.9 mg; 0.68 mmol) in ACN (2 mL) and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. Then, the reaction mixture was refluxed for 6 hours, poured into ice water and extracted with AcOEt. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and evaporated to s. The crude product was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-40pm, 30g; mobile phase: nt from 0.1% NH4OH, 99% DCM, 1% MeOH to 0.3% NH4OH, 97% DCM, 3% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding to: - Fraction A: 38 mg of an impure intermediate which was crystallized from ACN.
The precipitate was ed, washed with ACN then EtZO and dried to afford 26 mg of (16%) of ediate 114 MP: gum at 100°C (kofler) - Fraction B: 32 mg of impure compound 252 which was purified by achiral SFC (Stationary phase: 2 ETHYLPYRIDINE 6pm 150x21.2mm; mobile phase : 80% C02, 20% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 22 mg (11%) of compound 252 M.P.: 60°C (kofler), gum.
Example B22 Preparation of compound 186 A 21% solution of sodium ethoxide in EtOH (0.971 mL; 2.6 mmol) was added to a mixture of intermediate 63 and intermediate 64 (0.113 g; 0.26 mmol) in EtOH (10 mL) and EtOAc (0.102 mL). The mixture was refluxed ght, poured into ice and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and the solvent was evaporated. The residue (0.18 g) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-40pm, 309; mobile phase: 0.3% NH4OH, 3% MeOH, 97% DCM). The t fractions were ted and the solvent was evaporated. The residue was crystallized from Et20 and ACN. The itate was filtered and dried to give 0.053 g (44%) of compound 186, M.P.: 177°C (Kofler).
Analogous preparation of compound 297 starting from intermediate 139 Example B23 Preparation of compound 188 Cyanogen bromide (0.012 g; 0.12 mmol) followed by a solution of NaH003 (0.01 g; 0.12 mmol) in water (0.6 mL) were added to a mixture of intermediate 65 (0.05 g; 0.12 mmol) in 1,4—dioxane (1 mL) at room temperature. The reaction e was d for 5 hours and extracted with EtOAc. The c layer was decanted, dried over MgSO4, ed and evaporated till dryness. The residue was taken up with Et20. The precipitate was filtered and dried, then purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15— 40um, 309; mobile phase: 0.5% NH4OH, 6% MeOH, 94% DCM). The product fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated to give 0.033 g of a compound which was crystallized from Et20 and ACN. The precipitate filtered and dried to give 0.025 g (47%) of nd 188,. M.P.: 246°C (Kofler).
Example B23a NH~N 040% N\/ /O N :l N\ NjLN lj l/ N/ Preparation of compound 229 A mixture of intermediate 65 (0.55 g; 1.27 mmol) and 1,1’-carbonyldiimidazole (0.267 g; 1.65 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (10 mL) was heated at 80°C overnight. The mixture was poured into ice and the precipitate was filtered, washed with water and dried yielding 0.59 g (99%) of compound 229 which was used without further purification for the next step. M.P.: 232°C (kofler) NH~N 040% N\/ //ou.N N\\ I / ij//fl:;7N./ Analogous preparation of compound 284 starting from intermediate 106 Example B24 2012/052672 \ N/ F o I \ /o N |N\ N\ / / / Preparation of compound 239 Potassium tert—butoxyde (118 mg; 1.05 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 7 (0.2 g; 0.526 mmol) in THF (22 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow. The reaction mixture was stirred for 30 minutes at 5°C and 2-bromoacetamide (109 mg; 0.789 mmol) was added portionwise. The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was poured into ice and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and the solvent was evaporated. The residue (0.28 g) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (spherical , 5pm, 150x30.0mm, mobile phase: nt from 0.2% NH4OH, 2% MeOH, 98% DCM to 1.2% NH4OH, 12% MeOH, 88% DCM). The product fractions were mixed and the solvent was evaporated. The residue was taken up by EtZO. The precipitate was filtered and dried to give 0.114 g (48%) of compound 239 . M.P.: gum at 145°C (kofler).
Example B25 Preparation of nds 267 and 268 N/ N/ F F I \N l \N /O NUN\ / /0 / \ N/ NUN\ / F F N/ O\ 0\ compound 267 and compound 268 NaH (60 mg; 1.506 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 12 (300 mg; 0.753 mmol) in DMF (9 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow. The reaction was stirred at 5°C for 30 minutes. A solution of bromomethylcyclopropane (353 mg; 1.311 mmol) in DMF (1 mL) was added over a 2 hours period and the reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was poured onto iced water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, washed with brine (twice), dried over MgSO4, ed and evaporated to dryness. The e (410 mg) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15—40 um 30 9; mobile phase: 98% DCM, 2% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness to give 2 fractions: - Fraction 1: 35 mg of a compound which was crystallized from ACN/DiPE ng 29 mg of nd 267 (9%) (M.P.: 195°C, kofler) - Fraction 2: 162 mg of a compound which was crystallized from ACN/DiPE yielding 129 mg of compound 268 (38%) M.P.: 212°C (kofler).
Examgle 826 Preparation of compound 261 HOBT (29 mg; 0.218 mmol) then EDCli (41.7 mg; 0.218 mmol) were added n wise at 10°C to a solution of intermediate 122 (100 mg; 0.181 mmol) in DMF (10 mL) and Eth (51 pL; 0.363 mmol). The on mixture was stirred for 10 min. A solution of methylamine 2M in THF (272 uL; 0.544 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred for 15 hours. Additionnal HOBT (29 mg; 0.218 mmol), EDCl (41.7 mg; 0.218 mmol), Et3N (51 uL; 0.363 mmol) and a solution of methylamine 2M in THF (272 uL; 0.544 mmol) were added and the reaction mixture was d onal 72 hours. The reaction mixture was poured into water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried with MgSO4, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-40um, 30g; mobile phase: 0.5% NH4OH, 4% MeOH, 96% DCM) to give 16 mg (19%) of compound 261 .
M.P.180°C (kofler).
Example 827 a) Preparation of mixture of intermediate 123 and compound 266 NOOQS/Qo 0%Soé ééo_NQ\ °\\S/ __N N\\O Intermediate 123 compound 266 2—bromoethyl-methylsulfone (306 mg; 1.64 mmol) was added to a on of ediate 26 (500 mg; 1.37 mmol) and C52C03 (667.02 mg; 2.05 mmol) in ACN (8 mL) and the reaction e was stirred at room temperature overnight. The on mixture was poured into a 10% aqueous solution of K2C03 and extracted with EtOAc.
The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The crude product was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-45um, 249; mobile phase: 97% CH2C|2, 3% MeOH). The product fractions were ted and evaporated to dryness leading to a 1/1 mixture of ediate 123 and compound 266 which was used without further purification in the next step. b) Preparation of compounds 265 and 266 compound 265 compound 266 NaH (25.39 mg; 1.06 mmol) was added to a solution of a mixture of intermediate 123 and compound 266 (500 mg; 0.53 mmol) in DMF (15 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow. The reaction mixture was stirred for 30 minutes at 5°C and a solution of oromethyl)— N,N-dimethyl-1H—imidazoIesulfonamide (CAS 9358620) (250 mg; 1.12 mmol) in DMF (10 mL) was added dropwise. The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was poured into ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to s. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (spherical silica, 5pm, 150x30.0mm; mobile phase: gradient from 0.2% NH4OH, 2% MeOH, 98% DCM to 1% NH4OH, 10% MeOH, 90% DCM). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to s yielding 159 mg (46%) of compound 265 and 115 mg of an intermediate nd which was llized from ACN to afford 83 mg of compound 266 (27%). M.P.: 180°C (kofler).
Example B28 Preparation of compound 275 2-bromoethylmethylsulfone (129 mg; 0.689 mmol) was added to a solution of ediate 47 (200 mg; 0.574 mmol) and cesium carbonate (374 mg; 1.15 mmol) in ACN (3 mL) and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was poured into a 10% aqueous solution of K2C03 and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was ed by chromatography over silica gel (spherical silica, 5pm, 150x30.0mm; mobile phase: gradient from 0.2% NH4OH, 2% MeOH, 98% DCM to 1% NH4OH, 10% MeOH, 90% DCM. The t fractions were mixed and the solvent was evaporated to dryness yielding 46 mg of an impure compound which was purified by achiral SFC (2-ethylpyridine, 6pm, 150x21 .2mm; mobile phase: 82% C02, 18% MeOH). The product fractions were mixed and the solvent was evaporated to give 0.036 g (11%) of compound 275 . M.P.: 172°C (kofler).
Example B29 /OemN N\ Nj/E/UN Preparation of compound 289 °\ A mixture of ediate 132 (0.317 g; 0.55 mmol) and a 2M solution of methylamine in THF (10.9 mL; 21.76 mmol) was heated in a sealed tube at 70°C for 18 hours. The WO 61080 reaction e was cooled down, poured into iced water and extracted with EtOAc.
The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and evapoprated to dryness. The residue (0.242 g) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-40um, 24g; mobile phase: 0.5% NH4OH, 5% MeOH, 95% DCM). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The residue was crystallized from ACN. The precipitate was ed and dried to give 0.049 g of compound 289 (17%).
M.P.: 92°C (gum, kofler).
Exam gle 830 Preparation of compound 301 4M HCI in 1,4—dioxane (2.27 mL; 9.08 mmol) was added dropwise to a solution of intermediate 144 (560 mg; 0.908 mmol) in ACN. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours, diluted with DCM and poured onto a cold 10% aqueous solution of K2003. The organic layer was decanted, washed with water, dried over M9804, ed and evaporated to dryness. The residue (0.629) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15—40um, 40g; mobile phase: 0.5% NH4OH, 5% MeOH, 95% DCM). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The resulting residue (415 mg) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-40um, 30g; mobile phase: 1% NH4OH, 92% DCM, 7% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The e was taken up with EtQO. The precipitate was filtered and dried yieiding 137 mg of (29%) of compoumd 301 M.P.: 126°C r) C. Pregaration of the comgounds 2012/052672 Conversion 1 Preparation of compound 23 To a solution of compound 13 (350 mg; 0.62 mmol) in ACN (13 ml) was added dropwise at 5°C, HCI (4M in Dioxane) (1.54 ml; 6.2 mmol). The reaction mixture was then heated at 50°C for 18 hours. The reaction mixture was cooled down to room temperature and then concentrated under reduced pressure. The on mixture was taken up with DCM and water and was basified with an aquous solution of ammonia. The aqueous solution was extracted and the organic layer washed with brine, dried (M9804), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (5pm, mobile phase, gradient from 0.1% NH4OH, 99% DCM, 1% MeOH to 1% NH4OH, 90% DCM, 10% MeOH). The desired fractionswere collected and trated under reduced pressure. The residue was triturated in EtZO, filtered and dried to afford 170 mg (60%) of compound 23 (MP:228°C (DSC)).
Alternatively, compound 23 was also prepared as follows : The reaction was performed three times on the same quantities of compound 13 (7.34 g; 12.93 mmol) HCI 4M in 1,4—dioxane (32.31 mL; 129.25 mmol) was added drop wise at 5°C to a solution of compound 13 (7.34 g; 12.93 mmol) in ACN (250 mL). The reaction mixture was then heated at 50°C for 6 hours and cooled down. The 3 batches were mixed; the precipitate was filtered off and stirred in 10% aqueous K2C03 overnight. The precipitate was again filtered off, washed with water, then ACN, ved in DCM/MeOH (9/1) and evaporated to s. The ing residue (16.28 g) was solubilized by ing in ACN (950 mL) and crystallized allowing the temperature to reach room temperature.
The precipitate was filtered, washed with ACN, then Et20 and dried yielding g of 9.39 (51%) of compound 23. MP. = 226°C (DSC), C23H21FN802 . 0.13 CH3CN.
The filtrate was evaporated to dryness. The residue (6.7 g) was solubilized by refluxing in ACN (300 mL) and crystallized allowing the ature to reach room temperature.
The precipitate was filtered, washed with ACN, then EtZO and dried yielding additional 1.92 g (11%) of compound 23. MP. = 226°C (DSC), C23H21FN802 . 0.1 CH3CN 2012/052672 The filtrate was evaporated to dryness affording 4.679 of an onal fraction of (impure) nd 23, which was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 20—45um, 4SOg;mobile phase: 96% DCM, 4% MeOH, 0.1% NH4OH). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness ng 3.35 g of additional compound 23 (18%) which was solubilized by refluxing in ACN (250 mL) and crystallized allowing the temperature to reach room temperature.The precipitate was filtered, washed with CAN, then EtZO and dried yielding 2.33 g (13%) of additional compound 23 231°C (DSC) The filtrate was evaporated to dryness yielding 770 mg of impure compound 23.
Alternatively, compound 23 was also prepared as follows.
The experiment was performed from 2 batches of compound 13 (6.69 g; 11.78 mmol): HCI 4M in 1,4—dioxane (30 mL; 120 mmol) was added drop wise at 5°C to a solution of compound 13 (6.69 g; 11.78 mmol) in ACN (235 mL). The on mixture was heated at 50°C for 6 hours. The 2 batches were combined. After cooling down, the precipitate was filtered and stirred in a saturated solution of K2C03 10% overnight. The precipitate was filtered, washed with water, then ACN and dissolved in DCM/MeOH (9/1). The solvent was evaporated, and the residue was taken up in ACN, filtered, washed with EtZO and dried. The resulting residue was dissolved in DCM/MeOH (8/2) (350 mL) and washed twice with water. The organic layer was evaporated until crystallization. The solid was ed and washed with ACN, then Et20 and dried to afford 8.94 g (76%) of compound 23 (M.P.: 132°C, DSC). C23H21FN802 . 2.02H20.
The filtrate was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15—40um, 3009; mobile phase: 0.1% NH4OH, 97% DCM, 3% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding additional 740 mg (7%) of compound 23 .
Analogous preparation of compound 135 starting from compound 136 W0 2013/061080 I )2 / N N I I \ o N N N /N U\\ N/ Analogous preparation of compound 137 starting from compound 138 (QHN N l E 1 Up/ \ . /0 Analogous preparation of compound 152 starting from compound 153 0 F K : N N / \ _o F Qt: f’f/ Analogous preparation of compound 25 Na “23 / N N\ F N N\ / N/ Analogous preparation of nd 27 F starting from compound 28. i (EN) / ”(N O N N\ N\ / Analogous preparation of compound 41 starting from compound 36.
I Cl KKN N\ o N N\ / N/Nj/E/l Analogous preparation of compound 42 / starting from compound 43.
HNX / l (KN N\ o i N /N \ Nj/EéN/ Analogous preparation of compound 65 C' N starting from compound 66.
I (KNHN/\> N\ o N /N \ Nj/CéN Analogous ation of compound 73 F N starting from nd 74.
(RNHN’\> / Cl N\ I I O N N \ Nj/EflN Cl N/ Analogous preparation of compound 98 starting from compound 99.
HN \ | F (K? [NAN] o N 1L/N Nji/q Analogous preparation of compound 100 / ng from compound 101.
I /> / I F N N\ I N o N N N / LL/ \ Analogous preparation of compound 109 starting from compound 110. i (UNI/N/ I \ o N N N /N MN// \ Analogeous preparation of compound 118 ng from compound 116 \ N/ i 1 ‘ o N N N / Mp/ \ Analogous preparation of compound 125 starting from compound 126 . (g3HN / F N N\ F N FKIN//N | NjLN Analogous preparation of compound 175 F starting from compound 176.
N / i Q o N Up/N N\j);j ous preparation of compound 182 starting from compound 183 F K“ Nj/KJ/ I o N /N \ IN/ starting. Analogous preparation of compound 190a from compound 191 HN \ , d9 o N N NED U/ \ \ IN/ Analogous preparation of compound 198 starting from nd 199 HN/\> | Kg” 0 N N N / \ Analogous preparation of compound 200 starting from compound 201 (g?HN \ / N I 1 o N /N N\ \ Analogous preparation of nd 202 starting from compound 203 Analogous preparation of nd 209 starting from compound 210 Analogous ation of compound 211 starting from compound 212 KGHN fi F N N\ I /N 0 N N N / N/ Analogous preparation of compound 223 starting from compound 224 l (K?HN \ N‘ O N O 11/N/N Nj/[%N Analogous preparation of compound 240 starting from compound 241 Analogous preparation of compound 232 starting from ediate 97 Analogous preparation of compound 259 (cis) starting from compound 260 ous preparation of compound 264 starting from compound 265 N23 N o N N N \ / \ i \/ \ Analogous preparation of compound 273 starting from compound 274 Analogous preparation of compound 280 starting from compound 281 Analogous ation of nd 287 starting from compound 288 /N/NH Analogous preparation of compound 293 starting from compound 294 Compound 24 was prepared as follows : To a solution of nd 14 (545 mg ; 0.99 mmol) in ACN (20 mL) was added drop wise, at 5°C, HCI 4M in 1,4—dioxane (2.5 ml ; 9.9 mmol). The reaction mixture was heated at 50°C for 18 hours and then concentrated under reduced pressure. The reaction mixture was taken up with DCM, washed with 10% aqueous K2C03 and brine, dried over M9804, filtered and trated under reduced pressure. The residue (488 mg) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-40um, 309;.
Mobile phase : 0.1% NH4OH, 97% DCM, 3% MeOH). The product fractions were mixed and concentrated affording 230 mg of an intermediate compound which was taken up in EtZO. The precipitate was filtered, ved in DCM and water. The mixture was basified with a 30% a solution. The aqueous layer was extracted and the organic layer washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford 121 mg of an intermediate on which was taken up in EtZO. The precipitate was filtered to afford 108 mg (24%) of compound 24. MR: 228°C Alternatively, compound 24 was prepared as follows : The ment was performed from 2 batches of compound 14 (3.55 g; 6.46 mmol): HCl 4M in 1,4-dioxane (16.1 mL; 64.6 mmol) was added drop wise at 5°C to a solution of compound 14 (3.55 g; 6.46 mmol) in ACN (140 mL).The reaction mixture was then heated at 50°C for 18 hours. The two reaction mixtures were combined and cooled down to 40°C, then poured into ice water, basified with a 30% ammonia solution, stirred at room temperature for 30 minutes and d to llize overnight. The precipitate was filtered, washed with water, ACN and Et20, then dried under vaccum to give 3.8 g (67%) of compound 24. MP: 246°C (DSC). The filtrate was also allowed to crystallize overnight. The precipitate was filtered, washed with water, ACN and Et20 affording after drying additional 1.35g (24%) of nd 24. MP: 244°C (DSC), C23H22N802.
Alternatively, compound 24 was also prepared as follows.
To a solution of compound 14 (700 mg ; 1.27 mmol) in ACN (26 mL) was added drop wise at 5°C, HCl 4M in 1,4-dioxane (3.18 ml ; 12.7 mmol). The reaction mixture was heated at 50°C for 4 hours and then d with DCM/MeOH (9/1). The reaction mixture was basified at 0°C with 10% aqueous solution of K2C03. The aqueous layer was extracted several times with a mixture of OH (9/1). The organic layers were mixed, dried over M9804, filtered and concentrated to afford an intermediate residue (0.7g, yellow solid) which was taken up with ACN. The precipitate was filtered, dried yielding 0.44g (78%; yellow solid) of compound 24. MP. > 260°C (kofler).
Cz3H22N802 . 0.15H20 . 0.015 CH2Cl2 . 0.056 dioxane.
Conversion 1a | M ”f o N N \upNIL“\ Preparation of compound 115 HCI A solution of HCI 4M in oxane (0.44 mL; 1.74 mmol) was added drop wise at 5°C to a solution of compound 117 (0.1 g; 0.18 mmol) in ACN (4 mL). The reaction mixture was then heated at 50°C for 6 hours and cooled to room temperature. The precipitate was filtered, washed with EtZO and dried yielding 70 mg (72%) of nd 115 . M.P.: 130°C (gum, Kofler). C23H21FN802 . 0.65H20 . 2.14HCl Analogous preparation of compound 155 I p .1 F NjLNl ‘ o N\ N .1.91HC1 Conversion 1b Preparation of compound 215 Aqueous HCl SN (2 mL) was added to a solution of compound 216 (1.1 g ; 1.58 mmol) in dioxane (10 mL) at 5°C. The reaction mixture was then heated at 100°C for 1 hour. The reaction e was poured into ice water and basified with NaOH 3N. The product was extracted with EtOAc, washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and trated under reduced pressure. The residue (19) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (15-40um, 409; mobile phase: DCM/MeOH/NH4OH: 97/3/01 to 95/5/01) The product fractions were collected and evaporated to s to give 0.587 g (77%) of an intermediate compound which was crystallized from EtZO. The precipitate was filtered and dried to give 0.5179 (67%) of compound 215 . M.P.: gum at 140°C (kofler).
| CL o 0.
Analogous preparation of nd 291 starting from compound 292 9.NH\ NH2 /\(f o\érNUTEN N \ / N/ Analogous preparation of compound 295 starting from compound 296 Conversion 2 /O \ O\ \ N 1 1 / N / / \N— \\ N N N \ O \ \ \ l / / Preparation of nd 26, N A solution of compound 22 (422 mg; 1.05 mmol), 2-bromo—3-methoxypyridine (180 mg; 0.95 mmol) and triethylamine (1.6 ml; 11.5 mmol) in DMSO (10 ml) was degassed under N2 for 10 minutes. Then, dichlorobi(triphenylphosphine)palladium (ll) (135 mg ; 0.19 mmol) and copper(l) iodide (18.3 mg; 0.09 mmol) were added and the reaction mixture was stirred at 90°C for 40 minutes. The reaction mixture was cooled down to room temperature and poured out onto ice water and EtOAc and filtered through a pad of Celite®. The s layer was extracted with EtOAc and the organic layer was washed with brine, dried (M9804), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (5pm, mobile phase, gradient 100% DCM to 0.5% NH4OH, 95% DCM, 5% MeOH). The desired t fractions were collected, concentrated under reduced pression to provide 116mg (24%) ofcompound 26. This comound eptane was ated in EtZO, the precipitate was filtered and dried to afford 52.6 mg of nd 26 (MP:190°C).
Conversion 3 (QHN / F N N\ H0 N N / \ \ N/Nj/[yN and compound 96 The reaction was performed twice on the same quantity of compound 23 (1 g; 2.17 mmol) and the batches were mixed for the purification.
A solution of 1M BBr3 in DCM (11.94 mL; 11.94 mmol )was added dropwise to a solution of compound 23 (1 g; 2.17 mmol) in DCM (55 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow. The solution was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred for 1h30. The reaction mixture was diluted with DCM, an aqueous solution of NaOH 30% was added until basic pH and the reaction mixture was evaporated to dryness. The crude products coming from the 2 batches were mixed and the resulting residue was ed by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH, 20—45pm, 450g; mobile phase: gradient from 0.5% NH4OH, 97% DCM, 3% MeOH to 0.5% NH4OH, 93% DCM, 7% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 2 fractions: Fraction 1: 310 mg of a compound which was taken up in ACN. The precipitate was filtered, washed with EtQO and dried. The resulting solid (274 mg) was refluxed in 15 mL of ACN and 1.5 mL of MeOH. The solution was cooled down.
The precipitate was filtered, washed with ACN then EtZO and dried to afford 274 mg (13%) of nd 95 . M.P.: 218°C (DSC).
Fraction 2: 105 mg of a compound which was taken up in ACN. The precipitate was filtered, washed with Ego and dried yielding 86 mg (4%) of nd 96 .
M.P.: 192°C (gum, Kofler).
H / F ”\ o N N \ NYE/V F N/ Analogous preparation of compound 122 CH starting from compound 3 sion 3a Preparation of compound 103 0” A solution of 1M BBr3 in DCM (8.70 mL; 8.70 mmol) was added drop wise to a solution of compound 24 (700 mg; 1.58 mmol) in DCM (40 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow. The solution was allowed to slowly warm to room temperature and stirred for 1h30. The reaction e was diluted with DCM. A 30% aqueous solution of NaOH was added until basic pH and the reaction mixture was evaporated to dryness. The crude product (10 g) was purified by tography over silica gel (Dry loading (70-200pm, 209) irregular SiOH, 15-45um, 709; mobile phase: 97% DCM, 3% MeOH). The fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The impure residue (240 mg) was purified by achiral SFC (2—ETHYLPYRIDINE, 6pm, 150x21.2mm; mobile phase: 80% C02, 20% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The residue (102 mg) was llized from ACN. The precipitate was filtered, washed with EtZO and dried yielding 86 mg (13%) of compound 103 . M.P.: 172°C (gum, Kofler).
Conversion 4 Preparation of compounds 162 and 163 2012/052672 HNLo oQNLo H N/ K N/ F NJLN\ o F (I) I /N\ N N N N N \ \ F N/ F N/ compound 162 and compound 163 Sodium triacetoxyborohydride (0.204 g; 0.96 mmol) and acetic acid (0.015 mL; 0.25 mmol) were added to a solution of compound 67 (0.265 g; 0.6 mmol) and 3-oxetanone (0.036 mL; 0.6 mmol) in 1,2-dichloroethane (10 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow. The reaction mixture was stirred at 60°C overnight, poured into ice water, basified with a 10% aqueous solution of K2CO3 and extracted with DCM. The c layer was dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue (268 mg) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical Silic,a 5pm, 150x30.0mm; mobile phase: gradient from 0.2% NH4OH, 98% DCM, 2% MeOH to 1.2% NH4OH, 88% DCM, 12% MeOH). The product ons were collected and the t was evaporated to give 2 fractions: - Fraction 1: 0.033 g of a compound which was crystallized from Et20 to give 51 mg (17%) of compound 162 (M.P.: 183°C, DSC) - Fraction 2: 0.068 g of a compound which was crystallized from EtZO to give 20 mg (6%) of compound 163 . M.P.: 182°C (DSC).
H / l N F N/ . /0 Analogous preparation of nd 221 OQN/C/O H / l N F N/ /o . and compound 222 starting from compound 168 sion 43 Preparation of compound 164 Sodium triacetoxyborohydride (0.144 g; 0.68 mmol) and acetic acid (0.011 mL; 0.18 mmol) were added to a solution of nd 68 (0.187 g; 0.43 mmol) and 3-oxetanone (0.026 mL; 0.43 mmol) in 1,2-dichloroethane (7 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow. The reaction mixture was stirred at 60°C overnight, poured into ice water, basified with a 10% aqueous solution of K2003 and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was dried over MgSO4, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue (0.154 g) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical Silica, 5pm, 150x30.0mm; mobile phase: gradient from 0.2% NH4OH, 98% DCM, 2% MeOH to 1% NH4OH, 90% DCM, 10% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated to give 0.032 g of a compound which was crystallized from EtZO. The precipitate was filtered and dried to give 0.016 g (7%) of compound 164 . M.P.: 218°C (DSC). sion 4b 0&NH H N/ /O N UKN\ NjLUN Preparation of compound 290 A solution of compound 236 (280 mg; 0.69 mmol), 3-oxetanone (62 uL; 1.04 mmol) and AcOH (22 uL; 0.38 mmol) in 1,2-dichloroethane (26 mL) was heated at 50°C for 24 hours. The on mixture was cooled to room temperature and sodium triacetoxyborohydride (220 mg; 1.04 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was heated at 60°C for 2 hours. The reaction mixture was ioned between a 10% aqueous solution of K2C03 and DCM. The aqueous layer was extracted once with DCM.
The combined organic layers were dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to s. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel ical silica, 5pm, 150x30.0mm; mobile phase: gradient from 70% heptanes, 2% MeOH (+10% NH4OH), 28% EtOAc to 0% eptanes, 20% MeOH (+10% NH4OH), 80% EtOAc). The product fractions were evaporated to dryness to afford 34 mg (21%) of compound 290 M.P.: gum at 66°C (kofler).
Conversion 5 HNJR l \N O N / UK/ / N Preparation of compound 235 Acetylchloride (24 uL; 0.33 mmol) was added to a solution of compound 236 (122 mg; 0.3 mmol) and Et3N (64 uL; 0.45 mmol) in DCM (5 mL) under N2 at 5°C. The reaction e was stirred at 10°C for 3 hours, poured into cooled water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue (0.13 g) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15- 40um, 129; mobile phase: 97% DCM, 3% MEOH). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The residue (0.1 g) was crystallized from Et20. The yellow WO 61080 precipitate was filtered and dried under vaccum to give 87 mg (65%) of compound 235 .
M.P.: 193°C (DSC).
(I) HN /N Nj/[fl‘ Analogous preparation of compound 242 starting from compound 168 )kNH H / F N\ (I) N N N [/N U\/\ N Analogous ation of compound 243 starting from compound 167 sion 6 / NH N=S N l \N /oml:N |N\ / Nj/CyN/ Preparation of compound 104 Trifluoroacetic acid (0.49 mL; 6.56 mmol) was added to a solution of compound 105 (0.085 g; 0.14 mmol) in DCM (7 mL) at room temperature. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. The solution was poured into iced water, basified by NH4OH and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was dried over MgSO4, filtered and evaporated till dryness. The residue (70 mg) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (stability Silica 5pm 150x30.0mm, mobile phase: gradient from 0.2% NH4OH, 98% DCM, 2% MeOH to 1.3% NH4OH, 87% DCM, 13% MeOH). The product ons were collected and evaporated to dryness. The residue (46 mg) was crystallized from EtQO.
The precipitate was filtered and dried to give 0.027 g of compound 104 (36%). MR: gum at 60°C (Kofler).
(QHN \ l I N /o N N\ N\ / E 1 Up Analogous preparation of compound 227 starting from compound 228 F #0 N\ I N /o N / UpN\ N\ Analogous preparation of compound 262 starting from compound 263 95$Rs /N /0KmN /N \N—<>NHI Analogous preparation of compound 299 starting from compound 300 sion 7 I H [N\ o N N / [\ F\ Nj/QN/ Preparation of compound 106 .2HC1 At 5°C, a solution of HCI 5/6N in iPrOH (0.88 mL; 4.36 mmol) was added to a solution of compound 108 (0.38 g; 0.73 mmol) in MeOH (6 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 6 hours. The reaction e was concentrated, then the residue was taken—up with EtZO. The precipitate was filtered and dried under vacuum to give 0.348 g (92%) of compound 106 . 2HCl . 0.39H20 . M.P.: 250°C (DSC). C21H21F2N702 Analogous preparation of compound 121 starting fromcompound 107 l H [N\ o N N N /N FU\ N/ / I Conversion 8 Preparation of compound 230 Compound 231 (0.19; 0.228 mmol), 1~(3—dimethylaminopropyl)—3—ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride (0.053 g; 0.342 mmol), DMAP (0.003 g; 0.023 mmol), Et3N (0.082 mL; 0.57 mmol) and lamine (0.028 mL; 0.456 mmol) were mixed in DCM. The resulting red suspension was stirred overnight at room temperature. The reaction mixture was d with DCM. The c layer was successivelly washed with a 3N aqueous solution of HCI then, a saturated aqueous of NaHC03, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue (0.06 g) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15-45um, 129; mobile phase: nt from 97% DCM, 3% MeOH, 0.3% NH4OH to 90% DCM, 10% MeOH, 1% NH4OH). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 6.6 mg (6%) of compound 230 M.P.: 258°C (Kofler).
/LNH F \o N\ I /N o N N N / \ \ / / Analogous preparation of compound 249 starting from compound 231 /o N N\ N\ / / N/ Analogous preparation of compound 263 starting from compound 231 ConversionQ F (go N\ I N /o N N\ N\ / / N/ Preparation of compound 231 m hydroxyde monohydrate (56 mg; 2.34 mmol) was added to a solution of compound 214 (0.2129; 0.47 mmol) in a mixture of THF (5 mL) and water (2 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred overnight at room temperature and neutralized with an aqueous solution of HCI 3N. The reaction e was nned between water and EtOAc. The organic layer was dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness.
The residue was taken up with ACN to afford 0.188 g (91%) of compound 231 > . M.P.: 260°C (Kofler).
Conversion 1O 2012/052672 F OH N\ l ] N o N N N / / \ \ N/ Preparation of compound 244 Sodium borohydride (60 mg; 1.577 mmol) was added to a suspension of compound 225 (660 mg; 1.314 mmol) in MeOH (30 mL) at room ature. The reaction mixture was stirred at this temperature for 2 hours, quenched with iced water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was decanted, dried over M9804, ed and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, 15— 40pm, 249; mobile phase: gradient from 100% DCM, 0% MeOH to 95% DCM, 5% MeOH). The product ons were collected and evaporated to dryness. The resulting residue (0.1 g) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (spherical silica, 5pm, 150x30.0mm; mobile phase: gradient from 0.2% NH4OH, 98% DCM, 2% MeOH to 1.2% NH4OH, 88% DCM, 12% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The e was taken up with EtZO. The precipitate was filtered and dried ng 59 mg (9%) of compound 244 . M.P.: gum at 101°C (Kofler).
Conversion 11 //\NH,< J} O N/ OH \ /o N (L N\ Nj/DN Preparation of compound 282 (Benzotriazolyloxy)tris(dimethylamino)phosphonium hexafluorophosphate (454 mg; 1.03 mmol) was added at room temperature to a e of compound 229 (0.383 g; 0.789 mmol), ethanolamine (0.115 mL; 1.58 mmol) and DlPEA (0.261 mL; 1.58 mmol) in THF (8 mL). The mixture was stirre overnight, poured into ice and extracted with EtOAc.
The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over M9804, filtered and the solvent was evaporated. The residue (0.36 g) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (spherical silica, 5pm, 150x30.0mm; mobile phase: gradient from 0.2% NH4OH, 2% MeOH, 98% DCM to 1.2% NH4OH, 12% MeOH, 88% DCM). The product fractions were mixed and the solvent was evaporated. The residue was taken up by EtZO. The precipitate was filtered and dried yielding 0.111 g (28%) of compound 282 (28%). M.P.: 104°C (gum, kofler).
F N Analogous ation of compound 283 starting from compound 284 Conversion 12 1 /°/ R / F "\ l I /N O N N N / \ \ N/ ation of compound 194 NaH (59 mg; 1.476 mmol) was added portion wise to a solution of compound 53 (470 mg; 0.984 mmol) in DMF (10 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow. The reaction mixture was stirred at 5°C for 30 s, then (2-bromoethoxy)—tert-butyldimethylsilane (232 uL; 1.08 mmol) was added dropwise. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight, quenched with iced water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, dried over M9804, filtered and evaporated to dryness.
A 1M solution of tetrabutylammonium fluoride in THF (4.45 mL; 4.45 mmol) was added to a solution of the residue obtained previously in THF (27 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight, poured into ice and extracted with EtOAc.
The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and the solvent was ated. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH, m, 30g; mobile phase: 0.1% NH4OH, 4% MeOH, 96% DCM). The product WO 61080 fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated to give 130 mg (26%) of compound 194, . M.P.: 102°C (gum, Kofler).
Conversion 13 / at.
Salt Preparation of nd 23W a) Preparation of sulfate salt of compound 23 A solution of concentrated sulfuric acid (24 uL; 0.434 mmol) in ethanol (3.5 mL) was added slowly to a solution of free base of compound 23 (100 mg; 0.217 mmol) in C (6.5 mL) at 50°C and the resulting solution was d to cool to room temperature and stirred overnight. The solution was evaporated to dryness and the e was crystallized in an ice bath from ACN (2 mL). The precipitate was filtered, washed with EtZO and dried yielding 69 mg (47%) of compound 23 as a sulfate salt, M.P.: 198°C (gum, Kofler). C23H21FN802 . 2HZSO4 . 1H20 . 0.06 EtZO . 0.03 DMF. b) ation of hydrochloric acid salt of compound 23 A pre-cooled solution of concentrated hydrochloride acid (36 uL; 0.434 mmol) in EtOH (3.5 mL) was added slowly to a solution of free base of compound 23 (100 mg; 0.217 mmol) in ACN (6.5 mL) at 50°C and the resulting solution was allowed to cool to room temperature and stirred overnight. The solution was evaporated to dryness and the e was taken up with ACN (2 mL). The precipitate was filtered, washed with EtZO and dried yielding 92 mg (78%) of compound 23 as a hydrochloric acid salt,. M.P.: 216°C (DSC). cngmFNgog. 1.76HCl . H20 0) Preparation of phosphate salt of compound 23 A pre-cooled on of 17M phosphoric acid (26 uL; 0.434 mmol) in EtOH (3.5 mL) was added slowly to a on of free base of compound 23 (100 mg; 0.217 mmol) in ACN (6.5 mL) at 50°C and the resulting solution was allowed to cool to room temperature and stirred overnight. The precipitate was filtered, washed with ACN then EtZO and dried yielding 78 mg (51%) of compound 23 as a phosphate salt, . M.P.: 175°C (gum, Kofler).
Cz3H21FN302 . 2.5H3PO4 d) Preparation of lactate salt of compound 23 A pre-cooled on of 85% lactic acid (CAS 505) (41 uL; 0.434 mmol) in EtOH (3.5 mL) was added slowly to a solution of free base of compound 23 (100 mg; 0.217 mmol) in ACN (6.5 mL) at 50°C and the resulting solution was allowed to cool to room temperature and stirred overnight. The solution was ated to dryness and the residue was taken up with ACN (2 mL). The itate was ed, washed with EtZO and dried yielding 74 mg (60%) of compound 23 as a lactate salt, M.P.: 118°C (DSC). 023H21FN802. C3H603 . H20. e) ation of te salt of compound 23 A oled on of fumaric acid (50 mg; 0.434 mmol) in EtOH (3.5 mL) was added slowly to a solution of free base of compound 23 (100 mg; 0.217 mmol) in ACN (6.5 mL) at 50°C and the resulting solution was allowed to cool to room temperature and stirred overnight. The precipitate was filtered, washed with ACN then EtZO and dried yielding 70 mg (60%) of compound 23 as a fumarate salt, . M.P.:186°C (DSC). C23H21FN802 . 0.5C4H4O4 . H20.
Salt Preparation of compound 24 f) Preparation of sulphate salt of compound 24 Free base of compound 24 (150 mg; 0.339 mmol) was diluted in a mixture of EtOH (10 mL) and ACN (5 mL) and the reaction mixture was refluxed until dissolution. The solution was cooled down to 10°C, then a solution of concentrated sulfuric acid (36 ul; 0.68 mmol) in EtOH (150 pl) was added and the reaction mixture was allowed to stand overnight. The precipitate was filtered, washed with EtZO and dried under vaccum and to give 155 mg (81%) of compound 24 as a sulphate salt. M.P.: 266°C (DSC). C23H22N302 . 1.03HZSO4. 1.17H20 g) Preparation of phosphate salt of compound 24 Free base of compound 24 (150 mg; 0.339 mmol) was d in EtOH (10 mL) and the reaction mixture was refluxed until dissolution. The solution was cooled down to 10°C, then a solution of phosphoric acid 85% (47pl; 0.68 mmol) in EtOH (0.5 mL) was added and the mixture was allowed to stand for 4 days. The precipitate was ed, washed with EtZO and dried under vaccum to give 133 mg (71%) of compound 24 as a phosphate salt. M.P.: 253°C (DSC). C23H22N802 . 1.13H3PO4 . 0.06 Et20 h) Preparation of DL- tartrate salt of compound 24 Free base of compound 24 (150 mg; 0.339 mmol) was diluted in EtOH (10 mL) and the reaction mixture was refluxed until dissolution and the solution was cooled down to °C. A solution of DL-tartric acid (102 mg; 0.678 mmol) in EtOH (5 mL) at 50°C was added to the previous solution and the reaction mixture was allowed to stand for 4 days.
The precipitate was filtered, washed with EtQO, dried under vaccum and to give 163 mg (70%) of compound 24 as a DL- tartrate salt M.P.: 176°C (Kofler). C23H22N802 . 1.4C4H606 . 1.8HZO i) Preparation of fumarate salt of compound 24 Free base of compound 24 (150 mg; 0.339 mmol) was diluted in EtOH (10 mL) and the reaction mixture was refluxed until dissolution and the solution was cooled down to °C. A on of fumaric acid (78.7 mg; 0.678 mmol) in EtOH (5 mL) at 50°C was added to the previous solution and the reaction mixture was allowed to stand for 4 days.
The precipitate was filtered, washed with EtZO, dried under vaccum and to give 114 mg (61%) of compound 24 as a fumarate salt. M.P.: 222°C (DSC). C23H22N802. 0.9C4H4O4 . 0.25HZO j) Preparation of hydrochloric acid salt of compound 24 A 4M solution of hloride acid in oxane (4.6 mL; 18.195 mmol) was added se to a cooled solution of compound 14 (1 g; 1.819 mmol) in ACN (36 mL). The reaction mixture was heated at 50°C for 18 hours and cooled to room temperature. The precipitate was filtered, washed with EtZO and dried yielding 570 mg (65%) of nd 24 as a hydrochloride sait 100 mg of the residue was recrystallized from MeOH (4 mL).
The solid was filtered and dried under vaccum yielding 68 mg of compound 24 as a hYdrOChloride salt. M..P> 260°C (K) C23H22N802 . I . 0.86H20.
The following compounds were prepared ing to reaction protocols of one of the above Examples using alternative starting materials as appropriate.
In the table =CoX (or =BX) indicates that the preparation of this compound is bed in Conversion X (or Method BX).
In the table ~CoX (or ~BX) indicates that this compound is prepared according to Conversion X (or Method BX).
As understood by a person skilled in the art, compounds synthesised using the protocols as ted may exist as a e e.g. hydrate, and/or contain residual solvent or minor impurities. Compounds isolated as a salt form, may be integer stoichiometric i.e. mono— or di-salts, or of intermediate stoichiometry.
Table A1: compounds and physico-chemical data MP MP HPLC MS LC/GC/ Comp Compound Struct. Method (°C) (°C) Rt M+ (H+) MS (min) Method Kofler DSC 23 QQfl =C1 228°C 2.3 461 1 //0RS “KI/Q/N\N7 /° N 7 |“\ =B4 65°C 2.5 451 1 / N/ / N"(/N 9 =85 227°C 2.5 473 1 MP MP LC/GC/ 0321p nd Struct. Method (°C) (°C) MS (min) Method Kofler DSC o F g 16 N =86 208°C / \ —o F / — \ /'|“ /LNH o N N N ’2” =33 183°C / \ \ 1/ / F N 0\ #; / /N o F QN 218° ~85 / \ 70 F / — \ /“|‘ / a” o NZg 2%?" 2.35 443 1 / \ _O N / _ \ / T / N\ N o F ~C1 248°C 2.3 479 1 W0 2013/061080 2012/052672 MP MP HPLC MS LC/GC/ Com p Compound Struct. Method (°C) (°C) Rt m+(H+) MS (mm). Method Kofler DSC /O O\ 1 /N /N 1900 26 s =C2 2.75 508 1 N N \N~ ’N C /’ N/ / OH 0 F g QN ~86 220°C 2.35 443 1 NJ’CN g / 1 /O ; N N =B1 2.31 448 1 \ \ / NJLN g /N (I) N N N \N~ 21 \ \ ~B6 2.43 407 1 / N/ 19 ON NM ~86 157°C 2.71 421 1 _ / 0 g 18 ON ~86 169°C 2.54 421 1 . N _.O \ N / _ NfCN/ h“ F F Hg /N 8 /o N N\ Nj/QN— ~B4 186°C 2.89 475 1 Q 1/ N.
WO 61080 HPLC MS LC/GC/ Compound Struct. Rt M+ (H+) MS (min) Method 2.54 455 1 2.61 457 1 2.31 466 1 2.39 484 1 2.27 456 1 2.15 456 1 W0 2013/061080 MP MP HPLC MS LC/GC/ Comp Compound . Method (°c) (0c) Rt m+ (14*) MS (mm). Method Kofler DSC / NH 0 F § 3a N =32 159°C / ”\ —° F / _ HT 0 / / \é/N / (\N/u \ 0 Ni O 13 N ~B5 / \ 22 o F WT/ J o o//S\N/\> / \u " 1 14 (I) NW: 1;” ~35 215 2.81 550 Q N\ / N/ 0 / (\N’\\§\’N\ —O F N7 0 GM ~85 / \ O\ F / m N\ /’.“ é N / \NM | / 0 N N\ N\ \ 22 U | :87 / / “p / N N\ F N N N I/” 1 27 U 1\ \ 130 2.38 419 / / F i WO 61080 LC/GC/ Compound Struct. Method MS Method WO 61080 MP MP HPLC MS LC/GC/ ComNop Compound Struct. Method (00) (0C) Rt M+(H+) MS ' (min) Method Kofler D80 33 F F F Rors N/ N /\N 1 ‘N\ \ 208 2.87 475 _J___ or / I “\N 1 |”\ Nj/Q 208 2.87 475 / N/ (Q ~/ cu N l/\N N\ N\ / 1 | TL 245 2.37 477 / / I \u 1 N N\ N\ / 190 2.32 478 / N/ 53 //° “(Q N/ I I \N 1 o N\ N N\ / 176 2.53 478 50 (I) F OH cl) RF]: ’9" 162- 1 N 2.42 487 N\ N\ 163 F N/ 51 (I, \ 1 180 2.66 487 MP MP LC/GC/ nd Struct. Method (OC) (°C) Method Kofler DSC 1 ——‘ 127 2.53 478 128 2.29 496 181 2.52 496 MP MP HPLC MS LC/GC/ ComNop Compound Struct. Method (°C) (°C) Rt M+(H+) MS ' (min) Method Kofler DSC L 44 M a I F I \N 1 80 2.23 396 F N; 59 I sag I ('3 1 N N 94-95 2.45 469 / N/Nj/IQN 58 | “'21 I ('J 1 N 94-95 2.45 469 N\ Nj/DN / N/ 56 °b I N/ 99 1 I F W IN 2.43 524 o N N\ N\ / (gum) I IN/ 55 ‘b g "I 1 I F j/E 227 2.67 524 c N\ N N\ / FmN/ 54 //° R N/ ('3 125 1 N N I)” N\ 2.36 460 U \ I (gum) / N/ 86 v“ Kw / (I) F N I: N I)" 1 \ \ 155 2.24 462 / N/ LC/GC/ nd Struct. Method MS Method WO 61080 MP MP HPLC MS LC/GC/ ComNop Compound Struct. Method (°C) (°C) Rt M+(H+) MS ' (min) Method Kofler D80 77 Y (I) F g 1 96-97 2.95 497 N N E” I}. 81 HN/ / T l 0' NH N N ’>“ 80°C 1 \ \ 2.25 488 I | / / gum Cl ‘N/ 82 HN/ j) “' NH 1}" 100° N N 1 “LI\ C 2.38 488 CI N/ gum 80 “Q 150° Kg "/ C’ F N (I) ’/"\ 1 N N\ N\ >230o 2.59 511 I l / / N/ polym /o orph 75 Y fl 1/ 148 1 (I) 1/1 2.71 497 (N /N\ N\ 149 / N/ 73 1—.- (QHN N/ <1: 0' UN N N I)" |\ \ F N/ 72 “/9 (K "/ 1 I \N o N N\ N\ / >260 Q1/ N 2012/052672 MP MP HPLC MS LC/GC/ ComNop Compound Struct. Method (°C) (°C) Rt M+(H+) MS ' (min) Method Kofler DSC 234 2.27 444 130 2.12 138 2.30 442 169 2.06 442 68 N/ C!) F HNHQ N N FumAll/[2" 198 2.17 442 (I) 0' (k;HN/\> fig1 2.37 481 / N/NYC" 61 Y 176 2.67 515 MP MP HPLC MS LC/GC/ ComNop Compound . Method (°C) (°C) Rt M+(H+) MS ' (min) Method Kofler DSC 78 Y j RWKSE / 143 1 i Nj/E/l)” 2.71 497 N N\ 144 / N/ 79 Y Sz’nj: N/ 1 (I) I /\” 142 2.71 497 N N\ N\ / N/ __1__ 87 //° W N/ a J) 1 N\ N Nj/L’?“ 160 2.65 528 88 ; s N/ ' 1 N |N\ Nj/L’)" 112% 2.42 528 c1 N/ 89 /° N/ (IfI I \N 1 N N\ / 183 2.74 498 CUN/ 92 //° R N/ I I \N 1 o N\ N N\ / 2.74 498 (1.119 95 HN/\> / | ‘ Kk" I "\N O N N\ N\ / I 230 2.07 447 1 / N/ 2012/052672 MP MP HPLC MS LC/GC/ ComNop Compound Struct. (°C) (°C) Rt M+(H+) MS ' (min) Method Kofler DSC 97 7 R N/ J) \ N ’/" N\ N\ 150 2.42 528 1 ct N/ 98 HN/Q> / I °‘ (H ("\N O N N\ N\ / ‘ 210 2.40 511 1 / / C! N 100 @ wo 2013/061080 MP MP HPLC MS LC/GC/ ComNop Compound . Method (°C) (°C) Rt M+(H+) MS ' (min) Method Kofler DSC 112 4° o / 1 (k/ MN 0 N N N\ / UM 207 2.54 480 1 113 p / ([3 F\ N N\/N\ £2“ 1/ 1/ j 212 2.48 475 1 114 N46 k 1 . HQ ["1 o N N N\ / U/ 222 2.73 475 1 115 v“ N .1 F (I) N N N I)" 130 U\ 2.61 461 1 \ (gum) 118 v“ M ./ | f 1x 0 N /“ INTL 220 2.43 461 1 \ N/ 119 ° (I) F 226 2.68 506 1 N NJN3/131./ 120 0 (f / | F 80’ 2.45 506 1 o N N\ N\ / gum / N/j/CN W0 61080 fi—___ MP MP HPLC MS LC/GC/ Comp Compound Struct. Method Rt MS N0 (°C) (°C) M+(H*) Method Kofler DSC [(min) 121 HN/ I F N f N :31 U\ 239 2.13 442 1 F N/ 122 HN/ I F H IN\N ° N 2* “K ’ 80 'N/ 187' 442 1 \ gum 123 ° Raw/{O / I My IN‘N o N N N\ / 215 2.54 480 1 124 /0 RHN o / I (b INN o N /~ ~\ / 197 2.33 480 1 \ N/ 125 :"m / F N\ I I o N /N N\ /N I 202 2.33 461 1 \ N/ 128 / I / I F (K) I"‘ o N /N Nj/QN 194 2.50 475 1 \ IN/ 129 “(EU / I ° I "\N 0 / UN /N N\ l 137 2.95 461 1 \ / 2012/052672 MP MP HPLC MS LC/GC/ 0fimp Compound Struct. Method (°C) (°C) Rt M+(H+) M3 (min) Method Kofler DSC 131 \ F £3N 7 1 I 1.
° N /" “K / 235 2.33 475 1 \ IN/ 132 \ (I) F 9 N N N [/\N / \ 235 2.14 476 1 \ N/ 133 0 | J 230 2.71 488 1 O N\ N N\TC”/ [ 3 UN/ 134 ° J 7 | 142 2.50 488 1 O / QN /N N\ \ ,/IL“ 135 (”13‘ / N N\ W (I) I /N N N N / \ 1 145 130 2.34 475 1 \ / 137 H KU‘ / F N I IN‘/N /” 185- \ 2.27 475 1 I 185 RSp / (I) I N N N :'\N / \ 94 2.88 479 1 \ / MP MP HPLC MS LC/GC/ Comp Compound Struct. Method No (’0) (°C) Rt M+(H+) MS ' (min) Method Kofler DSC 140 ”,1 | (MN I"{ o N N N /N 149 / IND/L\ 1.90 463 1 \ (gum) 141 (Q.m (L N N I/“ / N\ I 285 2.21 429 1 \ N/ 142 (Q0 / UN /N | 150 \ yN 2.53 433 1 (gum) 143 (Q0 / (I) F N I)” N\11/N\ 174 2.75 451 1 144 (Q0 / F “\ A N /N N\ I/N \ IN/ 213 2.48 451 1 145 ”OZ 2, F (k3 TC“N3 fij \ .N/ 146 ° ,2 / 0N /N \ Nj/[yN MP MP HPLC MS LC/GC/ ComNop Compound . Method (°C) (°C) Rt M+(H+) MS ' (min) Method Kofler DSC 147 0 ~\ 162 (I) NH ”TEN 2.78 476 1 Q(IN\ (gum) 148 0 F ~\ 190 A NH Nj/lL/N 2.76 494 1 ~\ (gum) 149 ° F NH/N INj/DN“\ 156 A 2.48 494 1 (gum) \ / 150 ("Xe (L NH UN 200 202 2.63 474 1 1Q 11N\ N\ 151 Q80 (L NH N Nj/L‘N 106 113 2.41 474 1 Q/ w \ / 152 ""3 | I/LN 0ON /N N\ I 252 2.82 439 1 \ / 154 “(C0) / (I) N N FuN/\ 1\raj/L5" 226 2.87 483 1 [MP MP HPLC MS LC/GC/ Comp Compound Struct. Method Rt MS No (°C) (°C) M+(H+) ' (min) Method Kofler DSC 155 H ° I 1. 160 2.62 461 1 \ N/ 156 C540 I F H I "‘N o N / 211 207 2.61 492 1 N\ElfN\ 157 CK) I H I ”\N o N / 222 224 2.38 /N N\ 492 1 \ IN/ 158 o F N‘ I 1 o N N UN/N\ /N 199 2.62 492 1 /° J_ 159 o S / F N‘ I I o N /N N\ /N 120 2.32 492 1 \ N/ 160 o 198 2.62 492 1 F N‘ I I o N N N\ /N 161 110 2.32 492 1 \ /o RN / F ”\ o N [/N /N N\ \ N/ 2012/052672 MP MP HPLC MS LC/GC/ ComNop Compound Struct. Method (°c) (°c) Rt M+(H+) M3 ' (min) Method Kofler DSC 162 0 183 2.26 k HN/C/ 498 1 F N\ (I) NH/N \ Nj/LN F N/ 163 0ANL0 182 2.39 554 1 F N\ (I) NKf/N \ Nj/Ey" F N/ 164 (11 Lo 218 2.66 554 1 6” ~/ (I) F \ N\ N l NjLN 165 155 3.11 461 1 (I) N\ N Q 12%NjLN 166 158 2.79 461 1 0 N/ (I) (O [: N /N \ IN/Nj/E/UN 167 2% 169 2.19 424 1 F Nj/DNN\ (I) N\ N 168 NH: 170 2.08 424 1 F N\ WO 61080 LC/GC/ M+ (H+) MS Method WO 61080 _.T______ MP MP HPLC MS LC/GC/ Com9 Compound Struct. Method (°C) (°C) Rt M+(H+) MS (min) Method Kofler DSC 17g 185 2.65 490 1 I/N N/ (I) F \ N /N \ Nj/Efl‘N/ 179 262 2.98 490 1 (I) F \ N\ N KIN/Nj/H/V/N 180 N”0 182 2.68 476 1 A N /N \ IN/Nj/[fl‘ 181 To 190 2.94 476 1 ('3 N\ N MN/NTE/f' 182 HN |—' (K? 250 2.36 440 1 | I OQN /N N\ \ 184 04; 180 2.92 476 1 (I) N\ N \ IN/Nj/QN 185 0'N\ 207 2.64 476 1 (I) N /N \ Nj/LN/ WO 61080 MP LC/GC/ Cfironp Compound Struct. Method (°C) MS Method Kofler 171 0 172 1 RM / I (O N‘ I N 1903 245 MP MP HPLC MS LC/GC/ ComN09 nd Struct. Method (00) (’0) Rt M+(H+) MS ' (min) Method Kofler DSC 195 JVA“ 197 2.44 475 1 . .\ (I) N /N \ iN/Nj/[yN 196 (g/”"11- 162 2.78 475 1 F N\ (I) N\ N Nj/LN 197 H 249 1.92 445 1 ,,N / .1 K: TC” 198 H113 232 2.60 442 1 200 ”N3 236 2.81 457 1 | F Kg” 0fijN /N N\ \ IN. 202 H113 2.36 440 1 1, (5': N :1" 204 HoZ 2.25 488 1 MP MP HPLC MS LC/GC/ Com p nd Struct. Method (’0) (°C) Rt M+(H+) MS (mm). Method 211 “N \ 252 2.34 458 1 I (01> 0 N /N 213 0” 203 2.46 404 1 l H MP MP HPLC MS LC/GC/ Cramp Compound Struct. Method (°C) (°C) Rt M+(H+) MS 0' (min) Method Kofler DSC 214 0/ 98, 2.60 453 1 / gum 1 (K0 O N /N N\ / \ fbi 215 ”N’\> 222 2.31 484 1 F \N o . NI 217 Nro 240 2.4 445 “I 1 0 NaU N ./Nj/E:N L L 218 ”01 130 2.24 522 1 /O N I/N a? N\ N\ / ./ 219 ”° 112 2.47 522 1 SENSEO / I /N /O N N (111”.N\I 208 74°“ 124 108,123 2.59 511 1 | (k N O N /N N\ \ IN/ 96 192 2.05 447 1 _l______ MP MP HPLC MS LC/GC/ Comp nd Struct. Method (°C) (°C) Rt M+(H+) MS (mm). Method Kofler DSC 220 M 153 2.9 533 1 f5" / Me: \Nfi (Z. N I\ N]/[:\N\ / ./ 221 “ML0 151 2.3 480 1 2 ~< /oKlN N\ / raj/Ky"./ 222 °ANL0 - - 3.01 536 2 2 ~/ /0figN N\ Njin / N. 223 ”"3 124, 3.01 475 2 F (KN IN‘N guml (j I: TLN 225 \ 220 2.43 503% 1 MF’ MP HPLC MS LC/GC/ Cfimp Compound . Method (°C) (°C) Rt M+ (11*) MS (min) Method Kofler DSC 91 0 176 2.41 498 1 S / c1 N\ 0&1:| N\ Sor l Nj/DN 93 O 160 2.41 498 1 /o\<:EN\£N:ENj/E¢NC1 R N\ Cl N/ RorS 94 o 176 2.41 498 1 HN gum C] R N\ Cl N/ SorR 227 236 2.74 512 2 (”NOB 0 N I: N:7L I /\N my 1: 23o “Non/V 258 2.77 482 2 F N\ / N/ 232 OH H~ 2.11 491 1 \ 147, F fiwrc 9““ 233 H 194 2.17 455 1 MP MP HPLC MS LC/GC/ ComNop Compound Struct. Method (°C) (°C) Rt M+(H+) MS ' (min) Method Kofler DSC —l >260 2.43 439 2 235 193 2.29 448 1 HMj; a ~/ /0U uN N\ Nj/EéNN. 733 an 128 2.58 539 1 239 ”"2 145 2.15 438 1 240 3g 180 1 2.27 519 1 HN \ F (K? N‘ o N /N \1 N/ ._..—I—— 242 ° 131 2.26 466 1 243 o 195 2.47 466 1 MP MP HPLC MS LC/GC/ 0fimp nd Struct. Method (°C) (°C) Rt M+(H+) MS (min) Method Kofler DSC 244 / 101, 2.26 505 1 h” gum F OH O N /N N\j/E/W/ 1... 249 208 2.46 480 1 F (K0 “f /o N N\ / .rNj/[//N 37 172 2.43 466 1 \N / I /N /O N UKN\ 38 W 140 2.27 438 1 (I) N\ MKJ I /N QJQN/N\| .1 L 104 60 2.01 516 1 _‘Kl’fl / /O /\N QN\ N\ / N/ 284 M 252 2.29 479 1 oé< \ / O N\ /O N QN\ N\ /N / N/ 245 200 2.57 453 1 I Hyg I N‘N MP MP HPLC MS LC/GC/ Comp Compound . Method MS No (00) (°C) Rt M+(H+) ' (min) Method Kofler DSC 246 2% 114— 2.78 453 1 I IN‘N 115 O N N N / QFUN/|\ 247 HO O 108 2.43 522 1 Xfib gum F R ,oU UNN N Nij 250 any 12% 96 «R i 235 2.26 503 1 199 2.8 413 1 W0 61080 MP MP HPLC MS LC/GC/ ComNop Compound Struct. Method (°C) (°C) Rt M+(H+) MS ‘ 1(min) Method Kofler D80 254 210 2.54 413 1 F \ /O [11 [/N N\ N\ F N/ 257 205 2.99 427 T. 1 F W N. /o N N N [/N 256 207 2.67 427 1 F \ N3 /0 N I/N N\ N\ F N/ 258 n >260 1‘229 462 1 W” / F N N\ /0 N I/N N\ N\ / N/ ___l 259 154 2.08 493 1 NH : N“ 2 I F (\NH 0 N N\ N\ \j 1/ NI 261 180 1.97 458 1 o (j;N N N N )/\N HN \ \ 262 0 100—1 2.03 507 1 .3110!»/% N / N/ o\ L WO 61080 MP MP HPLC MS LC/GC/ Com p Compound Struct. Method N (°C) (°C) Rt M+(H+) MS (mm). Method Kofler DSC 1 0.x 180 2.36 3.16 ’753 2.83 453 2.14 TL 494 1 270 CH 216 2.31 494 1 F fio /o N N KL UNl , 271 160 2.16 476 1 WO 61080 MP MP 1 HPLC MS LC/GC/ Com 9 Compound Struct. Method (°C) (°C) Rt M+ (H+) MS No ' (min) Method Kofler DSC 272 03 135 2.33 476 1 ([8 gum s :O /O N§ N (J :1N\ O\ L 273 (13> 133 2.41 457 1 /o N N\ N\ \ / / 275 172 2.39 561 1 DN/N /N / (fig/:00 /” / /0 (/19 277 174 2.82 435 T 1 X / Cl) N N 01:: I /N 276 217 2.65 435 1 7% / ('3 HO I N /N /N /N U I \ \N 278 234 2.52 471 1 | %\OH N\ O N /N /N /N F \N 280 238 2.32 457 1 é (UN; N/ N\ N N\ N\ /N UI / N/ WO 61080 MP MP HPLC MS LC/GC/ Com p Compound Struct. Method (°C) (°C) Rt M+ (H+) MS (mm). Method Kofler DSC 282 flN/éfi” 104 2.15 504 Ho : Ofi I gum N N :‘N / UU :IL 283 162 145 2.12 522 Hoflfljfifi /O N N N /\N UI : : 285 ° 1 14 2.28 536 HN HO>§ gum F N\ /o N N\ Nj/QN / N/ 286 f 1 10 2.48 536 1 HN HOK gum F N\ I /N /o N N UMN\ 264 o§s/\ 126 2.22 553 1 (:NH gum [4 I NJ\ I N‘N 287 (FX( 213 2.3 475 1 c IMP MP HPLC MS LC/GC/ fimp Compound . Method (°C) (°C) Rt M+ (11*) MS (min) Method Kofler DSC 290 2.3 462 1 0Q\NH 66 R Ni /0UUN/N N\ Nj/QN 291 190 2.28 466 1 (01HN \ O 293 162 2.31 448 1 HN/\§ 295 Hm 171 1.98 504 1 UI: : 297 N—0 170 2.53 477 1 (MN/>\ \/ gum /O N l/N 1% N\ N\ / N. 299 /7> 133- 2.05 519 1 £0 134 /OE;EN\CEij:/\Ng<>w gum ’\ I 301 3; 126 1 V> 1 /0 N N N ‘/\N 1: E "-_T MP MP HPLC MS LC/GC/ Comp Compound . Method (°C) (°C) Rt MHH”) MS (min) Method Kofler DSC Gum 2.41 563 1 (“3 (£0 at 92 60 114 2.68 469 1 Analytical Part LC/GC/NMR The LC/GC data ed in Table A1 were determined as follows.
General procedure A The LC measurement was med using a UPLC (Ultra Performance Liquid Chromatography) Acquity (Waters) system comprising a binary pump with er, an autosampler, a array detector (DAD) and a column as specified in the respective methods below, the column is hold at a temperature of 40°C. Flow from the column was brought to a MS detector. The MS detector was configured with an electrospray ionization source. The ary needle voltage was 3 kV and the source temperature was maintained at 130 °C on the Quattro (triple quadrupole mass spectrometer from Waters). Nitrogen was used as the nebulizer gas. Data acquisition was performed with a Waters-Micromass MassLynx-Openlynx data system.
Method 1 in addition to the general procedure A: Reversed phase UPLC was carried out on a Waters Acquity BEH (bridged ethylsiloxane/silica hybrid) C18 column (1.7 um, 2.1 x 100 mm) with a flow rate of 0.343 mI/min. Two mobile phases (mobile phase A: 95 % 7 mM ammonium acetate / 5 % acetonitrile; mobile phase B: 100 % acetonitrile) were employed to run a gradient condition from 84.2 % A and 15.8 % B (hold for 0.49 minutes) to 10.5 % A and 89.5 % B in 2.18 s, hold for 1.94 min and back to the initial conditions in 0.73 min, hold for 0.73 minutes. An injection volume of 2 pl was used. Cone voltage was 20V for positive and negative ionization mode. Mass spectra were acquired by scanning from 100 to 1000 in 0.2 seconds using an interscan delay of 0.1 seconds.
General ure B The LC measurement was performed using a UPLC (Ultra mance Liquid Chromatography) H-Class (Waters) system comprising a nary pump with degasser, an autosampler, a diode-array detector (DAD) and a column as specified in the respective methods below, the column is hold at a ature of 40°C. Flow from the column was brought to a MS detector. The MS detector was configured with an electrospray ionization source. The capillary needle voltage was 3. kV and the source temperature was maintained at 130 °C on the SQD2 e quadrupole mass spectrometer from Waters). Nitrogen was used as the nebulizer gas. Data acquisition was performed with a Waters-Micromass MassLynx—Openlynx data system.
Method 2 In addition to the general procedure B: Reversed phase UPLC was carried out on a Waters Acquity BEH (bridged ethylsiloxane/silica hybrid) C18 column (1.7 pm, 2.1 x 100 mm) with a flow rate of 0.343 ml/min. Two mobile phases (mobile phase A: 95 % 7 mM ammonium acetate / 5 % acetonitrile; mobile phase B: 100 % itrile) were employed to run a nt condition from 84.2 % A and 15.8 % B (hold for 0.49 minutes) to 10.5 % A and 89.5 % B in 2.18 minutes, hold for 1.94 min and back to the l conditions in 0.73 min, hold for 0.73 minutes. An injection volume of 2 Di was used. Cone voltage was 20V for ve and negative ionization mode. Mass spectra were acquired by scanning from 100 to 1000 in 0.15 seconds using an interscan delay of 0.05 seconds. 3O DSC: For a number of compounds reported in Table A1, melting points (m.p.) were determined with a DSC1 Stare System (Mettler—Toledo). Melting points were measured with a temperature gradient of 10 °C/minute. Maximum temperature was 350 °C. Values are peak values.” Optical Rotation (OR) was measured with a polarimeter 341 Perkin Elmer.
The polarized light was passed through a sample with a path length of 1 decimeter and a sample concentration of 0.250 to 0.500 gram per 100 milliliters. dT : (red rotation x 100) / (1.000 dm x concentration). d is sodium D line (589 nanometer).
T is the temperature (°C) - Co. 33: [01]d: —10.78 ° (c 0.306 w/v %, DMF, 20 °C) - Co. 34: [51d : +8.86 ° (C 0.271 w/v %, DMF, 20 °C) 52 [01]d: +4803 ° (589 - Co. nm, c 0.279 w/v %, DMF, 20 °C) — Co. 53: [01]d: ~18.15 ° (589 nm, 0 0.336 w/v %, DMF, 20 °C) - Co. 49: [01]d: -117.78 ° (589 nm, c 0.343 w/v %, DMF, 20 °C) - Co. 48: [01]d: 2731 ° (589 nm, c 0.3735 w/v %, DMF, 20 °C) - Co. 47: [01]d: +8272 ° (589 nm, 0 0.272 w/v %, DMF, 20 °C) ° (589 — Co. 46: [01]d: —46.92 nm, 0 0.3325 w/v %, DMF, 20 °C) Co.45: [01]d:+16.12 ° (589 — nm, c 0.3785 w/v %, DMF, 20 °C) — Co. 192: [aldz +2685 ° (589 nm, 0 0.406 w/v %, DMF, 20 °C) - Co. 193: -84.89 ° (589 nm, c 0.2945 w/v %, DMF, 20 °C) - Co. 59: [a]d: precision to low — Co. 58: [01]d: ion to low +108.08 ° (589 - Co. 54: [01]d: nm, 0 0.198 w/v %, DMF, 20 °C) - Co. 62: [01]d: —31,87 ° (589 nm, c 0,251 w/v %, DMF, 20 °C) Co. [01]d: +31 ° (589 - 63: nm, c 0,2645 w/v %, DMF, 20 °C) - Co. 78: [01]d: precision to low — Co. 79: Mid: precision to low Co. 87: [a]d: +67.18 ° (589 - nm, c 0.262 w/v %, DMF, 20 °C) ° (589 - Co. 88: [01]d: -23.68 nm, 0 0.228 w/v %, DMF, 20 °C) - Co. 89: [01]d: +6788 ° (589 nm, 0 0.33 w/v %, DMF, 20 °C) - Co. 92: [01]d: -68.09 ° (589 nm, c 0.3525 w/v %, DMF, 20 °C) - Co. 97: [01]d: +18.15 ° (589 nm, c 0.303 w/v %, DMF, 20 °C) - Co. 123: [011dz -30.89 ° (589 nm, C 0.3075 w/v %, DMF, 20 °C) Co. +2382 ° (589 - 124 [0].; nm, 0 0.319 w/v %, DMF, 20 °C) Co. 158: [odd ° (589 - : +2358 nm, c 0.335 w/v %, DMF, 20 °C) Co. 159 laid: -158.03 ° (589 - nm, c 0.274 w/v %, DMF, 20 °C) - Co. 160: [G]d2 —24.04 ° (589 nm, 0 0.312 w/v %, DMF, 20 °C) Co. 161: [G]d2 +147.79 ° (589 - nm, 0 0.272 w/v %, DMF, 20 °C) - Co. 218: [01],,2 -137.19 ° (589 nm, 0 0.199 w/v %, DMF, 20 °C - Co. 90: [Ci]d2 -20.09 ° (589 nm, 0 0.3185 w/v %, DMF, 20 °C) Co. 91: [d] :-34.93 ° (589 - d nm, 0 0.292 w/v %, DMF, 20 °C) ° (589 - Co. 93: [or] D. : +20.07 nm, 0 0.294 w/v %, DMF, 20 °C) ° (589 — Co. 94: [d] d: +3667 nm, 0 0.3 w/v %, DMF, 20 °C) NMR Data The below NMR experiments were carried out using a Bruker Avance 500 and a Bruker Avance DRX 400 spectrometers at ambient temperature, using internal deuterium lock and equipped with reverse triple—resonanoeCH, N TXI) probe head for the 500MHz and with reverse double—resonance (H, 13C, SEi) probe head for the 400MHz.
Chemicai shifts (6) are reported in parts per million (ppm).
Compound 3 1H NMR (500 MHz, 6) 6 9.04 (s, 1H), 8.64 (s, 1H), 8.27 (s, 1H), 8.07 (br.s, 1H), 7.14 (t, J = 8.0Hz, 1H), 6.68 (br.s, 1H), 3.94—4.13 (m, 11H), 2.77 (t, J = 7.4 Hz, 2H), 2.29 (s, 3H).
Compound 1 1H NMR (500 MHz, 6) 6 8.95 (s, 1H), 8.61 (s, 1H), 8.25 (s, 1H), 7.92 (d, J: 9.2 Hz, 1H), 6.78 (d, J = 9.2 Hz, 1H), 6.62 (d, J = 2.2 Hz, 2H), 6.55 (t, J = 2.2 Hz, 1H), 4.12 (t, J = 6.9 Hz, 2H), 3.94 (s, 3H), 3.77 (s, 6H), 2.82 (t, J = 6.9 Hz, 2H), 2.69 (spt, J = 6.2 Hz, 1H), 1.77 (br.s, 1H), 0.95 (d, J: 6.2 Hz, 6H).
Compound 2 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) 6 8.98 (s, 1H), 8.61 (s, 1H), 8.25 (s, 1H), 8.00 (d, J: 9.2 Hz, 1H), 6.53-6.92 (m, 3H), 4.10 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 2H), 3.94 (s, 3H), 3.89 (s, 3H), 3.79 (s, 3H), 2.81 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 2H), 2.69 (spt, J: 6.1 Hz, 1H), 1.62 (br.s, 1H), 0.94 (d, J: 6.1 Hz, 6H).
Compound 23 1H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) 6 11.82 (br.s, 1H), 9.03 (s, 1H), 8.63 (s, 1H), 8.27 (s, 1H), 8.07 (d, J = 9.1 Hz, 1H), 6.80 —- 7.16 (m, 3H), 6.77 (dd, J: 6.7, 3.0 Hz, 1H), 6.59 (dd, J = 5.5, 3.0 Hz, 1H), 5.27 (br.s, 2H), 3.93 (s, 3H), 3.86 (s, 3H), 3.69 (s, 3H).
Compound 24 1H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) 6 12.72 (br.s, 1H), 9.02 (s, 1H), 8.61 (s, 1H), 8.25 (s, 1H), 8.03 (d, J = 9.2 Hz, 1H), 7.08 (s, 2H), 6.92 (d, J = 9.2 Hz, 1H), 6.66 (d, J = 2.2 Hz, 40 2H), 6.52 (t, J = 2.2 Hz, 1H), 5.43 (s, 2H), 3.93 (s, 3H), 3.73 (s, 6H).
Compound 52 1H NMR (500 MHz, s) 5 9.02 (s, 1H), 8.62 (s, 1H), 8.26 (s, 1H), 8.03 (d, J = 9.1 Hz, 1H), 7.81 (s, 1H), 6.82 (br. s., 2H), 6.65 - 8.78 (m, 1H), 3.72 - 4.12 (m, 12H), 2.05 - 2.27 (m, 3H), 1.80 (br. s., 1H) Compound 53 1H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO—da) 5 8.72 (s, 1H), 8.54 (s, 1H), 8.24 (s, 1H), 7.83 (s, 1H), 7.54 (d, J =10.1 Hz, 1H), 6.61 (dd, J = 1.58, 10.09 Hz, 1H), 6.37 - 6.43 (m, 1H), 6.06 - 6.13 (m, 1H), 4.70 (dd, J = 6.9, 12.6 Hz, 1H), 4.56 (dd, J = 6.9, 12.6 Hz, 1H), 4.14 - 4.23 (m, 1H), 3.94 (s, 3H), 3.82 (s, 3H), 3.72 (s, 3H), 2.28 - 2.40 (m, 1H), 1.95 - 2.15 (m, 3H) Compound 47 1H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-ds) 5 8.78 (s, 1H), 8.57 (s, 1H), 8.26 (s, 1H), 7.85 (s, 1H), 7.61 (d, J = 9.8 Hz, 1H), 6.69 (t, J = 7.9 Hz, 1H), 6.57 (d, J = 9.8 Hz, 1H), 4.60 - 4.77 (m, 2H), 4.13 - 4.24 (m, 1H), 3.94 (s, 3H), 3.86 (s, 6H), 2.27 - 2.40 (m, 1H), 1.97 - 2.14 (m, 3H) nd 46 1H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-da) 5 9.02 (s, 1H), 8.62 (s, 1H), 8.26 (s, 1H), 8.03 (d, J = 9.1 Hz, 1H), 7.81 (s, 1H), 6.79 - 6.91 (m, 2H), 6.66 - 6.78 (m, 1H), 3.74 - 4.16 (m, 12H), 2.05 - 2.26 (m, 3H), 1.80 (br. s., 1H) Compound 55 1H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-de) 5 8.78 (s, 1H), 8.57 (s, 1H), 8.24 (s, 1H), 7.60 (d, J = 10.1 Hz, 1H), 6.68 (t, J = 8.0 Hz, 1H), 6.57 (d, J =10.1 Hz, 1H), 4.50 - 4.61 (m, 2H), 3.95 (s, 3H), 3.86 (s, 6H), 3.34 - 3.42 (m, 4H), 2.18 (t, J = 8.0 Hz, 2H), 1.92 - 2.02 (m, 2H), 1.81 - 1.91 (m, 2H) Compound 86 1H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO—de) 5 13.84 (s, 1H), 9.03 (s, 1H), 8.62 (s, 1H), 8.46 (br. s., 1H), 8.26 (s, 1H), 8.07 (d, J = 9.1 Hz, 1H), 6.82 — 7.03 (m, 1H), 6.78 (d, J = 3.5 Hz, 1H), 6.70 (br. s., 1H), 5.36 (br. s., 2H), 3.82 - 3.97 (m, 6H), 3.72 (s, 3H) Compound 95 1H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-de) 5 11.80 (br. s., 1H), 9.67 (s, 1H), 9.02 (s, 1H), 8.63 (s, 1H), 8.26 (s, 1H), 8.06 (d, J = 9.1 Hz, 1H), 7.02 (s, 1H), 6.71 — 6.90 (m, 2H), 6.57 (d, J = 4.4 Hz, 1H), 6.39 (d, J = 2.2 Hz, 1H), 4.22 - 6.00 (m, 2H), 3.93 (s, 3H), 3.81 (s, 3H) Compound 111 1H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-ds) 5 9.04 (s, 1H), 8.63 (s, 1H), 8.27 (s, 1H), 8.04 (d, J = 9.1 40 Hz, 1H), 7.89 (br. s., 1H), 6.59 - 6.93 (m, 3H), 4.03 - 4.57 (m, 5H), 3.95 (s, 3H), 3.89 (s, 3H), 3.79 (s, 3H) Compound 221 1H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-ds) 5 8.99 (s, 1H), 8.62 (s, 1H), 8.26 (s, 1H), 8.00 (d, J = 9.1 45 Hz, 1H), 6.81 (dd, J = 2.8, 6.6 Hz, 1H), 6.71 - 6.77 (m, 2H), 4.60 (t, J = 6.6 Hz, 2H), 4.28 (t, J = 6.6 Hz, 2H), 4.06 (br. s., 2H), 3.94 (s, 3H), 3.86 - 3.91 (m, 4H), 3.78 (s, 3H), 2.76 (br. s., 2H), 2.54 - 2.67 (m, 1H) Compound 242 50 1H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-de) 5 9.01 (s, 1H), 8.62 (s, 1H), 8.26 (s, 1H), 8.09 (t, J = 5.52 Hz, 1H), 8.03 (d, J = 9.14 Hz, 1H), 6.82 (dd, J = 3.0, 6.8 Hz, 1H), 6.73 — 6.80 (m, 1H), 6.70 (dd, J = 3.0, 5.2 Hz, 1H), 3.98 - 4.15 (m, 2H), 3.94 (s, 3H), 3.98 (s, 3H), 3.79 (s, 3H), 3.37 - 3.47 (m, 2H), 1.74 (s, 3H) Pharmacological part Biological assays A FGFR1 (enzymatic assay) In a final reaction volume of 30 uL, FGFR1 (h) (25 ng/ml) was incubated with 50 mM HEPES pH 7.5, 6mM MnCIz, 1 mM DTT, 0,1 mM Na3VO4, 0,01% Triton-X-100, 500 nM t3 and 5 pM ATP in the presence of nd (1% DMSO final). After incubation for 60 minutes at room temperature the reaction was stopped with 2.27 nM EU-anti P-Tyr, 7 mM EDTA, 31.25 nM SA-XL-665 and 0.02% BSA which was present for 60 minutes at room temperature. Time—Resolved Fluorescence Resonance Energy Transfer (TR-FRET) signal (ex340 nm. Em 620 nm, em 655 nm) was measured afterwards and results are sed in RFU (Relative Fluorescence Units). In this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compound concentrations (range 10 0M to 0.1 nM) was determined and used to calculate an |C5o (M) and plC50 (~IoglC50) value.
FGFR2 (enzymatic assay) In a final reaction volume of 30 uL, FGFR2 (h) (150 ng/ml) was ted with 50 mM HEPES pH 7.5, 6mM MnC|2, 1 mM DTT, 0,1 mM Na3VO4, 0,01% Triton-X-100, 500 nM Btn-Flt3 and 0.4 pM ATP in the presence of compound (1% DMSO final). After incubation for 60 minutes at room temperature the on was stopped with 2.27 nM EU-anti P-Tyr, 7 mM EDTA, 31.25 nM 665 and 0.02% BSA which was present for 60 minutes at room temperature. Time-Resolved Fluorescence Resonance Energy Transfer (TR—FRET) signal (ex340 nm. Em 620 nm, em 655 nm) was measured afterwards and results are expressed in RFU (Relative Fluorescence . In this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compound concentrations (range 10 pM to 0.1 nM) was determined and used to ate an |C50 (M) and plC5o (-Iog|C50) value.
FGFR3 (enzymatic assay) In a final reaction volume of 30 uL, FGFR3 (h) (40 ng/ml) was incubated with 50 mM HEPES pH 7.5, 6mM MnClg, 1 mM DTT, 0,1 mM Na3VO4, 0,01% Triton-X—1 00, 500 nM Btn-Flt3 and 25 pM ATP in the presence of compound (1% DMSO final). After WO 61080 incubation for 60 minutes at room temperature the reaction was stopped with 2.27 nM EU-anti P-Tyr, 7 mM EDTA, 31.25 nM SA-XL-665 and 0.02% BSA which was present for 60 minutes at room ature. Time-Resolved Fluorescence Resonance Energy Transfer ET) signal (ex340 nm. Em 620 nm, em 655 nm) was measured afterwards and results are expressed in RFU (Relative Fluorescence Units). In this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compound concentrations (range 10 uM to 0.1 nM) was determined and used to calculate an lC50 (M) and plC50 (-loglC50) value.
FGFR4 (enzymatic assay) in a final on volume of 30 uL, FGFR4 (h) (60 ng/ml) was ted with 50 mM HEPES pH 7.5, 6mM MnClg, 1 mM DTT, 0,1 mM Na3VO4, 0,01% Triton-X400, 500 nM Btn-Flt3 and 5 uM ATP in the presence of compound (1% DMSO final). After incubation for 60 minutes at room temperature the reaction was stopped with 2.27 nM EU-anti P- Tyr, 7 mM EDTA, 31.25 nM SA-XL-665 and 0.02% BSA which was t for 60 minutes at room temperature. Time-Resolved Fluorescence Resonance Energy Transfer (TR-FRET) signal (ex340 nm. Em 620 nm, em 655 nm) was measured aften/vards and results are expressed in RFU (Relative scence Units). in this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compound concentrations (range 10 pM to 0.1 nM) was ined and used to calculate an IC50 (M) and plC50 C50) value.
KDR 2) (enzymatic assay) In a final reaction volume of 30 uL, KDR (h) (150 ng/ml) was incubated with 50 mM HEPES pH 7.5, 6mM MnClz, 1 mM DTT, 0,1 mM Na3VO4, 0,01% Triton-X-100, 500 nM Btn-Flt3 and 3 uM ATP in the presence of compound (1% DMSO final). After incubation for 120 minutes at room temperature the reaction was stopped with 2.27 nM EU-anti P- Tyr, 7 mM EDTA, 31.25 nM SA-XL-665 and 0.02% BSA which was present for 60 minutes at room temperature. Time-Resolved Fluorescence Resonance Energy Transfer (TR-FRET) signal (ex340 nm. Em 620 nm, em 655 nm) was measured afterwards and results are sed in RFU (Relative Fluorescence Units). in this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compound concentrations (range 10 uM to 0.1 nM) was determined and used to calculate an IC50 (M) and pleo (-loglC50) value.
Ba/F3-FGFR1 (minus |L3 or plus lL3) (cellular proliferation assay) In a 384 well plate, 100 nl of compound on in DMSO was sprayed before adding 50 ul cell e medium (phenol red free RPMl—1640, 10 % FBS, 2 mM L-Glutamine and 50 ug/ml Gentamycin) containing 20000 cells per well of Ba/F3-FGFR1-transfected cells. Cells were put in an incubator at 37°C and 5 % C02. After 24 hours, 10 pl of Alamar Blue solution (0.5 mM K3Fe(CN)5, 0.5 mM K4Fe(CN)6, 0.15 mM Resazurin and 100 mM Phosphate ) was added to the wells, incubated for 4 hours at 37°C and % C02 before RFU’s (Relative Fluorescence Units) (ex. 540 nm., em. 590 nm.) were measured in a flurorescence plate reader.
In this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compound concentrations (range 10 uM to 0.1 nM) was determined and used to calculate an |C50 (M) and plC50 (~loglC50) value.
As a counterscreen the same experiment was performed in the ce of 10 ng/ml murine lL3.
Ba/F3-FGFR3 (minus lL3 or plus lL3) (cellular proliferation assay) In a 384 well plate, 100 nl of compound dilution in DMSO was sprayed before adding 50 ul cell culture medium (phenol red free RPMl-1640, 10 % FBS, 2 mM L-Glutamine and 50 ug/ml Gentamycin) containing 20000 cells per well of FGFR3-transfected cells. Cells were put in an incubator at 37°C and 5 % C02. After 24 hours, 10 pl of Alamar Blue solution (0.5 mM K3Fe(CN)6, 0.5 mM K4Fe(CN)6, 0.15 mM Resazurin and 100 mM Phosphate Buffer) was added to the wells, incubated for 4 hours at 37°C and % C02 before RFU’s (Relative Fluorescence Units) (ex. 540 nm., em. 590 nm.) were measured in a escence plate reader.
In this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compound concentrations (range 10 (M to 0.1 nM) was determined and used to ate an lC5o (M) and plC5o (~logleo) value.
As a counterscreen the same experiment was performed in the presence of 10 ng/ml murine lL3.
Ba/F3-KDR (minus |L3 or plus lL3) (cellular proliferation assay) In a 384 well plate, 100 nl of compound dilution in DMSO was sprayed before adding 50 ul cell culture medium (phenol red free RPMl—1640, 10 % FBS, 2 mM L—Glutamine and 50 ug/ml ycin) containing 20000 cells per well of Ba/F3—KDR-transfected cells.
Cells were put in an incubator at 37°C and 5 % C02. After 24 hours, 10 ul of Alamar Blue solution (0.5 mM K3Fe(CN)6, 0.5 mM K4Fe(CN)6, 0.15 mM Resazurin and 100 mM Phosphate Buffer) was added to the wells, incubated for 4 hours at 37°C and 5% C02 WO 61080 before RFU’s (Relative Fluorescence Units) (ex. 540 nm., em. 590 nm.) were measured in a escence plate reader.
In this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compound concentrations (range 10 pM to 0.1 nM) was determined and used to calculate an leo (M) and pleo (-logleo) value.
As a counterscreen the same experiment was performed in the presence of 10 ng/ml murine lL3.
Ba/F3-Flt3 (minus |L3 or plus lL3) (cellular proliferation assay) in a 384 well plate, 100 nl of compound dilution in DMSO was sprayed before adding 50 pl cell culture medium l red free RPMl-1640, 10 % FBS, 2 mM L-Glutamine and 50 pg/ml Gentamycin) containing 20000 cells per well of Ba/F3-Flt3-transfected cells.
Cells were put in an incubator at 37°C and 5 % 002. After 24 hours, 10 pl of Alamar Blue solution (0.5 mM K3Fe(CN)5, 0.5 mM K4Fe(CN)6, 0.15 mM Resazurin and 100 mM Phosphate Buffer) was added to the wells, incubated for 4 hours at 37°C and 5% 002 before RFU’s (Relative Fluorescence Units) (ex. 540 nm., em. 590 nm.) were measured in a flurorescence plate reader. in this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compound concentrations (range 10 pM to 0.1 nM) was determined and used to calculate an lC50 (M) and plC5o (-logleo) value.
As a counterscreen the same experiment was performed in the presence of 10 ng/ml murine lL3.
Ba/F3-FGFR4 lar proliferation assay) In a 384 well plate, 100 nl of nd dilution in DMSO was sprayed before adding 50 pl cell culture medium (phenol red free RPMl-1640, 10 % FBS, 2 mM L-Glutamine and 50 pg/ml Gentamycin) containing 20000 cells per well of BalF3—FGFR4—transfected cells. Cells were put in an incubator at 37°C and 5 % C02. After 24 hours, 10 pl of Alamar Blue solution (0.5 mM K3Fe(CN)6, 0.5 mM K4Fe(CN)6, 0.15 mM Resazurin and 100 mM Phosphate Buffer) was added to the wells, incubated for 4 hours at 37°C and % C02 before RFU’s (Relative FluorescenCe Units) (ex. 540 nm., em. 590 nm.) were ed in a flurorescence plate reader.
In this assay, the tory effect of different compound trations (range 10 pM to 0.1 nM) was ined and used to calculate an |C5o (M) and pleo (-loglC50) value.
Data for the compounds of the invention in the above assays are provided in Table A2.
WO 61080 BLANK UPON FILING WO 61080 m5 E a? Rs mm? 8.7 mv 8s mg 8.0 .3? 8o 8.? $<m 12;“. €95qu man; m.__ $03 mv mv mv mv mv mv mv 2m -E<m min. 2:): NE. 803 arm 8m mv mv E mv mg mm:_m> .25 max man: NE 803 mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mmEo>m 2:): .852 -muzm A: 303 E 3m 3 moo 3 3 no mv moo we E 3 mm mm om cm 995 .245 $7.0; man: a: 303 mv mv mv mv av mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv 8:28 “55:6 .35 $7.0“. 2:): me 803 E N? ms 3 of 3 ill ms mom: 3 9w 3 E m: mg E E Lo -mnzm Elem man: mv uconEoo -mnzm ENE“. 2:): mm L8 EomS E9: 803 E m.“ ox E as E to 3 3 3“ ms E we mg N.“ 3 8E: N # Ll 23:3: Na S 9% E S 3w .3 3 3 3 mm 3 M: 86650 Mg N.“ Ow mg E 3 to 3 g 5 3 2w 3 295 E m: as mg S mm 3 0w g m: E mg S m: ow Qm $32. m S mm : mm cm t o $<m E0”. v 803 S: RN RN RN N: RN Nos mws Now was $<m INS“. min: A2. $03 -$<m 3d 2:): a... 303 -mn_<m max man: a: 803 mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv $<m 2:2on 65 803 No «.0 1m Ni NS Nmm m3 m3 ammo m3 who mod -muam NEE man: A2. 805 mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv LEE NEE 2.5: 8: 303 9w ow mm 3N2 on was EN m3: HNN 3m: 91w: N32 -muEm Ema“. 93$ m2. 803 mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv -E<m Eton. 2:): 8.: 803 3 ow ms mam 9% rll 3.x NEW me 2% 9% mg 3w 1 fil Eom> £9va sea E ow NN 8s RE SN «ms mm: mm.“ m3 m; 2.» E0“. 803 to a; mam N3 «.3 Nam mm v 3 3 . m Now 8d 5m E0”. 803 mm mm 3m NNN mg 3.? 2 N mm mod . m 5m Emlr SN E0; N 803 mm mm 3w 5w mmm mg EN 3w mm m 8w 5w mm.m E8 F omoa 3 to 3 kg oNN :3 EN mam mq m oN.m m3 fog .8 .02 N 9 v m «N IF! 022E 28: .28 =8 -«N m I738.NN 29% :8 .N -5 QWEE =3 .N 9552 :3 N -mN 9 9 WO 61080 $<m E0... v 803 2.x wms E m3 mod m: m2 mm.“ 8.? $6 oms who $<m 13d m3: AMI: 963. mv mv mv mv mv mv -mnzm 9d 2:): A3 $03 mv mv mv mv mv mv fl 4! -m“_<m_ max m3: a; Boa mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv .25 2:2on 8g 8% mos H3 Bo m3 mv Rm. $.m mod o3 mv 5m. H3 -muzm «Eon. moi A2. $03 mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv -mn_<m «Eon. 2:): A2. 303 3.? 3w: 5m: 3.? Sam: Dz? ems mg we? 8.0 S? 3? mv mv mv mv filmv mv mv mv mv mv -m“_<m_ ENG“. 2:): 8.: Boa m3 «3 m3 mg 3.9THE mmx 92w 8x mg rm: m? Emm> EEK 8%. o; 2w 2.x mg 03 Rs a: m3 N: mg ems «ms E3 v aoa :3 8.x cam 3m max Nww mmwltfi mod mg m3 mg as E0“. m 8%. 8m. m3 8.0.: 85 2% 3m 8.” m3 and 9% Rm _|mo.w E0“. N 803 NEW. 3.x g mm.” m; 8.x m3 5” 8.x 3mm 9% mg E8 r 803 mmm. mg N? ova N: 9m mg mg mod 9.” 3% mg .8 .02 099E 25: 20m 2mm -8 98% 92 2mm .8 293 :mw -mm Ewes :82 .3 9992 3% R 8 on 8 8 3H on 5 WO 61080 $<m E0“. : 303 Em m5 :3 :1 m3 my 8.: 8.: mmm m3 05m 93 Em Rx 8.: mwm mm.m mam 12:“. mafia Am: so: my my gem/E m5; 2:): 8: 803 my my ? P -muzm me: min: Am: 803 my my my my my my my my my my my my my my my my my .33 2:): 8.: 803 2m ill 2m: 8m Em 93 my wmm Sm mmma mmm m3 mom mam mam mNm mmm mmm -muzm ENG”. ms: 6.: 803 my my my my my my my my my my my my my my my my my $<m Bio“. 2:); Am: 803 Rm 8.? :3 mom m me my mom: w: 8.: N: mm? 3.? mmmz 8.? Sm; «ms 3.: -mn.<m Egon. man: a: $03 my my my my my my my my my my my my my my my my my : H sir! -E<m Euom z:>_v 3.: 80.: 23 3.: 8.: mm: mm.” Sm Sm m: is mm.“ mm: 8.x m3 m; Sm DE o: EomS 29: $03 m: mm: m: Rm mom my Em mm.“ as mm: 8.: 8.: NS Sm mm: as 8.: E0: w 803 m: m? Sm Sm wa mm.m 8m mmw 2% 2% «mm mm.w 03 wNm 9% m; Nmm P A Eon m so: m3 9% Sm mmm Sm $2 mmm Sm gm gm 8.? Rm 0; 0mm 3w mmm Em E8 N 80.: «mm Rm mwm mg mm.m mom Sm 8.x NS Sm mmm Sm Km mmm Sm mum Sm E8 : 803 Hg mmm Em 3% mwm 3m m3 :3 mmm Em mmm 8m 9% mm 2.x 3w mmm .8 .oz mm 8 o: E N: 3 m2 N2 m: m: 3 3 a: :m om mm mm WO 61080 -25 EB v sea $<m twin. min; 8: 803 $<m.3: 2:): A2. 203 $<m-mn: man: 8g 803 mv mv mv my mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv $<m 2:2on :3. 9.63 mm.m m: 8.9 :3 m3 30 3m 8.0 $6 MS, m? mm.m m3 mmm Hmd $<m«NEE min: A2. 803 mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv $<mmama“. 2.5: A2 303 m3 2.x E o: $<mWEE m3: 8.: 303 mv Sm mv mv mv $<mWEE 2:); Nflllllll 803 $3 Nam mm.“ Es 8s 8s 5m 8s 03 E9; E93 803 m: 03 :.w a: am: m: N3 ems :3 a mm.“ OE mos E0“. v 803 a? mg X; E8 m sea New Rd 93 E0“. N 303 :3 03 m3 m3 E0; F sea 3.x N31modi 8.02 «m mm om. Q WO 61080 .828 E0“: v sea mm: a}. ohm 0?. a: N3 mv mv 8.: mms mos 8E $8 mv mv 88 man 2%. .85: moi: 8.: 305 .228 85“: 2:2: 8.: $03 $3: m9: win: 8: 303 mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mV 2:2: r! .928 8: 30:: m; mv mom mv 83 H3 mv mv mi: :3 m3 m3 a} mv mv 38 in -348 mama“. mad: 8.: 80.: mv mV mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv 88v mv -928. 8E8 2:2: 8.: 80.: mow 8.? $8 $4”. as 2.8 :82 $82 3.8 :l 8.? o: mos mm? 38 3mg 3.82 Dem .928 Ema”. moi: 8: 303 mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv 38v my mv m: mv -E<m Egon 2:2: 8.: 80:: a? $8 3.: 38 8.: 8.8 38 :3 mg :2 8: wmx $3 $8 mv 88.8 m3 Ewm> 8.9:: 303 max 8.8 :8 av 88 9: 8v av 2.8 28 mm: $8 8...: 23 3.0 8.8 8...: N 4!! Emu. v 80:: 8.8 :3 m: $8 NS: $8[ITIII 9} 8.8 $8 $8 8.8 2.8 H: mama 83 R8 Rs E0“. 8 80:: Ea mm.“ 8.8 83: 8.8 2.8 3.8 m3 $8 88 $8 8; :88 SN ms m3 :8 E0: N sea 3.8 3.: :3 mmo 88 :8 8.8 Hm.“ $8 £8 8.8 $8 Nam m: mm.“ No.0. 3.8 E8 F 80:: $8 mm.“ mg NE 3.8 $8 8.8 N: 88 8.8 8.8 $8 88.8 8.: 3.: mg mm.“ L g |: .oo .oz 8 mm 8 E 8 No «w 88 mm IT1 8 E 2 8 8 mm mm mm WO 61080 m3 3.? Ed $.92 mo? Rs Bo 86 is 3.? on? mg :3 86 Sm mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv iv mv mv mv II.|_|.|I| -nu.<m 2.5; $4. emu—Q mm.m m3 :3 9% Sm mm.m 8.? 3m $6. mm.m 8.? m3 8.9 N32 OS mmm mv -mnzm ammo; man: 3 Ono—Q mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv Ev mv mv mv mm: mm.“ 8.x: 8.? 2.? mo? mm.“ R? NS 8.? SN 3.? 5m: m: wwm mod mv mv B.mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv vmv mv mv mv N: 8.x Ham one a? m? EN mm.“ m: m: 2.? 8.x 8.? Rs mm.“ Ed Eom> E9: coo—Q 8x w: 8.x Rm mm...“ 8x o: EN Rx WEI; 3m m3 a; 2w N: E am.“ _.. _ E3 ¢ coo—Q mmx 2.x m3 mom 2d 86. 9% mm m New _77 ~ E0; m emu—Q m3 3m Ed 5m mmm mg mg cod flog E0“. N emu—Q wdm 9mm 5m mam 9% Ex «3 ohm wwm 3m mum 9% mam mg mg mam 9; Eon F Ono—Q mg 2%: 93 2}. 3m m; 3w «3 8w 0; mod m; N3 mg mg a; mg .oo . 02 B m: m: a: om? RF «3 _ 4 WO 61080 .25 E0". v 1&9: $8 $.82 3.? N: 88.8 No.8 m3- m3 mm 88 8N.“ $8 mv m o: 03 3m mg $<m .85“. mad: 8: 803 -muzm 8E 2:2: 8: 30:: $<m me: mag 8.: 803 mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mV mv mv mv mv mv mv .25 2:): 8.: 303 3m 9R HS :3 mm.m Sm mm.m m3 8 mv mv my m $8 m3 mm.m 5m mam -25 8E9: min: 8: 80.: mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv .95 8E0“: 2:2: 8: 803 o: 2.? 5:? 8.8 3:? m2 $.82 mm? :8 oz mam $8 888 2.82 9mm $8 m3 $<m Ewe”: man: 8.: 303 mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv my mv mv mv mv mv $<m FEE 2:2: 8.: 803 2.: 2.? 8.: 8.8 3.? N: $8 08.: m: mv o $8 :82 92 2.8 a} 8:}. $8 Eme E9: 803 of. NS 8.8 3.8 mm: NE 8.: mg m: 8.8 3: «ms mm: mm.“ m: 88 «.3 E0“. w 80.: 38 8.8 8.8 $8 :8 8; m: 8.8 mm N 8.8 Km 888 mm: Nam E 38 £8 E0”: m 30.: mg 38 83 8.8 3.8 N: w 88.8 08.8 3.8 £8 38 E8 NE E8 E0“. N 803 8.8 No.8 83 $8 8.8 E 8 m; 8.8 $8 £8 88 8.8 88 38 E0“. : so... 88.8 88 $8 3.8 88 co m 8.8 88.8 8.8 max gm m? 8.8 $8 .8 .oz mm: :8 mm: mm: mm: [L8: N? 82 :8: 88 8: m8: 2: 2; NVD 83 3: £6 HE NHH mg a}. m: Q? mo.w 86 mod mg 0N6 was m: 3.? $<m win. 93% A: 303 LEE E: z__>_v a: 803 l LEE me. wig A2 80.0. mv mv mv mv -$<m 2:): A2. $03 3». mg. Dd o3 -$<m mama“. moi _ Ego“. 2:): -E<m ENG... m3: Ill! -E<m ENG; 2:): A2. $03 Rs 59 m3 mm.“ mvN 8.0 3m 85 E maw Ex 2.0 m: mod was 3.0 3s E9; 89: 803 3; mm.“ mg 02 wa E 03 NM: m3 0% mow 1 llLIII 3w E6“. w omoa m3 m? 9% a; mmd m? as 3m Ham med _m:vmmw Eon. m 2% m3 3w mg 5 «3 :6 mm.m 3.x mm.» Em: N $03 9.x m3 mew N? mam m3 wa 8.x 9.; H: 5m mam and o: M3 E «2 E; mm? 5? mg WO 61080 -mHZm Ema v $03 N2 8.? m3 3.0 H3 NE ON.“ 9% E;. 3m m3 m3 m3 mm.m S9 SK mmx $<m '3: many le._._ $03 -m“.<m Ed 2%: a... 303 -m“.<m max man: N2. 8% mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv m v mv mv my mv mv Nmmv mv mv LEE 2:): 8: 803 Hg m3 o3 5m 3m Rm 9% 0mm w? mv mam mv Em mv Semv mm.m 5m $5 9E0“. mafia AB. 803 mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv ~me mv mv :95 mEom 2:); 8.: 803 «ms mws N2 moo mum o3 3: m3 3w: 5m Sm owe o: m3 mnmv mm.“ mow .95 Emom 23% A2. 803 mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv my mv mv va mv my -E<m Ewe“. 2.5; 8.: 803 mm.“ 8w mms NE «E m: mg N3 8m 3m 03 two NE 03 Nmmv m: fix Eom> $9; 803 2% 2% 8w SN a: own mg as mow mos 0: 8.9 E8 v 803 9% :3 9% mow wmw Ew 86. How Ed H: 8» Now 3m H: 9% w; mam E0“. m 803 m3 mod m3 wow wow 8» mg 3% 2d SK Ex 0; 5m 2% O3 5m 3% Eon N 803 N; Ex New 03 8w 8w mg Sm 8.x NS m; m; 3m and 8w E8 r 803. 8.0. 3w <3 mg m; Rm 8.? 3w 8.? 3m m; mm.“ mm.m 8w Nwm .8 .02 me «9 mm: 9: t: 8; 2: 0: at mt N: Jill! mt at 2: x: WO 61080 LEE Emu v 303 mmm mom SK omm man 3?. 9m $<m IE: min: m.__ goa -25 min. 2:): N9. 8%. .975 max mafia A2. my my my my my my my my I my -25 2:2on 8.: $03 mmm 2% am 2m mum 2% my mmm mmm HE my -muzm Elem man: 3. $03 my my my my my my my my my my my my my my my my my -25 «Eon 2:); N3 203 mm? m3: E man 8.? 2.? m3: mama fix m3 mom 8.? my m3: m? 3.? mom -mn_<m_ Emmi m3”: N2 803 my my my my my my my my my my my my my my IflI Lem/E Emmi 2:): 2. 803 8s «m? mms 0: «mm mos mum 2m «ms om.m mom mm.m my 3m Rm DE m3 E9; 893 803 m: N3 m: <sz SE ems E 2w ems 8m Ex 8m :3 «3 Sm: E Nmm E0”. mam 8m m; n? N3 m; mmm mm.m mmx mom mom; m: 3m mm; mm.m N3.
Em Em 3% mm.m mmm mom :3 as 35 3% Em mm.“ E0“. N $03 mm.m mm; mm.m 3.x 3m mm: am Km m3 mm.“ E9 F 803 Rm Sm Bm Sm m2 mmm mm.“ mmm Rm mom mmx 8.2 mm: a: mm: 9: m2 m2 5F m2 08 mom 3N WO 61080 [m2 fi 8m 86 N3 m3 m3 N3 «ms 86 m3 m3 8:0 EN $<m twin. man; 803 -muzm «E 2:); j 305 -m“_<m an: moi 5. 303 mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv $<m 2:): A3 805 2% «mm H3 Em Nwm SmLSam 3m mam 3m m3 Sm mmm N3 .345 manna man: a: 303 my mv mv mv mv mv mv 3 mv mv mv mv mv -25 mEE 2:): a... 803 03 ~32 Ea mg H32 $2 3.? mam m3: $5 8s 3.? 8.x: .35 Ewan. man: a: 803 mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv .95 Egon 2.5; a... 89a H3 an 9: H; wow Re mos mg m3 Es Rs 33 mow N3 mm.“ N3 m3 «58> 29: 303 2: em.“ wow NEW 3: So SE mg m3 Rx 92w H: as omx mm? mm.“ mam E8 v sea mm.“ mnw onm m3 3m a: was 5w mos 3.x NEW m: m; mm.“ mg as 3m E9 m 805 3K 8w m3 mam N3 NEW New 8.? 2% mg 2% 3.x Ba mow mg 2% 8.x E0; N 803 m3 mg 8w 3m mow: 3m mg mm.» m3 mg mm; mg 93 3.x 3w mg gm E0“. F 803 3w 93 8d Ed 85 5m New mam o3 9% mod 3% mg mg Nam $.m 3m 8 .2. mom com SN SN :N 2m EN ma EN gm 2N wow 8 EN EN NNN mmm WO 61080 $<m Eon q 803 84”, 8d mv mv Sm mv 86 a}, mum mom Sue 33 8w 33 as 2%ImE min; 2. 803 i8.0 .35 Ed 2.3: mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mV mv .85 2:); A2. mv mv mv mv m3. mv :3. 3m 8.», mv mv Sm. 9% Rm 23 -muzm «Eon. 93$ 3 mv mv mv mv mv mv my mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv $<m male“. 2:);1 203 m3 3.? m3. an 3m: on? m: m3 $<m FEE mafia 803 mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv -m“_<m Egon 2:): A2. 803 So me 3m m3 3m Nam m: 5m E9; E9: 303 03 Ed E8 v Boa 3: ov mm: E0; m 8% HEW 3w 93 3d 9% Eon N 8% m3: 8.x 23 33 NE Hm.“ :3 mg 2% 3m: R.» E8 F 803 m3 3m who 8.02 mmm 0% om WO 61080 -mnzm E0”. go: NE EN H3 <3 HE new 8.0 53 Bo m3 03 «ms m: mm m ems mos m3 3% :95“. min: A3 203 -E<m 3: 2:); A3 805 $5 me. min: a: $03 mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv $<m 2.3 8.: 803 a} cod mom. mm.m 3m $.m 8m. Sm mm.m $.m N3 N3 mam om max o 03 No.0 m3, $5 mEmE min: 303 mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv :lllr| mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv $45 Emmi 2.5: 2.? mama m5 Bx m2 Ea m3 8.? 0.? N: mmwz wmw mow 8 m2 m; asTm: -E<m ENE“. 93$ mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv $<m Emmi 2:): mm.“ m? who 93 mg Hm.“ 03 mg 30 is 8.x as no.“ wm m mow mm.“ mm.“ Ewm> E9: mms g 98 NE NE N3 30 N3 SN 8s was aw mws om w mow as 30 E8 v mg HS m: om.“ SW «3 w: 8.x 3w 2 «m m N; Ed 8m m 3m $3 mm.“ E9. m mg 3w m3 mg cam 3w NS N3 8d mm m R» 3d mg TI3mm 25 Ed «mm E9 N mg a; 8w mg .23 8.x Now N3 3m R «5 :6. mg mm w; 3% $.m 1|. w m Eon r mg 86 m3 3% 26 Nam 3.x mg ww.m K wq m NE $6 mm.m m 3m 3m mow .oo .02 g @N EN SN gm SN 2% 8N EN «mm 8N mmm EN 5mm 8N wmm 8N .25 Eon w 803 Rd Sm m3 mms owe 93 9% 8;“. an o: m3 Rd 3m H: as mv mv Pam I3: man: a: 803 92m.3: z__>: a... 303 8%-mox waiv 8.: onoa mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv $<m z__>: 5g 8% Sm mom mv 5o m3 N3. 3m mv mom 3% mv 9} 8m N3. mod mv jv a“. min: A2. omoa mv mv flmv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv $<m«Halon. 2:); A2. omo_o_ E? 5.? m3 8.x Es d? 8s Rm mum 8.? own 2x 3.0 m: 8.? mv gm $<mWEE 9:0: A2. 803 mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv my mv mv mv mv mv mv mv E<mwhen. 2:); a... 303 8s :3 m3 was 3: NE N: 85 v3 3% $.m a...“ £6 m: 3m mv m3 EomS E9: 803 mm.“ $6 N3 $3 om: om.“ m3 wad Eon. w 303 mg mm.“ mmm $3 fig gm wad SKI? E0; m 8% NS a: Rm 3.x mg 5m 03 Ex 3% 8w 2% 8.x wow mg mg mm.“ 2.x E8 N 803 3.? 3.x 3.x 5m 35 a; 8.x 9% 9% NEW a; 8.» 3w mg mg N: mm.» Eon F 803 «.3 3.x 3% 2; S; m; H; 3% :3 2; a: m; 5m w: mama oo.02 EN mom SN EN 8N 9% EN Km NR «R BN RN QR 3N 0mm «mm 8N WO 61080 8&8 E6“. v $05 28 $8 m: 8 o mm m Bo N8 mos o SN 8.8 Nmm o: 9:8 .85“. man: 8.: $03 .38 85“. 2:): 8: 803 -muzm me: mad: 8: 805 mv mv mv m v mv mv mv mv mv mV mv .35 2%: 8: 803 8mm m3 mam S 88 8 me: . mv m mam 3m m m3 woo $48 8E0“. man: 8.: so: mv mv mv mv mv mv mV mv mv mv mv -858 8E0“. 2:): 8: 305 $3 8s 88 «m. N3 mos m: mm m3. 3m z l|+lll :8 28 -23: Egon man: 8.: 3% mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv mv -248 Ema”. z:>: 8: ads. wmd Es m: $8 8.0 88 88 S u $8 o: 8.8 Eom> 8.9: 303 m: was 8.8 a: 88 £8 88 8 8 8.8 m: 8.8 N 88 Eon: q 303 3.8 $8 38 $8 :3 mm.” 2% mm m No.8 38 38 3.8 Eon. 8 805 can $8 £8 $8 mm.“ £8 $8 om m $8 Km $8 mg E0“. N 803 mew $8 mg 3.8 8.8 £8 38 E m ohm m; $8 8.0.
E0: : 80.: 88 :32 mg Ba 8me 5% mod E m mg 1T! 8.8 m; mg .8 .oz am SN :8 N mm 8m 0mm 5N 88 8N 5N 28 8

Claims (1)

1. A compound of formula (l-A) or (l-B): N N N Y / / (R2)Q N ” (l-Al l n _ ((-8) including any eric or stereochemically isomeric form thereof. wherein 10 each R2 is independently selected from hydroxyl. halogen, ‘C1-4aIkyl, 02.4alkenyl, C2-4alkynyl, CMalkoxy, hydroxyC1-4alkyl, hydroxyCMalkoxy, haloCMalkyl, haloC1- talkoxy, yhaloC1_4alkyl, hydroxyhaloC1-4alkoxy, C1_4alkoxy01_4alkyl, haloC1. 4alkoxyC1_talkyl, Ci.4alkoxyci.4alkyl wherein each CMalkyl may ally be substituted With one or two hydroxyl groups. hydroxyhaloC1-4alkoxyC1.4alkyl, R”, Ci. 15 4alky| substituted with R13, CMalkyl substituted with -C(=O)-R‘3, CMalkoxy substituted with with R13, CMalkoxy tuted with -C(=O)-R‘3, ~C(=O)-R13, CMalkyl substituted -NR7R8, CMalkyl substituted with —C(=O)-NR7R8, CMalkoxy substituted with -NR7R5, koxy substituted with —C(=O)-NR7RB, -NR7R8 and -C(=O)-NR7R8; or when two atoms they may be taken together to form a groups are attached to adjacent carbon 20 radical of formula: (C<R")zip-O-; -X~CH=CH-; or -X-CH=N-; wherein R17 represents hydrogen or fluorine. p represents 1 or 2 and X represents 0 or S; Y represents ~CR18=N-OR19 or -—E-D; SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) 2012/052672 3 to 12 D represents a 3 to 12 ring membered clic or bicyclic carbocyclyl or a ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or 8. n said carbocyclyl and heterocyclyl may each optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R1 groups; E ents a bond, R23)n-, Cz.4alkenediyl Optionally tuted with R22, CZ. -NR22- 4alkynediyl optionally substituted with R22, —CO-(CR22R23)s-, -(CR22R23)S.Co-, (CR22R23)5-, '(CR22R23)5'NR22‘, ‘O'(CR22R23)5‘, “(CR22R23)5‘O‘, 'S(O)m'(CR22R23)s', _ (CR22R23)s-S(O)m-, —(CR22R23)5-CO-NRzz-(CR22R23)S- or R23)s-NR22-CO— 10 (CR22R23)5'; R1 represents hydrogen, halo, cyano, Ciealkyl. C1.6alkoxy, -C(=O)-O- Cigalkyl, CZ- 4aikenyi, hydroxthealkyl, haloC1-6aikyl, yhalocmalkyl, cyanoCMalkyl, Ci- saikoxycmaikyi wherein each Chealkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two 15 hydroxyi groups, -NR4R5, Cmaikyi substituted with -O-C(=O)- C1_6alkyl, C1-5alkyi substituted substituted with -NR4R5, —C(=O)-NR4R5, —C(=O)-Cmaikyl-NR4R5, Ci.ealkyi with -C(=O)-NR“R5, -S(=O)2-Ct-6alkyi, -S(=O)2-haioct-eaikyi, —S(=0)2-NR”R‘5, ct. salkyl substituted with —S(=O)2-C1_6alkyl, Ct-eaikyl substituted with -S(=O)2-haioC1.5aikyi, C1.6alkyl substituted with —S(=O)2-NR“R‘5, Chealkyl substituted with -NH-S(=O)2-Ct- with — 20 ealkyl, 01.6alkyl substituted with —NH-S(=O)2-haloCi.6alkyl, Ci_6a|ky| substituted NR‘2—3(=oiz—NR“R‘S, R6, 01.6alkyl substituted with R5, —C(=O)—R6, Ct_5alkyl substituted with - with —C(=O)-R6, hydroxth-6aikyl substituted with R6, Cmalkyi substituted with Si(CH3)3, 01.6aikyl substituted with ~P(=O)(OH)2 or C1_5alkyl substituted — P(=O)(OCi.eaikyl)2; R3 represents hydroxyl, 01.6alkoxy, yC1_5aikoxy, Cmaikoxy substituted with -NR‘°R“, Cmalkyl, C2.6alkenyl, Cz_saikynyl, haioCi.6aikyi optionally tuted with —O- C(=O)-C1.Galkyl, hydroxth.6aikyl optionally tuted with -O-C(=O)~Ct.eaikyi, hydroxyCz_6alkenyl, yCZ.5alkyny|, hydroxyhalocmalkyl, cyanoC1.6alkyt, kyl 30 substituted with carboxyl, Cmalkyl substituted with -C1_6a|kyl, Ct_ealkyl substituted with —C(=O)—O—Ct.5alkyl, Cmalkyl substituted with C1.salkoxyCmalkyI-O- tuted with C(=O)—, 01-5aikyi substituted with C1-5alkoxyC1.6aikyl-C(=O)-, Chealkyl —O-C(=O)—C1_5alkyi, Ci_6aikoxy01_6alkyl wherein each C1.5alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or with ——O-C(=O)—C1.5alkyl, C2.5alkenyl substituted 35 substituted with 01.5alkoxy, Czealkynyi tuted with Ct_eaikoxy. C1.6alkyl SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) with R9 and optionally substituted with -O-C(=O)-Ci.6alkyi, i tuted with — C(=O)-R9, Cisalkyl substituted with hydroxyl and R9, Czealkenyi substituted with R9, C2. salkynyl substituted with R9, ky| substituted with --NR‘°R“, 02.6alkenyl substituted with -NR‘°R“, Czsaikynyi substituted with -NR1°R”, Cheaikyl tuted with hydroxyl and -NR‘°R“, Cmalkyl substituted with one or two halogens and -NR‘°R“, -Ci_6aikyl- =N-o-R‘2, Cmalkyi substituted with -NR‘°R“. Ci_5alkyl substituted with —o-C(=0)-NR’°R“, —S(=O)2-C1.6alkyl, —S(=O)2-haioCisalkyl, —S(=0)2-NR”R‘5, C1. salkyl substituted with -S(=O)2-Ci_5aikyi, Ci_ealkyl substituted with -S(=O)2-haioci_5alkyl, 10 Cisalkyl substituted with —S(=O)2-NR”R‘5, Ci_6alkyi substituted with ~NR’2—S(=O)2-Ci_ salkyl, Cisalkyl substituted with —NH-S(=O)2-haloci.salkyl. 01.5alkyl substituted with —NR‘2-S(=O)2-NR”R15, R”, Cmaikyl substituted with —P(=O)(OH)2 or c,_6aikyi substituted with (OC1.eaikyi)2; 15 R4 and R5 each independently represent hydrogen, C1-6aikyi, C1_5aikyl substituted with - NR14R‘5,hydroxyCi.6aikyi, haloCi.6alkyl, hydroxyhaloCi-6aikyl. Ci_6aikoxy01.aaikyi wherein each Cmalkyi may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, — S(:O)2-Ci.salkyi, —S(=O)2—haioci.5alkyl, —S(=O)2-NR”R15, —C(=oi—NR‘4R‘5, -C(=O)-O- Cisalkyl, -C(=O)-R13, C1_5alky| substituted with -S(=O)2-C1-eaikyl, Cmalkyi substituted 2O with -S(=O)2-hal001_5alkyl, 01.5alkyl substituted with 2-NR”R’5, Ci_5alkyl substituted with =O)2-Ci.5alkyl, Ci.5alkyl substituted with —NH-S(=O)2-haloCi. salkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with —NH- S(=O)2-NR”R‘5, R13 or Ci_salkyl substituted with R13; 25 R6 represents Cg_8cycloalkyi, Ca.8cycioaikenyl, , 4 to ered monocyciic heterocyciyi containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or 8; said Ca. acycloalkyi, 03.8cycioalkenyi, phenyi, 4 to 7-membered monocyciic heterocyclyl, optionally and each independently being tuted by 1, 2, 3, .4 or 5 substituents, each substituent independently being selected from cyano, C1_5aikyi, cyanoC1_5alkyi, 30 hydroxyl, carboxyl, hydroxyCmalkyl, halogen, haloC1_6alel, hydroxyhaloci_5alkyi, C1. ealkoxy, C1.6alkoxy01.5alkyl, C,_6alkyl-O-C(=O)-, -NR“R‘5, -C(=O)-NR“‘R'5, c,_6aii<yi substituted with -NR“R‘5, C1-eaikyl substituted with -C(=O)-NR‘4R‘5, -S(=O)2-Ci_6alkyl, —S(=O)2-haioci-6aikyl, —si=0)2-NR‘4R‘5, kyi tuted with 2-C,_5alkyl, c1. saikyl substituted with —S(=O)2-haioCi-6alkyi, Ci-6alkyi substituted with z- SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) NR”R‘5. 01.5alkyl substituted with =O)2-C1.salkyl, Cmalkyl substituted with —NH- S(=O)2-hal001_salky| or Cisalkyl substituted with -NH-si=0)2-NR?“R‘5; R7 and R8 each independently represent hydrogen, 01.5alkyl, hydroxyCi.ealkyl, haloC1_ saikyl, hydroxyhaloC1_6alkyl or 01.6alkoxyC1_6alkyl; R9 represents C3-8cycloalkyl, Cucycloalkenyl, phenyl, naphthyl. or 3 to 12 membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one atom ed from N, O or 8, said loalkyl. Ca.8cycloalkenyl, phenyl, naphthyl, or 3 to 12 membered 10 monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl each optionally and each independently being substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents, each substituent independently being ed from =0, CMaIkyl, hydroxyl, carboxyl, hydroxyCi_4alkyl, cyano, cyanoCMalkyl, C1-4alkyl-O-C(=O)-, CMalkyl substituted with C1.4alkyi-O-C(=O)-, C1_4alkyi-C(=O)-, Cit 4alkoxyCMalkyl wherein each kyl may optionally be substituted with one or two 15 hydroxyl groups, halogen, alkyl, hydroxyhaloC1.4alkyl, —NR”R‘5, -C(=O)- NR‘4R‘5. CMalkyl substituted with -NR“‘R‘5, Ci.4alkyl substituted with -c<=0)-NR‘4R‘5, CMalkoxy, 2-C1§4alkyl, —S(=O)2-haloci.4alkyl, -S(=O.)2-NR”R15, CMalkyl substituted with —S(=0)2-NR”R15, CMalel tuted with—NH-S(=0)2-c1..4aikyi, ct. dalkyl tuted with —NH-S(=O)2-haloci.4alkyl, Ci_4alkyl substituted with —NH-S(=O)2- 20 NR‘4R15, R13, -C(=O)-R‘3, CMalkyl substituted with R“, phenyl optionally substituted with R16, phenle1_5alkyl wherein the phenyl is optionally substituted with R‘ia 5 or 6- membered aromatic monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or 3 wherein said heterocyclyl is optionally substituted with R16; or when two of the substituents of R9 are attached to the same atom, they may be 25 taken together to form a 4 to 7-membered saturated monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S; R10 and R“ each ndently represent hydrogen, yl, Cisalkyl, cyanoCmalkyl, C1_5alky| substituted with —NR”R15. Ci-ea|kyl substituted with —C(=O)—NR”R15, haloCi. 30 Galkyl, hydroxyC1.Balkyl, hydroxyhaloCi-6alkyl
NZ622702A 2011-10-28 2012-10-26 Anticancer pyridopyrazines via the inhibition of fgfr kinases NZ622702B2 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201161552888P 2011-10-28 2011-10-28
GBGB1118656.6A GB201118656D0 (en) 2011-10-28 2011-10-28 New compounds
GB1118656.6 2011-10-28
US61/552,888 2011-10-28
PCT/GB2012/052672 WO2013061080A1 (en) 2011-10-28 2012-10-26 Anticancer pyridopyrazines via the inhibition of fgfr kinases

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
NZ622702A NZ622702A (en) 2016-08-26
NZ622702B2 true NZ622702B2 (en) 2016-11-29

Family

ID=

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US10272087B2 (en) Pteridines as FGFR inhibitors
US9757364B2 (en) Naphthyridine derivative compounds
US10045982B2 (en) Substituted pyrido[2,3-b]pyrazines as FGFR kinase inhibitors
US9737544B2 (en) Compounds
AU2014259151B2 (en) Quinazolinone derivatives useful as FGFR kinase modulators
DK2776397T3 (en) QUINOLINES AS FGFR CHINA MODULATORS
EP2776408B1 (en) Anticancer benzopyrazines via the inhibition of fgfr kinases
EP2646432A1 (en) Substituted benzopyrazin derivatives as fgfr kinase inhibitors for the treatment of cancer diseases
AU2011247047A1 (en) Pyrazolyl quinoxaline kinase inhibitors
NZ622702B2 (en) Anticancer pyridopyrazines via the inhibition of fgfr kinases